hide results

    FAQ/Walkthrough by Muchitsujo

    Version: 1.01 | Updated: 09/21/05 | Printable Version | Search This Guide

    FAQ / WALKTHROUGH ON RESIDENT EVIL 4 (BIOHAZARD 4, outside the US) for the
    Nintendo GameCube.
    
    Written by: Muchitsujo, v 1.00
    
    =========================================
    =  00: TABLE OF CONTENTS / LEGAL SPEAK  =
    =========================================
    
    ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
    : #  | CONTENTS                              | UPDATED   :
    : 00 | TABLE OF CONTENTS / LEGAL SPEAK       | 09/21/05  :
    : 01 | VERSION INFO                          | 09/21/05  :
    : 02 | INTRODUCTION                          | 05/21/05  :
    : 03 | TACTICS                               | 05/20/05  :
    : 04 | ENEMIES                               | 03/12/05  :
    : 05 | WEAPONS                               | 09/21/05  :
    : 06 | WALKTHROUGH                           | 09/21/05  :
    : 07 | REWARDS                               | 08/19/05  :
    : 08 | MEDALLIONS / SHOOTING RANGE           | 05/22/05  :
    : 09 | ASSIGNMENT ADA                        | 08/19/05  :
    : 10 | MERCENARIES MINI-GAME                 | 03/12/05  :
    : 11 | FILE TRANSCRIPTS                      | 03/21/05  :
    : 12 | PUZZLE SOLUTIONS                      | 08/16/05  :
    : 13 | BOSS STRATEGIES                       | 09/21/05  :
    : 14 | ITEM LIST                             | 09/20/05  :
    : 15 | UNANSWERED QUESTIONS / PARTING SHOTS  | 09/20/05  :
    : 16 | FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS            | 09/20/05  :
    : 17 | FUTURE UPDATES                        | 09/20/05  :
    : 18 | CONTACT INFO                          | 08/21/05  :
    : 19 | FINAL NOTES                           | 08/21/05  :
    ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
    
    TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: At this point in time, gamefaqs.com, neoseeker.com,
    and faqs.ign.com are permitted to host this FAQ.  All others must first seek, 
    then be granted, permission to use this FAQ in any way, be it hosting or 
    merely taking out excerpts.  Any other usage is oh so illegal and proper 
    steps will be taken.  All direct references and characters in the game are 
    property of Capcom, but this FAQ and the effort put into either writing or 
    transcribing is mine and mine alone.  (In other words, copyright, by me, 
    Muchitsujo).  Pop culture references are the property of whomever, and while
    the references may be original, the object in question is not.
    
    or, as GameFaqs puts it...
    
    This may be not be reproduced under any circumstances except for personal,
    private use. It may not be placed on any web site or otherwise distributed
    publicly without advance written permission. Use of this guide on any other
    web site or as a part of any public display is strictly prohibited, and a
    violation of copyright.
    
    DISCLAIMER:  I'm just going to go at this one right now.  I personally had the
    whole of the plot of RE4 ruined for me while watching what I thought was a
    fairly innocent preview/review, but ended up unwilling subject to ten kinds of
    spoilers flashing across the screen unexpectedly.  So I'll make it clear right
    now: THIS FAQ DOES CONTAIN SPOILERS.  IF YOU DON'T WANT TO DEAL WITH THEM, SKIP
    DOWN TO THE WALKTRHOUGH AND GO STRICTLY IN ORDER.  I WON'T REVEAL SOMETHING
    UNTIL YOU ALREADY KNOW WHAT'S HAPPENING.  Enemy listings, however, will appear
    as they do in every other RE FAQ I've done.
    
    Also, THIS IS NOT A SPEED GUIDE.  I WRITE THESE BY FOCUSING ON DETAIL AND
    EFFICIENCY.  The methods in this guide have gotten me the highest rankings
    regardless of how much junk I pick up along the way, and I've probably tested
    them a few times now.  By my own admission, I try to write my Walkthroughs in a
    no BS format.  This means that I'm not going to take time leading you in the
    wrong direction or repeat myself just to lengthen the guide.  If it's not part
    of the game, it's not in here either.
    
    ======================
    =  01: VERSION INFO  =
    ======================
    
    v 0.8
    Not a public release.  Completed on 3/21/05, enemies, file transcripts, boss
    strategies, Mercenaries, contact info, and final notes sections all completed.
    Weapons, walkthrough, item list, parting shots, and FAQ all partially complete.
    Tipping the scales at 170kb, this is already on pace to be one of the biggest
    FAQs I've ever done.  Unfortunately for me, the blasted thing isn't even half
    finished.  More like 40%.
    
    v 0.9
    Not a public release.  Muchi takes a serious hiatus, writes another mini-FAQ,
    comes back somewhat refeshed.  Completed on 5/23/05, introduction, tactics,
    weapons, medallions / shooting range all up-to-date, Walkthrough is through
    Chapter 3-1, all other things with minor tweaks.  An even 265kb.
    
    v 1.0
    First public release.  Job and other gaming needs cutting into it.  Completed
    on 8/21/05, with walkthrough and Assignment Ada completed.  Just about
    everything gets a slight tweak, item list has everything correspond properly
    now.  Grand total of 434kb.
    
    v 1.01
    Second public release.  Completed on 9/21/05, shortly after finishing the game
    on Professional Mode.  New items found, so the walkthrough and the item list
    have been updated.  I've also added some merchant windows telling you what new
    stuff there is to find in each meeting.  Due to a few boss fights lasting
    longer than they would've otherwise, I've also updated some of the boss tactics
    to take into account some attacks that I hadn't even seen before.  Updated a
    few other things (Q & A, Shooting Range, Parting shots) based on some feedback.
    Now weighing in at 459k, but the guide still isn't technically complete.  There
    are a few strategies passed on that I want to test out, and a few treasures I
    suspect I still haven't managed to hunt down yet.
    
    ======================
    =  02: INTRODUCTION  =
    ======================
    
    "1998... I'll never forget it...
    
    It was the year when those grisly murders occurred in the Arklay Mountains.
    
    Soon after, the news was out to the whole world revealing that it was the fault
    of a secret viral experiment conducted by the international pharmaceutical
    enterprise, Umbrella.
    
    The virus broke out in a nearby mountain community, Raccoon City.
    
    And hit the peaceful little town with a devastating blow, crippling its very
    foundation.
    
    Not taking any chances, the President of the United States ordered a
    contingency plan... to sterilize Raccoon City.
    
    With the whole affair gone public, the United States government issued an
    indefinate suspension of business decree to Umbrella.
    
    Soon its stock prices crashed and, for all intents and purposes, Umbrella was
    finished..."
    
    ...............................................................................
    Long announced, but rarely seen in action, the concept of Resident Evil 4 went
    through many iterations before being released to the public as we know it.
    Other versions ranged from the anticipated raid on Umbrella's facilities to
    Leon wandering through a European castle, stalked by ethereal enemies and
    a maniacal creature known only as "hookman".  While some of the concepts
    survived to the final version, most were thrown out entirely, and the t-virus
    was returned to the laboratory in favor of a dangerous new malady.  It is now
    2004, two years since the last known raid on those tied to Umbrella, and six
    years since what is now refered to only as "the incident"...
    ...............................................................................
    
    "Six years have passed since that horrendous incident..."
    
    =================
    =  03: TACTICS  =
    =================
    
    In all RE games, your ultimate goal is survival... well, in most RE games your
    goal is survival.  In this one it's to kill every living thing with a few minor
    exceptions, but that doesn't mean that you aren't going to avoid death easily.
    More likely, you'll be caught in a few situations where you're face down in
    a growing pool of your own blood, but hey, here are some ways to get around it.
    
     -----------------
    |KNOW THE CONTROLS|
     -----------------
    
    As a default, the controls in this RE are:
    
    CONTROL STICK: Character movement, aim (when weapon is readied)
    
    C-STICK: Change camera angles, zoom in or out.
    
    A: Action (the utility button), confirm choices, attack.
    
    B: Run (with control stick up), quick turn (with control stick down), cancel
       reload (when used with R button)
    
    Y: Status screen toggle
    
    X: Pick up items in status screen, switch between "Wait" and "Follow" modes
       (with Ashley), hide Ashley (when near certain boxes)
    
    Z: Map
    
    Start: Bring up options menu, skip movies
    
    L: Ready knife (on regular screen), rotate item (in status screen)
    
    R: Ready weapon, zoom in (with certain weapons)
    
     ---------------------------
    |PAY ATTENTION TO ITEM SPACE|
     ---------------------------
    
    This replaces the "Conserve Ammo" mantra from every other RE game.  Why?
    Because unless you're really quite foolish and somehow waste a considerable
    amount of ammo after selling some for quick cash at the merchant, you aren't
    going to run out of ammo for any reason.  Most enemies drop it, it's found
    everywhere you look, and any upgrade to the capacity of your gun will fully
    reload it.  Ammo, even healing items (of which you will also likely have more
    than enough, and can buy otherwise), are not rare in this game.  Far from it,
    as the game is more action oriented and less survival toned, you'll be finding
    items all the time.
    
    More likely, you'll have far too much to carry in most parts of the game and
    not nearly enough space to go around.  How should you plan around this?  Well,
    first off, whenever, and I mean whenever a new size of Attache Case appears in
    the merchant's inventory, buy it immediately.  Even if that nifty new gun is
    looking real shiny or you're thisclose to getting a new upgrade on your
    favorite toy, get the case.  You'll thank yourself later, because in the rare
    instance you will sell ammo, you'll be able to tell you have excess.
    
    Also pay attention to what kinds of items you're picking up.  Sometimes, the
    items in the area are a dead giveaway for what sort of enemy you'll be facing
    next.
    
     ----------------
    |HEAL RESPONSIBLY|
     ----------------
    
    Don't get me wrong.  This game has a ton of healing supplies in the form of
    herbs, purchased first-aid sprays, fish (shot, harpooned, whatever), and eggs
    (from chickens and snakes), but because of how often you'll be fighting, you
    may need most of what you get.
    
    Herbs can be found literally everywhere, either lying around or as green glows
    after you kill an enemy.  As in previous games, the Green + Red combination and
    the Green + Green + Green combo are the ones that fully restore health, so
    keep that in mind.
    
    Eggs are a little bit trickier.  They come in three varieties, and the easiest
    way to find them is to waste time around the village and farm areas and wait
    for the chickens to lay them, at which time they will become green glows.  The
    other way is to kill the snakes that swarm certain areas or hide in boxes.
    Snakes tend to automatically drop eggs upon being killed.  The eggs come in
    three varieties: white, brown, and gold.  Brown ones are "healthier" than the
    white ones (common misconception, there's really no difference), and the gold
    ones act as full-healing items.  They take up only one space in the inventory
    so they're nifty little items.  (And, if you're so inclined, you can equip them
    and throw them at enemies for... no effect whatsoever)
    
    Fish are more of a rarity.  There are only a few select times you can find them
    in the game, and you have to kill them first either by shooting the water or
    throwing a harpoon at them, depending on where you are.  The little ones are
    similar to the green herbs, but the mammoth ones can fully heal you, at the
    price of way too many item slots.
    
    Fortunately, the concept of "poison" has been completely removed from the game,
    even in situations where it would theoretically apply, so you'll never have to
    consider carrying around an extra blue herb.
    
    Added to the game is the idea of Yellow Herbs which, when combined with a green
    or red herb, can be used to expand your health bar.  You get just enough yellow
    herbs over the course of the game to fully expand your life bar and Ashley's
    life bar, so if you're paying close attention to your surroundings, you should
    be able to find all of them.
    
     ------------
    |AIM PROPERLY|
     ------------
    
    This is more important than in any other RE game.  There is no auto-aim in this
    game to save you the trouble of tracking an enemy.  To make matters worse, the
    creatures in this game move faster than before, and take more shots on average
    to fell.
    
    On the other hand, the aiming system, while significantly different, is fairly
    easy to get used to unless you're used to the mouse-sensitive FPSs on the
    computer.  It allows for greater freedom in shooting, so if you want to shoot
    the dynamite out of a ganado's hand (HIGHLY RECOMMENDED), you can, and
    similarly, if you want to trip them up by shooting them in the leg, you're
    free to do so.
    
    However, for each enemy there tends to be a key hitpoint that is much more
    effective to shoot at.  For most enemies, the head is a fairly logical weak
    point, though other enemies might have visibile parasites on their bodies,
    which should be your target.  With ganados this is no different, but you have
    two options: shoot at the head if you want to set up a standard roundhouse kick
    or shoot at the area of the leg just below the kneecap if you want them to fall
    down, setting up either a low kick or a suplex, depending on the type of
    ganado it is.  Any of these moves has the capability of popping a head just
    like a gunshot would (don't ask).
    
    Also, try to be conscious of how well a weapon "handles".  This just means how
    much the sight moves when you try to hold it stationary.  Any item that
    requires a stock typically will have below-average handling, stock or no, so
    if you have a serious need for precision, don't use those weapons.
    
    Otherwise, the same general rules apply as in previous RE games.  Shotguns
    pointed upward are a recipe for fun, rifles are dangerous, and most semi-
    automatics still suck.
    
     ---------
    |USE RANGE|
     ---------
    
    Probably more important in this game than in previous games, if only because
    you're given the option of using a rifle from early in the game on.
    
    Simply put, you're going to want to use anything but the shotgun at long
    ranges, and unless you have the unique upgrade, you might want to pass on the
    mine thrower too.  To slow enemies down, shoot them anywhere but the chest, or
    toss a flash grenade if you're in serious trouble.  Grenades are incredible if
    you're interested in taking out a huge group of enemies, and can really come in
    handy if there's a larger group you want to take out before they notice.
    
    For sniping purposes, use the rifle.  You'll want to always aim for the head,
    unless the enemy has dynamite (in which case you should aim for that).  If you
    pull off a clean shot, the surrounding enemies might not notice, but even if
    you don't, whoever caught the bullet will probably be incapacitated and you'll
    be at a somewhat safe distance away.
    
    I highly recommend switching to the semi-auto rifle as soon as the opportunity
    presents itself.  Some of you might balk and say you've already upgraded the
    standard one at it has more power anyway, but really, power is one of the last
    things you need from the rifle, since it's already so good at what it does,
    and what you do need, namely firing speed, the semi-auto has in ample supply.
    
     ------------
    |KNOW THYSELF|
     ------------
    
    You won't really have to deal with the serious adverse effects of having low
    health as you had to in the previous games, as the limping is absent and
    replaced by side holding and slightly decreased manueaverability, but you
    should pay attention to the ever-changing life bar and be aware of when you
    need to heal.  The damage enemies do and are capable of taking will increase as
    the game progresses, and you'll just have to deal with it.
    
    Originally a concept in the ill-fated RE 1.5, Resident Evil 4 also features a
    tactical vest that will allow you to take a lot more damage, but this comes so
    late in the game that you shouldn't be planning around it at least until the
    second disk.
    
     ----------------
    |KNOW THINE ENEMY|
     ----------------
    
    Even with the ganados, slight variations in the appearance of an enemy could
    give you a clue as to how they might fight and what weapons they will be
    wielding.  Study enemies and learn to see the patterns in their behavior, and
    what they can and cannot take.  What may work against one of them may not work
    against another of the same type.
    
     ------------------
    |BE AWARE OF ASHLEY|
     ------------------
    
    This is probably one of the most crucial (and to some, annoying) aspects of the
    game.
    
    Simply put, if an enemy hits Ashley, she'll take some amount of damage
    (depending on what enemy, etc).  If you hit Ashley, she's dead.  Even if you're
    swinging the knife around and she just happens to get in the way, dead.
    Grenades tend to be a bit of a grey area, I've seen her survive incendiary ones
    thrown nearby, but really, don't push it.  If she's standing nearby, be careful
    where you shoot.  If she's all alone, be REALLY careful where you shoot.
    She'll duck down regardless, but that doesn't mean she can't get caught in the
    crossfire.
    
    That's another nasty aspect of the game: enemies may gravitate to her just as
    easily as they would to you.  For most enemies, this isn't an issue, as they'll
    probably just pick her up and wander towards a door, waiting for you to shoot
    them (if you don't, it's game over).  But there are a select few enemies that
    really don't care for Ashley at all, namely, chainsaw maniacs, snakes, 
    parasites, El Gigante, catapult Illuminados, Garradors, shield Illuminados,
    armaduras, commandos (all sorts), and regenerators/iron maidens.  Each one of
    these will throw discretion out the window and make every effort to kill her.
    
    For this reason, you'll want to "stash" Ashley in various locations as the
    situation dictates.  There are handful of boxes that you can use the X Button
    to hide her in at various points in the game.  If you don't have that luxury
    right off, you can still tell her to wait in various locations while you take
    out the surrounding enemies.  Just be careful that you know she's safe,
    otherwise her life bar might start flashing and you'll have to run out and
    save her.
    
    Late in the game, you'll actually get to play as Ashley, but as a character,
    her abilities are limited to solving puzzles and throwing nearby lanterns to
    defend herself.  She can kick enemies once they grab her, but you should avoid
    them at all costs.
    
     ---------------------
    |TALK TO THE MERCHANTS|
     ---------------------
    
    The Merchants, despite probably supplying Saddler and his crew, are there for
    your benefit.  Most of the times you run into them, they'll have new goodies
    for you to make use of.  Even if they don't, you could probably stand to afford
    something that you could not last time, unless you're so experienced you can
    buy everything right off in which case you don't need to be reading this.
    
    If you find treasures lying around, and have examined them to the point where
    you know you cannot combine them with anything else in the future, sell them.
    By comparison, what the regular enemies drop is a paltry sum.  You CANNOT get
    through this game without selling off the goodies.  That's what they're there
    for.  Also, be sure to search carefully in the areas around the merchant, as
    there are often gold bars and other pieces of bling lying about the area.
    
    While enemies do not generally appear in the same area as the merchant, I don't
    recommend leading them to him.  It's not that they pay any attention to him or
    are capable of damaging him (hell, he looks like he's infested anyway), but you
    can accidentally hit him, and like Ashley, he'll die in one hit and never
    return.  He doesn't leave items anyway, so it's not as if you can get your
    money back.
    
     -----------------------
    |SPEND YOUR MONEY WISELY|
     -----------------------
    
    This really goes with the last one, but as far as the game goes, this does
    matter a great deal.
    
    Depending on what weapons you decide to go with, you should have enough money
    by the end of the game to fully upgrade a handgun, a shotgun, a rifle, and a
    magnum.  Odds are that you're going to pick the higher end items in each
    instance, but even then, you should be able to afford all four, fully-upgraded,
    IF you play your cards right.
    
    What I mean by that is, basically, you can't/shouldn't upgrade any of your
    "placeholder" weapons.  That is to say, if your goal is the Striker, you
    shouldn't really upgrade the Shotgun while you have that.  Now, there is a
    little bit of leeway here.  You can probably afford to upgrade most items once,
    and you should have sufficient funding to trade in your Shotgun for a Riot Gun
    as a secondary placeholder (which, generally, is more cost-effective than
    spending the money to upgrade the shotgun), and so on, but you don't
    necessarily need the additional power from upgrades (so, trade-ins, yes,
    upgrades, no).  The game is playable, and not even difficult, if you're going
    into the Castle with a base Shotgun and Rifle (yes, even in Professional
    mode).  You may decide to play it differently, but generally when I start a
    game, I have one weapon in each category as a goal in mind, and as soon as I
    get it, I want to be able to upgrade it at every possible opportunity without
    delay for the rest of the game.  Thus far, using this method, I've been able to
    do it.
    
    By the time I finish any one of my runs, I end up having enough money left over
    (once I sell most, if not all of my items off) to sum up to one million pstas,
    or enough to by either one of the special items.  This is a nice little goal to
    have in mind, but it may not be realistic for you, so do what you like.
    
     ---------
    |USE DOORS|
     ---------
    
    This may sound a little crazy, but doors play their role in this game, and can
    be used to your advantage.
    
    Any wood door in this game can fired through.  So if you see a weapon clipping
    through one of them, you can pull out the weapon of your choice and attempt to
    blow the door apart.  If wasting ammo isn't your thing, you can also run up to
    the door, hit the A-Button twice, and kick the door open.  This doesn't do a
    lot of damage and shouldn't be considered a substitute for attacking enemies,
    but most of the time it will stun them temporarily, giving you an opportunity
    to attack them.
    
    However, doors can also be used as a slight disadvantage to you.  If Ashley is
    picked up by an enemy, and that enemy goes through one of the green text doors
    that leave the loaded area, your game is over.  Also, if you're hiding Ashley
    anywhere, you can't go through the green text doors until she's in relatively
    close range.
    
     -------------------------------
    |DON'T USE A WIRELESS CONTROLLER|
     -------------------------------
    
    If you're like me, the floor of your token gaming area is absolutely littered
    with cords, so it might seem like a bright idea to use a wireless controller.
    After all, the game is pretty intense, and there's no telling when you might
    feel inclined to jerk the controller around anyway...
    
    Don't.
    
    One of the main flaws of the wireless design is that its signal isn't always
    accurate when it comes to holding down multiple buttons.  Considering you're
    generally going to be holding down the R or B button at all times, this can be
    a real pain in the ass.  It might not happen often, but one of these times when
    you're reaching for the gun to pull out during a target practice session or
    (God forbid) actual combat, Leon's going to start pulling the gun up, then pull
    back, over and over for the next few seconds.  Rifles are particularly prone
    to this malfunction.
    
    That's not to say that it's impossible to play with one.  I went through all
    my runs and the writing of this FAQ using a wireless controller (yes, the
    official one, I'm just not naming it), but that doesn't mean that I didn't want
    to throw the thing through my TV at least once per game.
    
    The bonus to using a standard controller is that you won't be running through
    batteries either.  Not that they eat them particularly fast, but weak batteries
    can also hinder gameplay.
    
     ----------
    |PLAN AHEAD|
     ----------
    
    Just have some common sense.  If an item is just taking up space in your
    inventory and you're not planning on using it, sell it.  Only sell weapons in
    that instance, because you'll have to buy the upgrades again otherwise.  Don't
    run around without healing items for too long or you'll get burned by it.  If
    you're running out of ammo for one gun, switch to another and wait for enemies
    to drop more ammo.  Don't push that ladder down and jump out that window unless
    you know exactly what you're getting into.  Don't use the magnum when a shotgun
    will do the trick, etc.
    
    =================
    =  04: ENEMIES  =
    =================
    
    CROWS
    
    Joke enemies.  Unlike the other RE games, crows will never attack you.  Their
    main feature is being living, breathing storage units that will try to fly away
    when you shoot them.  Get around this by tossing flash grenades into the horde,
    which will apparently scare them all to death.  They tend to hang out in large
    flocks, and usually one of them will also be carrying a small treasure item.
    Definately worth the grenade.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    LOS GANADOS
    
    Ganados : Zombies :: RE4 : Every other RE.  Cannon fodder, unwashed villagers,
    call them what you will.  They come in four male types and four female types
    (only two if you'd rather discount the hoods), each seeming to have slight
    differences in personality and weapon preference.  Early on in the game, they
    have sickles (thrown), throwing axes, hatchets and pitchforks.  Later on at
    night, the pitchforks are phased out in favor of torches and the occasional
    stick of dynamite.  The females stick primarily to larger knives, though you
    might occasionally see one with a sickle.  Each of these weapons has some sort
    of distinct flaw, as the thrown ones can be knocked from the air and the melee
    ones require close range.  If you ever see a Ganado holding a stick of
    dynamite, shoot it immediately for some extra fun.  As for the torches,
    shooting a Ganado as he's about to blow flames at you is a fun way to turn it
    against him.  Shots aimed at the head or the knee have the added bonus of
    stunning them and leaving them open for kicks or additional attacks, and shots
    to the hand will knock the weapon away, leaving strangling you as their only
    option.  Otherwise, the same general rules that applied to zombie fighting
    apply here.  Pistols, kicks, and combat knives are your bread and butter when
    fighting these guys, but there's no shame in pulling out a shotgun if you're
    surrounded, or the rifle if you're in the mood for sniping.  In Spanish, their
    name means "livestock".
    *******************************************************************************
    
    CHAINSAW MANIACS
    
    Sometimes known as Dr. Salvatores or Bella Sisters, depending on gender.
    Despite what some of the previews would lead you to believe, these critters ARE
    NOT invincible, they can just take several loads of punishment before biting
    the dust.  The goal here is to keep them at as much of a distance as possible
    due to their instant kill capabilities, so utilize as many powerful long-range
    weapons as possible, be they grenades, shotgun variants, rifles, or even the
    magnums.  conventional handguns tend to lack the necessary punch, for the most
    part.  One nifty trick I've often used is to clear out the rest of the area of
    enemies and knock the maniac down.  Whenever he gets up, there's a brief pause
    where he stands still before charging, which is the perfect time to get in a
    well-aimed rifle shot to the head, if not a magnum.  Not nearly as much trouble
    as they're made out to be.  
    *******************************************************************************
    
    SNAKES
    
    Not a standard enemy, in fact, they mostly hang out in boxes, so it becomes a
    smart move to slash twice through most of the game.  You'll also encounter
    them in the swamp, but they barely take notice of you and you'll usually be
    running fast enough to keep away from them anyway.  As expected, their attack
    is to rear back and bite you, then slither off grinning mischievously.  If you
    kill them, they'll drop eggs most of the time, so it may be worth the trouble.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    LAS PLAGAS
    
    After night falls, you'll meet your first Las Plagas rather qucikly.  Las
    Plagas rarely exist on their own, rather, periodically you might blow the head
    off a villager and out will pop a Las Plagas.  This still shouldn't deter you
    from kicking villagers or shooting at their heads, as it's still the most cost
    effective way of killing.  The first version of Las Plagas will be found from
    nightfall on to the end, is rather pinkish, long, and whip-like.  It will often
    swing around and try to slice your throat.  The second version is found only
    in the castle, it seems, and rather rarely at that.  It has an instant kill
    attack in which it bites Leon's head off, but I've never gotten close enough
    to one to see it performed successfully.  The third type is whitish-blue and
    looks much like a spider in appearance.  Unlike the others, it will detach
    itself from the head upon the body's death, and might try to jump you and claw
    at your eyes.  The method for dealing with all Plagas is to either pull out a
    gun and fire directly at them (attacking the body they are attached to is
    pointless), or throw a flash grenade, as they will immediately explode due to
    their light sensitivity.  If you hadn't already guessed, in Spanish, their name
    means "the plague".
    *******************************************************************************
    
    COLMILLOS
    
    The spiritual heirs to the cerberi of old.  Colmillos are local village dogs
    or wolves, possessed by the Las Plagas parasite.  Unlike the cerberi of yore,
    they will not run up to you, rip a chunk off, and run away.  Instead, they
    prefer to dive on top of you and try to rip your face off with their teeth.
    While this is their primary mode of attack, they do have a secondary attack, in
    which the plagas on their back shoots out tentacles that whip at you.  This
    occurs primarily when they are found in packs, so its recommended that you
    isolate them as much as possible, or use some sort of spread-fire gun (shotgun,
    for example) and neutralize them that way.  My favorite weapon to use against
    them is the incendiary grenade, as they aren't bright enough to avoid running
    into the fire, and will probably die when they do.  In Spanish, their name
    means "eye teeth".
    *******************************************************************************
    
    LOS ILLUMINADOS
    
    I'm not too fond of the other humanoid enemies in this game, but find near
    endless joy in trashing these guys.  Los Illuminados are cult members, and tend
    to dress in robes that vary based on rank (black monks are rather easy to kill,
    while purple ones are more difficult and reds tend to be leaders).  Sometimes
    they'll wear skull helmets or carry wooden shields, but you can usually tell
    it's an illuminado by how clean and pale they are.  They weild mostly flails,
    scythes (long range), crossbows, and the occasional rocket launcher, though
    none are above strangling you at the right moment.  You'll also see them
    manning the catapults around the outside part of castle, and you should deal
    with those swiftly and mercilessly with a rifle. Your methods of dealing with
    the others should be no different from the Ganados, but note that by the time
    you reach the castle, Leon has learned the awesome suplex move to be used when
    you shoot one of these guys in the knee.  You can usually find them wandering
    about chanting death in Spanish or laughing inappropriately.  I imagine their
    name means "the illuminated".
    *******************************************************************************
    
    GARRADORS
    
    Heavily armed muscle men with their eyes sewn shut, tortured and given
    retractable claws (hence the translated "clawer") and, on rare occasions,
    armor.  Ever palyed a game with the X-men's Wolverine as a playable character?
    Did he have some sort of berserker rage move?  That's how the Garrador attacks,
    generally.  Fortunately, it won't affect you if you're just getting up or are
    being choked by a humanoid enemy.  Beyond that, he has a vicious charge attack
    that will impale you, regardless of life.  If he's charging with one claw
    raised in the air, that's what's happening and you ought to move.  He's
    sensitive to sound, so if you fire off a gun (or sometimes even breathe), he'll
    come after you.  Fire at the parasite on his back to damage him, as he can't be
    killed by any other conventional means (though he can be stunned with regular
    hand grenades).  There are usually bells in the general area he's in, so shoot
    them to distract him.  Hopefully he'll get a claw stuck in the wall in the
    process, leaving him open for a few shots.  Only use higher powered weapons on
    him, none of that pistol junk.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    NOVISTADORS
    
    The token bug monsters of this game.  They sort of resemble the plague crawlers
    from RE0, except they're bigger, green, can fly, and turn invisible.  You first
    encounter these in the underground prison and will generally find them in odd
    areas from then on.  Due to their odd penchant for disappearing (never truly
    explained), you have to seek out other means to kill them.  Look around the
    room.  Do you see any strange puffs of mist coming from anywhere in particular?
    If so, pull out a rifle, zoom in, and plug it.  That should kill it instantly.
    Any other time you encounter them running around, use a shotgun weapon because
    you won't be able to tell where they're going most of the time and every little
    bit helps.  Try to shoot them out of the air as well, as that tends to be an
    instant kill for them.  There's also a little secret in their behavior, namely,
    the eye pieces you pick up after killing them are dependant on what color the
    Novistador's eyes are when you kill it.  The game alludes to the idea that
    these were once human, but I don't buy it and would rather assume that they're
    not related to the Plagas and are just some wacky creature cooked up in the
    labs.  The rough translation for this is "no-sighters".
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ARMADURAS
    
    Translated: armors.  That's all these guys are; Las Plagas hiding inside a
    giant suit of armor (considering they're parasites that probably need a host
    for food... don't ask how).  There are only a handful of them in the game and
    fewer still that you can actually fight, which is a good thing as they have
    high damage resistence and swing a mean axe/sword.  Take care of them by
    shooting for the head after they swing (or before, if you so choose, as it's
    a way to stun them) and eventually the parasite will show itself (stage one or
    two), leaving it open for some flash grenade mayhem.  Use only higher level
    weapons on them, so shotguns and magnums for the most part.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    COMMANDOS
    
    Saddler's personal attack squad.  I assume that these guys are actually Spanish
    soldiers or mercenaries under the influences of Las Plagas.  They have throwing
    axes, flails, dynamite, and crossbows like some of the others, but also come
    equipped with cattle prods (bad news) and the occasional rocket launcher (worse
    news).  They also have their own unique powerhouse enemy; a huge armored and
    cybernetically implanted hulk who swings a mean hammer.  On the whole,
    commandos seem to be slightly more resistant to damage, but otherwise are the
    same as the others.  Occasionally, one will be hiding behind a wooden shield,
    and many of them have protective headgear of some sort, but these guys
    shouldn't pose as much of a problem in this stage of the game.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    GATLING COMMANDOS
    
    Sometimes referred to as J.J.s.  This tank of a commando weilds a gatling gun
    and has just enough sense to adjust his aim if you run out of the field where
    he's shooting.  He'll even chase after you if you stray too far.  You might
    think it would be a clever idea if you climbed a ladder to get away from him,
    but no, if you try it, he'll jump straight up, rising however many feet into
    the air, and stop right next to you and begin firing again.  He's not stunned
    easily, but shotgun, rifle, and magnum shots to the head tend to slow him on
    occasion.  One of the better tactics in dealing with him is to run around
    behind him and let him gun down his own men trying to turn, but if you're too
    close to him, you leave yourself open for a devastating pistol whip.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    REGENERATORS
    
    The only enemy in the game with the capacity to mildly freak me out.  Giant
    humanoid creatures with teeth like sharks, which they'll use to bite into you
    when you get too close.  They also have semi-rubbery limbs like the
    bandersnatch of yore, except they don't have nearly the range.  Have I
    mentioned that, like the name implies, they can regenerate limbs at will?  The
    first one you encounter, you won't be able to kill, but soon you'll find a
    infrared scope that will allow you to spot the 2-5 plagas buried underneath
    their skin.  Most of them are on the front, but if they don't pop after you
    shoot all of those, take out one of their legs and quickly shoot the last one
    on their back.  You can tell when these things are coming by a distinct change
    in music and a slight sobbing sound.  Creepy.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    IRON MAIDENS
    
    Take a regenerator, and give it the ability to shoot rubbery spikes from the
    surface of its skin.  Sound painful?  It is, so take them out as quickly as
    possible.  If you don't, they might grab you and try to impale you on their
    surface as you can see in one of the promo videos.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ROBOTS
    
    Not really worthy of note, but they do show up for one key battle late in the
    game.  They come in two varieties, one flying, and one crawling, but if you
    don't move fast enough, they'll lock onto you and fire some small guns.  The
    other danger is that they explode or self-destruct when they've taken enough
    damage, and that will definitely hurt you if you get too close to them.
    Shotgun-type weapons are really the best way of dealing with them, as you have
    the distance and lateral range working for you there.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    BERSERKS (MERCENARIES)
    
    This guy combines the appearance of a chainsaw maniac without the stupidity,
    the attack of a garrador without the blindness, and the jumping ability of a
    gatling commando without the brief pauses before attacking.  To make matters
    worse, he has a double-bladed, diamond-tipped chainsaw, because, you know, one
    blade on a chainsaw wasn't nearly enough.  In short, he's very bad news.  From
    what I remember, there's only one in the regular game, but you can pick him out
    of a crowd by his larger appearance, darker sack on his head, and blue shirt.
    You'll never have to fight him directly in the regular game, but in one of the
    minigames, he's all over the place.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    =================
    =  05: WEAPONS  =
    =================
    
    Unlike the previous RE games, where you could pick up any old weapon lying
    around and play through the entire game with it, RE4 boasts a wide variety of
    semi-unique weapons, all of which can be upgraded.  To make things easier,
    note that FIREPOWER (FP) is based on the comparison to a standard handgun shot
    (1.0 = one shot from your starting handgun), FIRING SPEED (FS) and RELOAD SPEED
    (RS) are measure up to one-hundredth of a second, and CAPACITY (CAP), well,
    that would seem to be self-explanatory.
    
    KNIFE
    
    This version of the knife is about on par with the more powerful knives we've
    seen in the series.  But in RE4, it doesn't take up any inventory space and
    can be easily readied by holding down the L button at any time.  Useful for
    chopping up boxes and barrels, even slashing down the simpler locks (which
    beats kicking them apart).  It's neat when you're tight on ammo and want to
    attack someone who is close or on the ground, but unless you're slashing at
    their head or knees, the results aren't much.  Survivalists swear by it, but
    mostly you'll be using other weapons.  Still there are a few choice enemies
    that are weak against it, and there are various points in the plot that rely
    on your use of it.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    GRENADES
    
    These babies come in three flavors, original (hand), cinnamon (incendiary), and
    minty fresh (flash).  Each come in handy in rather specific situations.  For
    example, want to kill a bunch of Plagas parasites at once or stun a crowd
    that's gotten too big?  Toss out a flash grenade.  Want to stop a small tight-
    knit crowd, but don't necessarily have much time?  Toss an incendiary grenade,
    it'll blow up on impact and while it might not kill them, it will give you a
    chance to back off and regroup.  Want to take out a group that's rushing
    towards you or flatten one of the bigger enemies long enough to pull out a
    stronger weapon?  Toss the hand grenade.  Each of these takes up a 1 X 2 space
    in the inventory, unfortunately, but most of the time the effect you get from
    them makes it well worth it.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    HANDGUN
    
    The default gun for the game.  You start with it and can very well keep it
    through the whole of the mission, if you're so inclined.  The Hangun is tied
    for the second-weakest of all the handguns, the difference between it and the
    weakest one is only 0.1.  It fires slightly faster than the other guns, while
    being right about on par for the reload speed.  With a 25 bullet capacity, it's
    nothing to write home about compared to the others, but by the time you get
    that far you're probably going to go full bore on the upgrades and this is
    where it really shines.  Once you get the exclusive upgrade, you'll be five
    times as likely to get a killing headshot as you would otherwise.  That may not
    seem like an amazing feat, but considering how fast the gun fires and how it
    has a decent capacity, a steady hand could empty the room right quick.  As fun
    as this may be, most enemies later in the game have helmets and this tactic
    becomes a lot more difficult.  Of course, by that time, you might be using
    different methods, but that still knocks this one down to my third favorite.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    1.0 >  1.2 (7K) > 1.4 (10K) > 1.6 (15K) > 1.8 (18K) > 2.0 (20K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.47 > 0.40(5K) > 0.33(12K)
    RELOAD SPEED: 1.73 > 1.47(4K) > 0.87(10K)
    CAPACITY:     10 >   13  (4K) > 16  (6K)  > 19  (8K)  > 22  (10K) > 25  (12K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    5X headshots (57K)
    HANDLING:     ++
    SPACE:        2 X 3 slots 
    COST:         198k (8k more if you bought it again)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    PUNISHER
    
    You can get this for free as your second gun by shooting down ten Blue
    Medallions, but if you're going to get it for free, you might as well shoot all
    fifteen medallions and pocket the level two firepower upgrade at the same time.
    Unfortunately, free, in my opinion, is about all this gun is worth.  It's
    regular stats are about the same as the handgun: fires slightly faster,
    slightly weaker, slightly better capacity.  As a default, it also has the
    unique feature of firing through two enemies at once, despite its power.  This
    can periodically be a nifty feature, seeing as how it can technically shoot
    through wooden shields later in the game, but this and the nice firing rate are
    offset by the simple fact that you're going to have to shoot more often.  Its
    exclusive upgrade is similarly useless, bumping up the number of bodies it can
    shoot through to five without changing the power any.  This poses two problems
    in that 1) it's not often that you line up five enemies at once and 2) in the
    event you do, they're probably entirely too close to you and you'll want to get
    something else out right away.  Most useful for getting you some quick scratch
    for practically nothing.  This can also be purchased from the merchant after
    the cabin standoff, but considering the cabin standoff is one of the few times
    it has potential to be useful...
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    0.9 >  1.1 (10K) > 1.3 (15K) > 1.5 (20K) > 1.7 (25K) > 2.0 (35K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.47 > 0.40(10K) > 0.33(20K)
    RELOAD SPEED: 1.70 > 1.47(8K)  > 0.83(18K)
    CAPACITY:     10 >   13  (8K)  > 16  (10K) > 20  (15K) > 24  (18K) > 25  (24K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    Shoot through five enemies in a row (40K)
    HANDLING:     +++
    SPACE:        2 X 3 slots
    COST:         296k (20-30k less if you got it for free)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    RED9
    
    A Mauser of sorts, this is what you use when you want to take a hit of five
    slots in inventory space, about a second of reload speed, and slight hits in
    speed and capacity in exchange for raw power and style.  You're never going to
    want to use it without the stock, and at its highest upgrade, it sill reloads
    slower than a fully-upgraded shotgun, but with the exclusive upgrade, it's as
    powerful as the Riot Gun is when you buy it.  Considering its firing speed is
    decent, you can use it to take out bosses, if you're feeling adventurous (and I
    have on a number of occasions).  This also will free up more potent ammo for
    more dire straits, bringing up the overall quality of your arsenal.  The only
    complaint one could have about the gun is that without the stock, it handles
    horribly, and with it, you're down three more item slots in addition to the two
    more the gun takes up to begin with.  If you're space conscious and never seem
    to have enough cash to get the case upgrades, or if you're new to the game and
    are probably going to need all the space you can get, then this gun might not
    be for you, but veterans to either this game or the series as while may want to
    check this one out.  Probably my favorite gun.  You can buy it after rescuing
    Ashley.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    1.4 >  1.7 (15K) > 2.0 (20K) > 2.4 (24K) > 2.8 (28K) > 3.5 (45K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.53 > 0.47(10K) > 0.40(15K)
    RELOAD SPEED: 2.37 > 2.20(6K)  > 1.67(10K)
    CAPACITY:     8  >   10  (6K)  > 12  (8K)  > 15  (12K) > 18  (16K) > 22  (22K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    5.0 firepower (80K)
    HANDLING:     ++
    SPACE:        2 X 4 slots (+ 1 X 3 w/ stock)
    COST:         331k (4k more w/ stock)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    BLACKTAIL
    
    If you're not comfortable with how much space the Red9 takes up, this is a very
    close second.  Among all the regular handguns, it fires the fastest, topping
    out at 0.27, has a capacity of seven more than the next gun, is tied with the
    Punisher for the fastest reload speed, and has pretty solid power.  If you get
    the exclusive upgrade, it tops out at 3.4, just below where the Red9 is without
    it.  Even if you don't get this, the firepower is still 3.0, which isn't bad
    by any means.  As a bonus, it handles better than any of the other guns,
    meaning your aim won't shift all that much with firing, and it's built for
    speed if it has to be.  The only drawback is, as one of the fastest firing guns
    in the game (fastest among all the non-automatics), it does take some getting
    used to and there will be an occasion or two when you'll waste an extra bullet
    or two.  But considering the "survival" aspect of the game has been toned down
    quite a bit, this isn't really an issue.  I've played through entire games with
    either the Red9 or the Blacktail, and the Blacktail almost ties the Red9 for my
    favorite.  You can buy it at the beginning of the third chapter.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    1.6 >  1.8 (15K) > 2.0 (18K) > 2.3 (24K) > 2.7 (30K) > 3.0 (40K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.47 > 0.40(10K) > 0.27(20K)
    RELOAD SPEED: 1.70 > 1.47(8K)  > 0.83(15K)
    CAPACITY:     15 >   18  (8K)  > 21  (10K) > 25  (15K) > 30  (20K) > 35  (25K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    3.4 firepower (80K)
    HANDLING:     ++++
    SPACE:        2 X 3 slots
    COST:         362k
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    MATILDA (SPECIAL)
    
    This is one of your rewards after completing the game.  It's basically the same
    gun that Leon had (once he upgraded) in RE2, with all the same pluses and
    minuses.  On one hand, it's as powerful as a fully-upgraded Handgun and you can
    tweak it to get a capacity of one hundred using the exlcusive upgrade, but it
    chews through ammo like nobody's business.  I was taking a light approach in my
    time using it, just kind of screwing around in the village, but when I started,
    I had one hundred extra bullets in the bank.  By the time I finished and the
    bell rang, even after I had picked up every bit of ammo I could find in the
    area, I still had only twenty-five spares, all the result of that fun three-
    round burst feature.  That said, you can pretty much use this weapon on its own
    for most of the game, I'd imagine.  That chainsaw maniac that came after me had
    no chance of touching me.
    
    FIREPOWER:    1.0 >  1.2 (15K) > 1.4 (17K) > 1.6 (20K) > 1.8 (25K) > 2.0 (35K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.47
    RELOAD SPEED: 1.73 > 1.47(6K)  > 0.87(15K)
    CAPACITY:     15 >   18  (7K)  > 21  (10K) > 24  (12K) > 27  (16K) > 30  (20K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    100 capacity (35K)
    HANDLING:     ++
    SPACE:        2 X 5 slots
    COST:         311.5k
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    SHOTGUN
    
    Ol' reliable.  On the whole, this probably the most cost-effective of the
    shotgun-type weapon, with a max power that is no different from the Riot Gun's
    (sans upgrade) and a capacity of one more.  The exclusive upgrade provides
    another intruiging (albeit nonsensical) feature in that it will now have the
    same power from any distance, meaning that shooting someone from the other side
    of the field will do the same damage as if they were standing right in front of
    you.  I won't claim to have the slightest idea how that would work, but
    depending on how you use your shotgun, it could prove to be valuable for
    keeping the larger groups at bay, particularly in those narrow areas where you
    have an absolute horde of enemies charging towards you.  Picked up in just the
    second area of the game.
    
    FIREPOWER:    4.0 >  4.5 (15K) > 5.0 (20K) > 6.0 (25K) > 7.0 (30K) > 8.0 (45K)
    FIRING SPEED: 1.53
    RELOAD SPEED: 3.03 > 2.43(7K)  > 1.50(15K)
    CAPACITY:     6  >   8   (8K)  > 10  (10K) > 12  (12K) > 15  (15K) > 18  (20K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    Same damage from all ranges (90K)
    HANDLING:     ++
    SPACE:        2 X 8 slots
    COST:         312k (20k more if you bought it again)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    RIOT GUN
    
    Aside from that cool, sleek assault shotgun look from previous games, this is
    the same gun as the standard Shotgun.  Well, I shouldn't say that... it does
    start out as having better power (though the regular Shotgun quickly closes
    that gap), and it's exclusive upgrade bumps the firepower up to 10, and it has
    one less in maximum capacity than the regular Shotgun.  I don't know, I swore
    by this gun during my first run through the game (pre-FAQ), but it really isn't
    all that cost effective to get this unless you're planning on going all gung-ho
    into every group of enemies and firing off a round before any of them lays a
    hit on you.  Personally, I wish they would have revived the old Western Custom
    from some of the older REs and at least give us some variety.  You can buy it
    as soon as you get toe the castle.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    5.0 >  5.5 (20K) > 6.0 (24K) > 6.5 (28K) > 7.0 (32K) > 8.0 (50K)
    FIRING SPEED: 1.53
    RELOAD SPEED: 3.03 > 2.43(7K)  > 1.50(20K)
    CAPACITY:     7  >   9   (10K) > 11  (12K) > 13  (15K) > 15  (20K) > 17  (25K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    10.0 firepower (120K)
    HANDLING:     +++
    SPACE:        2 X 8 slots
    COST:         415k
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    STRIKER
    
    It took me a little while to warm up to this gun due to its slightly limited
    lateral range and the fact that you get it somewhat late in the game, but I'm
    glad I did.  Those two facts aside, it is undeniably the best shotgun in the
    game, featuring a max firepower of 12, half the firing speed of any other
    shotgun, and an exclusive upgrade that bumps its capacity up to 100, which
    should give you no less than 72 free shells in the deal.  In addition, it
    actually takes LESS money to fully load than the Riot Gun is, which borders
    on absurd.  My recommendation is that you keep the Shotgun, don't upgrade it,
    trade it in for the Riot Gun at the beginning of Chapter Three, and then use
    the Striker as soon as you get the chance.  It's not often that a shotgun
    weapon can by your primary gun, but this is it.  Bought from the merchant after
    Leon is dumped in the spike pit.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    6.0 >  7.0 (25K) > 8.0 (28K) > 9.0 (32K) > 10.0(40K) > 12.0(60K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.73
    RELOAD SPEED: 3.00 > 2.40(8K)  > 1.50(15K)
    CAPACITY:     12  >  14  (10K) > 16  (12K) > 20  (16K) > 24  (18K) > 28  (25K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    100 capacity (60K)
    HANDLING:     +++
    SPACE:        2 X 5 slots
    COST:         398k
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    RIFLE
    
    Third major gun you can get in the game.  With a maximum power of 12 (18 with
    exclusive), it's easily one of the most powerful guns in the game.  However,
    you'll be using it mostly for sniping purposes, so there's not too much point
    in maxing out the power (but do save yourself the trouble and pick up a scope).
    It's also fairly compact, taking only nine spaces to store (twelve with scope).
    However, it has one major flaw: its firing rate and reload speed absolutely
    blow.  Don't be fooled by the firing speed, because every time you shoot a
    round off you have to pull back the handle again and eject the spent shell,
    which interrupts your aim and tends to throw the whole sniping process out of
    whack if you're not careful.  The reload speed is also a full second more than
    the counterpart, which also can lead to some serious issues.  It's not a bad
    gun, but I consider it to be mostly a placeholder until you get the semi-auto.
    You can buy it the first time you meet the merchant.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    4.0 >  5.0 (10K) > 6.0 (12K) > 8.0 (20K) > 10.0(25K) > 12.0(35K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.67 (total lie)
    RELOAD SPEED: 4.00 > 3.23(8K)  > 2.33(18K)
    CAPACITY:     5   >  7   (6K)  > 9   (8K)  > 12  (12K) > 15  (18K) > 18  (25K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    18.0 firepower (80K)
    HANDLING:     ++
    SPACE:        1 X 9 slots (+ 1 X 3 w/ scope)
    COST:         289k (7k more w/ scope)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    SEMI-AUTO RIFLE
    
    Now THIS, is a gun.  Starts off with a power of seven and fully upgraded is
    up to 15.  The capacity is also great, topping out at 24, a full six more than
    the regular Rifle.  But clearly, the best part of the Semi-Auto is that your
    sniping periods can only be broken up by reloading or getting hit.  No more
    ejecting every shell after you fire.  Add in the exclusive upgrade, which
    allows you to fire this baby as fast as a regular handgun, and you're in
    business to do some serious damage.  I've played through a number of games
    using a number of weapons, but regardless over whatever else I have in my
    inventory, I always keep the Semi-Auto Rifle around.  Bought off the merchant
    at the beginning of the castle.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    7.0 >  8.0 (15K) > 9.0 (18K) > 11.0(24K) > 13.0(30K) > 15.0(40K)
    FIRING SPEED: 1.43                                                 >[0.40(80K)]
    RELOAD SPEED: 2.33 > 1.90(9K)  > 1.33(18K)
    CAPACITY:     10  >  12  (10K) > 14  (12K) > 17  (15K) > 20  (20K) > 24  (25K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    0.40 firing speed (80K)
    HANDLING:     ++++
    SPACE:        2 X 7 slots (+ 1 X 3 w/ scope)
    COST:         351k (10k more w/ scope)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    TMP
    
    Eh...  Generally speaking, I try to carry only three guns at a time in the
    beginning of the game, before I get access to the bigger attache cases.
    However, on my first (pre-FAQ) run through this game, I was going into one of
    the big battles in the village with almost nothing in terms of ammo for my
    weapons, so I opted to get the TMP, upgrade it a few times, and clip a stock to
    it.  While I did get out of that battle alive (barely, and after a few tries),
    I found on later trips that it really just doesn't make sense to lug this thing
    around.  It is useful for mowing through enemies, but until you get the
    exclusive upgrade, you might as well have an automatic peashooter for all the
    good this thing will do you in serious melees, which is the only time you
    should consider using it anyway.  You're better off not wasting your money and
    just selling every bit of TMP ammo you come across.  Can be purchased the first
    time you meet the merchant, but really, don't.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    0.4 >  0.5 (7K)  > 0.6 (14K) > 0.8 (18K) > 1.0 (24K) > 1.2 (35K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.10
    RELOAD SPEED: 2.37 > 1.93(5K)  > 1.17(15K)
    CAPACITY:     30  >  50  (7K)  > 100 (15K) > 150 (20K) > 200 (25K) > 250 (35K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    1.8 firepower (100K)
    HANDLING:     ++
    SPACE:        2 X 3 slots (+ 2 X 2 w/ stock)
    COST:         335k (4k more w/ stock)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    BROKEN BUTTERFLY
    
    Generally, in RE games what you look for in a magnum is power and nothing else.
    The Butterfly has power in excess, topping out at 50 with the exclusive upgrade
    (28 without) and you can pick it up for free midway through the castle.  It
    doesn't reload too quickly (at best, it's as good as a fully-upgraded rifle)
    and the capacity is pretty lousy, but with that kind of firepower, it's hard
    to care about those minor setbacks.  If you're following the guide as much as
    you can, you should have enough cash to get all of the upgrades too.  You could
    buy this baby at the beginning of the third chapter, but you're better off
    picking it up for free at the beginning of the fourth, seeing as how you really
    won't need it until then anyway.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    13.0 > 15.0(25K) > 17.0(30K) > 20.0(35K) > 24.0(50K) > 28.0(70K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.70
    RELOAD SPEED: 3.67 > 3.00(15K) > 2.33(20K)
    CAPACITY:     6   >  8   (15K) > 10  (20K) > 12  (25K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    50.0 firepower (150K)
    HANDLING:     ++
    SPACE:        2 X 4 slots
    COST          305k (38k more if you didn't get the free one)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    KILLER 7
    
    Named after another Capcom game, the Killer 7 isn't bad, but for the purposes
    you need a magnum, you're probably going to want to stick with the Broken
    Butterfly.  Sure, it's power is almost twice that of the standard BB, but you
    can't even buy this gun until the beginning of the fifth chapter, and by that
    time you've probably already had to upgrade the Butterfly a few times.  It's
    cheaper, more powerful (excluding exclusive upgrade to the Butterfly), reloads
    quicker, handles better, and has a better capacity, so it should be the choice
    if you're tight on cash, but you probably can't afford to wait that long, and
    paying another 100,000 or so pstas for 15 more in firepower isn't that bad an
    investment.  Bought at the beginning of chapter five.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    25.0 > 30.0(62K) > 35.0(78K)
    FIRING SPEED: 0.70
    RELOAD SPEED: 1.83 > 1.53(20K) > 0.93(30K)
    CAPACITY:     7   >  10  (30K) > 14  (40K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    N/A
    HANDLING:     ++++
    SPACE:        2 X 4 slots
    COST:         337.7k
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    HANDCANNON (SPECIAL)
    
    Unlocked by getting a five star rating with every player in every level of the
    Mercenaries game.  If, at the beginning of the game, you sell off all your
    worldly possessions, you should be able to upgrade this thing fully.  Not that
    it needs it, but going from 50 firepower and 3 capacity to 99 firepower and
    infinite capacity is hard to argue against.  The merchant will tease you about
    "hunting an elephant", but one shot brings a Gigante to its knees and punch
    through the helmet of a human enemy.  Two can kill regenerators and iron
    maidens.  Three shots will kill Salazar and the U3.  A few more shots and the
    Verdugo is dead, frozen or unfrozen.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    30.0 > 35.0(40K) > 40.0(50K) > 45.0(70K) > 50.0(90K) > 60.0(120K)
    FIRING SPEED: 1.17
    RELOAD SPEED: 3.67 > 2.87(25K) > 1.83(50K)
    CAPACITY:     3   >  4   (15K) > 5   (20K) > 6   (25K) > 8   (35K) > 10  (50K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    99.0 firepower and infinite capacity (200K)
    HANDLING:     ++++
    SPACE:        2 X 4 slots
    COST:         790k
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    MINE THROWER
    
    This is really two different weapons, though you should be familiar with both
    if you played the Hard Mode of RE3 for long enough.  The first version is what
    you would expect; a simple gun that places timed mines on creatures or things.
    The second comes after the exclusive upgrade, at which point the mines become
    homing darts that attach themselves to enemies and blow up sometime later.
    Both achieve the same basic effect, but you might want to use the scope for the
    first version as there isn't much way to aim them otherwise.  Also be sure to
    note that the firepower actually represents blast radius in meters.  Mine darts
    are about as powerful as the average hand grenade in terms of their killing
    ability, which makes them pretty fun to use, but for the prices and explosion
    delays involved, I'd prefer to stick to regular grenades.  Like many of the
    other weapons, it can be bought from the merchant at the beginning of the third
    chapter.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    2.0 >  4.0 (25K) > 6.0 (45K)
    FIRING SPEED: 1.33
    RELOAD SPEED: 3.43 > 2.57(18K)
    CAPACITY:     5   >  7   (25K) > 10  (40K)
    EXCLUSIVE:    Added homing ability and increased blase radius (30K)
    HANDLING:     ++++
    SPACE:        2 X 5 slots (+ 2 X 2 scope)
    COST:         211k (8k more w/ scope)
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ROCKET LAUNCHER
    
    There's not much to be said about this weapon, as it's clearly capable of
    speaking on its own behalf.  You can find this about halfway through the game
    on a shelf, or buy it from the merchant at just about any time, but for the
    price and the fact that it's a one-time use item, it's not all that worth it.
    Still... if you really want something dead...
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    Certainly
    FIRING SPEED: It's a rocket!
    RELOAD SPEED: N/A
    CAPACITY:     1
    EXCLUSIVE:    Unnecessary
    HANDLING:     ++++
    SPACE:        2 X 8 slots
    COST:         30k
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    INFINITE LAUNCHER (SPECIAL)
    
    What you use when you want to proudly display your complete and utter contempt
    for every living thing.  If you haven't figured out how to use this yet, you're
    wasting your time by reading.
    *******************************************************************************
    
    CHICAGO TYPEWRITER (SPECIAL)
    
    It looks like a gun, sounds like a gun, and fires like a gun.  So it must be a
    gun, right?  Well, not exactly.  Simply put, the Typewriter is far ahead of
    every other gun in the game and there's a very good reason as to why it will
    set you back one million pesetas: it's the last gun you'll ever have to buy.
    Infinite capacity?  Quick firing?  Decent power?  Check, check and check.
    You can even use it to fire single rounds fairly easily, unlike other weapons
    of its type.  Under the assault of this, many enemies will die in a single shot
    and a good number of them will be dead before they hit the ground no matter
    where you hit them.  The only drawback is that it takes up a huge amount of
    space, but hey, who needs other weapons?
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    10.0
    FIRING SPEED: 0.10
    RELOAD SPEED: 1.63
    CAPACITY:     N/A
    EXCLUSIVE:    N/A
    HANDLING:     +++
    SPACE:        3 X 7 slots
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    BOW (MERCENARIES)
    
    This weapon is unique to one of the characters in the Mercenaries minigame.
    While the arrows it fires ARE NOT explosive in nature, it does enough damage
    to kill most Ganados-types in a single shot.  Fires rather quickly, but it will
    take some time for the arrow to get there and you'll reload automatically after
    firing.  The only issue is that, while steadier, aiming it compared to the
    other guns is slightly awkward seeing as how you have to be rather precise.
    Otherwise, a downright studly weapon.
    
    
    FIREPOWER:    10.0
    FIRING SPEED: 0.03
    RELOAD SPEED: 0.03
    CAPACITY:     N/A
    EXCLUSIVE:    N/A
    HANDLING:     +++
    SPACE:        3 X 7 slots
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    CUSTOM TMP (MERCENARIES)
    
    Another weapon used exclusively by one of the characters in the Mercenaries
    game.  Actually, it's their only weapon, and under normal circumstances with a
    TMP that would be bad news, but this one has a little bit more power to it than
    the raw stats lead one to believe.  Even better for dealing with large crowds,
    and just fine at taking out single enemies as well.  For the latter's purposes,
    I generally start firing into the gut of whoever's in front of me and moving my
    aim up until I hit the head, which stuns them and allows me to deal a killing
    melee attack.
    
    FIREPOWER:    1.0
    FIRING SPEED: 0.10
    RELOAD SPEED: 1.17
    CAPACITY:     100
    EXCLUSIVE:    N/A
    HANDLING:     ++++
    SPACE:        2 X 4 slots
    
    *******************************************************************************
    
    =====================
    =  06: WALKTHROUGH  =
    =====================
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 1-1: The Beginning 
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **PATH TO PUEBLO**
    ENEMIES: FIVE CROWS and...
    
    Well, here we are at the beginning of another game.  Ahead of you, you'll be
    able to see a CROW on a branch in a tree.  There's another CROW beneath him and
    one more CROW to the left of that one.  To kill them all, I recommend staying
    at a distance, getting the one on top, then the one on the left, then the one
    on the right.  This will yield a few hundred pstas and a SPINEL.  Now make your
    way into the house nearby.  Continue into the house and you'll get a scene.
    This is the first GANADO type enemy.  Shoot him in the head, kick, and repeat.
    He'll fall quickly.  You'll get a couple more scenes and then be faced with
    a pack of three more GANADOS.  I recommend jumping out the lower window and
    standing them off by the crate.  When you're done, pick up the items they
    dropped and go back upstairs to grab some HANDGUN BULLETS (10).  
    
    Back along the path, you'll find a small storage shed, where you'll find a
    typewriter and some more crates to break open.  Use your knife on these (using
    the L button).  You should get another HANDGUN BULLETS (10), a GREEN HERB, and
    some pstas out of this.
    
    In the distance along the main path, you'll see a couple of CROWS, sitting
    around doing as crows do.  Kill them both to get some pstas and a HAND GRENADE,
    which could prove quite valuable in the not-too-distant future.  You'll also
    find a wolf trapped in a beartrap.  Release him or don't, but remember that no
    good deed goes unrewarded.  Stick to the main path to avoid further beartrap
    incidents and continue on to the two trees.
    
    A GANADO should have noticed you by now.  You, on the other hand, should've
    noticed the beartraps between the trees and the dynamite traps strung on either
    side of them.  You can lead this guy into the dynamite traps, no problem, but
    be careful that you're at enough of a distance so that you don't get blown up.
    
    Further along the path you'll find another shack with some odd fixtures inside,
    and a GREEN HERB, plus some random items in the boxes, await you.  Outside,
    there's a bridge, and two more GANADOS waiting, but they can be taken out from
    a safe distance.  Cross the bridge (ignoring the dudes) and head down the path
    to one last shack, where a GANADO waits.  In here, you'll be able to pick up
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and two more random items.  Now head through the gates...
    
    **PUEBLO**
    ENEMIES: ELEVEN GANADOS, ONE CHAINSAW MANIAC (First wave)
             FIVE GANADOS (Second wave)
             ~TEN GANADOS, ONE CHAINSAW MANIAC (Third wave)
    
    Walk ahead and you'll be given the option to scope out the area ahead.  In
    front of you, you'll be able to see four GANADOS rather plainly, but what you
    can't catch right away is that there are two GANADOS on the rooftops to the
    left, another GANADO on the side there, the two GANADOS on the right side of
    the houses, and the two GANADOS accompanied by a CHAINSAW MANIAC in the
    northeast corner of the village.  That last group will rarely, if ever, come
    after you, but the CHAINSAW MANIAC does yield a RUBY, which is worth a cool
    10000 pstas...
    
     ------------------------
    |STUPID/GREEDY/PRO METHOD|
     ------------------------
    
    Have two grenades handy on this one, of the regular variety.  One will do, but
    two definately makes things easier. Run down the left side of the village,
    killing the female GANADO or just running past, and make your way for the
    northeast corner where you'll spot the CHAINSAW MANIAC and his two GANADO
    posse.  Immediately toss one grenade as soon as they're in range.  Usually, the
    CHAINSAW MANIAC will be blown forward, in which case you can stake out the area
    near the gate (which you can't open yet).  Even if you can't, get into some
    kind of position where you can see the CHAINSAW MANIAC and have a clear line
    to throw the second grenade when he gets up.  After that (or if you don't have
    the second grenade), you should switch to the handgun and start plugging at his
    head.  Depending on how much damage you did to him earlier, he should drop
    fairly quickly, leaving behind the RUBY.  Odds are that the major group of
    GANADOS will still be on their way, so you should have enough space.
    
    When you're done here, skip down a bit...
    
     ----------
    |EASY METHOD|
     ----------
    
    Forget about the RUBY, start killing GANADOS covertly (preferably on the left
    side) and wait.  Stay alert as you'll probably have to pick a GANADO or two
    off the rooftops to keep them from throwing things at you.
    
     -----------
    |END METHODS|
     -----------
    
    Eventually, you'll have a scene which involves another group of GANADOS giving
    a battle cry and charging in from somewhere in the village where you aren't
    at the moment.  This is the second wave.  Kill however many you need to in
    order to get inside the two-story house in the village.  If you're at all
    familiar with the previews, you should know what's going on here, but if you
    don't, this triggers the third wave.
    
    To your right, you're going to find a small group of GANADOS hammering on a
    window, so you might want to push the shelf in front of it.  Ignore the barrels
    behind the stairs for now (or don't, there are also some HANGUN BULLETS (10) on
    a shelf back there) and head up to the second floor, grabbing the SHOTGUN off
    the frame (no trap this time).  Next to you is a glass case, which you should
    knife to grab out the HAND GRENADE, and 1000 PSTAS nearby.  Make a turn and run
    to the edge of the bed, where you'll find some more SHOTGUN SHELLS (5).  Grab
    them and push the ladder out of the nearby window.  From here, it's up to you;
    you can either back yourself into the corner near the bed and hold them off
    from there, chuck grenades out the window until you fill your kill quota, or
    you can toss a grenade out to clear the area beneath the window, then dive out
    into the fray where you'll meet more GANADOS and, if you're lucky, the CHAINSAW
    MANIAC which your newfound weapon should allow you to kill rather easily.  He
    drops 10000 PSTAS, so it's well worth the trouble.
    
    After you're done, you'll want to start exploring the village area.  On top of
    one of the chimneys next to the two-story house, you can find some HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10), and around the roof of the two-story, there's a SPINEL.  Head
    back down and go inside the single-story, grabbing the RED HERB in the box
    out back, then pick up the INCENDIARY GRENADE and SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) from the
    boxes and barrels.  The busted shack beside the two-story has a box as well.
    Climb up the bell tower and you can find more SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).  There's
    some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) by the wood sheds at the bottom too.
    
    Now to explore the other side of the village.  The crate behind the cowshed
    holds a valuable YELLOW HERB, and the path leading to the (blocked) door next
    to that has a shack with two boxes, one of them holding a FLASH GRENADE.  The
    only thing left is the other big house on this side.  Break the barrel inside,
    then go to the lock on the door and start kicking it until it busts (or,
    alternatively, use the knife to break it).  On the bed you'll find 1000 PSTAS,
    and the box will yield SHOTGUN SHELLS (5).  Outside of this house, you can also
    find a GREEN HERB by the wood shed.
    
    Head up the path where the Chainsaw Maniac was (gone now) and pick up the
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and the file on the wall.  You're finally done here, so go
    through the door.
    
    **FARM**
    ENEMIES: FIVE GANADOS
    
    Seems a little peaceful by comparison.  Dead ahead you'll see a FILE and a blue
    thing hanging from the tree, which is explained by the file, but don't do
    anything with those just yet.  Head around the corner and into the shack
    instead, break the barrel, and save if you have to.  There's a GANADO in the
    barn, tossing hay, and another GANADO behind him tending to the cows.  Kill
    them (this should go without saying) and crack open the barrel in the barn.
    There's another barrel further along behind the shack that holds an INCENDIARY
    GRENADE.
    
    Continue to the far side of the house and kill the GANADO tossing hay there.
    This may alert the GANADO in the loft of the house, and the one adjacent to the
    house, but neither should pose any difficulties.  Inside the house, you can
    find a SPINEL and 1000 PSTAS after opening the cabinets, and HANDGUN BULLETS
    (10) and 1000 PSTAS after breaking the barrels.  In the loft, you can find more
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10) in the cabinet.  Now climb out the window and run to the
    left, jumping off by where the ladder is.  You can't go through this door just
    yet, but in the crate and in the barrels inside the shack you should be able to
    find some goodies, including another SPINEL.  Climb back up and run to the edge
    of the platform, then jump off and break the box to find a BEERSTEIN.  Don't
    sell it right away, as you can add three items to increase its value.  Push the
    shelves out of the way to get out of this area.
    
    You may think it's about time to blow this popstand, but there are a few things
    we should take care of first.  To start, head over to the well that's by the
    typewriter hut, shoot out the plank holding the lid up, then shoot the shiny
    to get a PEARL PENDANT.  The other matter is the file and the blue objects.
    The file states that if you destroy ten of the blue medallions, you'll get
    a reward, and if you shoot all fifteen (seven of them here, eight later on),
    you can get a bonus.  Well, start off by plugging the one hanging from the tree
    in front of you, then continue by shooting the second out of the top window of
    the barn.  Behind the barn you'll find the third in a tree on the right side.
    The fourth will be hanging from the top window in the house, and the fifth will
    hang from the roof on the other side.  Climb into the loft again and head to
    the left, and you'll see the sixth hanging from the windmill and the seventh
    above and to the left of the blocked door.
    
    NOW, you can move on.
    
    **PATH TO SHANTY**
    ENEMIES: SEVEN GANADOS
    
    Whenever you see a couple of skulls hanging from an X-shaped sign, learn to
    take it as a sort of warning.  Run down the path, but keep your thumb close to
    the A-button and your index fingers near the L and R.  You may need the B too.
    
    Once that's over with, continue down through the tunnel.  There's no point in
    heading back, other than to shoot a couple of GANADOS standing on a bridge that
    will throw things at you.  In the tunnel, plug the two shinys for two SPINELS.
    Stop before the end, as there's a GANADO there rocking back and forth with a
    dynamite in his hand, and he can make things difficult for you if he gets up
    and notifies his buddies.  They'll find out either way, as you'll have to kill
    them eventually, but go around the right side of the building to get in, as to
    avoid the beartraps and dynamite wires.  Climb into the building and somehow
    kill the three GANADOS inside without blowing yourself up.  You may be hearing
    some explosions from the other side now, and that's because there's another
    GANADO on that side.  Luckily, you can just poke your head out the hole and
    shoot him dead.  Inside this building, you'll find some HANDGUN BULLETS (10)
    in the barrel and a HAND GRENADE on the shelf in the other room.  Outside,
    near where the other GANADO was, there's a lean-to that has a SPINEL in one of
    the boxes.  Before you go charging into the big shanty, shoot down the nest
    from the tree to get a RED CATSEYE, for use with the beerstein, and break the
    box on the right side of the house for a chance at more goodies.  Knock the
    lock off the shanty and enter.
    
    Inside, you'll see HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the table right off, and there are
    1000 PSTAS in the cabinet nearby.  Save if you have to, but continue on and
    back yourself into the near corner of the hall, then shoot the trap.  Do the
    same in the next room, then grab the 1000 PSTAS and the GREEN HERB from the
    cabinet.  Push the shelf out of the way to get into the other part of the room,
    then open the armoire inside to end the chapter.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 1-2: Escape From the Valley 
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **VALLEY STORAGE**
    
    After some scenes and a little button pressing, you'll be on your way.  Pick
    up the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the shelf and some RIFLE SHOTS (5) on your way
    out.  Save again, if you really have to.  Outside and around the corner, break
    the barrel for a GREEN HERB, then head around the other side to meet up with
    the merchant.
    
    ********************************************************
    ***************************MERCHANT*********************
    *          BUY (NEW)           *     TUNE UP (NEW)     *
    * Attache Case M (30k)         * Handgun FP (1.2, 7k)  *
    * Treasure Map (Village) (10k) * "     " FS (0.40, 5k) *
    * Handgun (6k)                 * "     " RS (1.47, 4k) *
    * Shotgun (20k)                * "     " CAP (13, 4k)  *
    * Rifle (12k)                  * Shotgun FP (4.5, 15k) *
    * TMP (15k)                    * "     " RS (2.43, 7k) *
    * Rocket Launcher (30k)        * "     " CAP (8, 8k)   *
    * Scope (Rifle) (7k)           * Rifle FP (5.0, 20k)   *
    * First Aid Spray (10k)        * "   " RS (3.23, 8k)   *
    ******************************** "   " CAP (7, 6k)     *
    ********************************************************
    
    Sell what you don't need here, like the SPINELS, the PEARL PENDANT, and RUBY,
    if you picked it up.  Buy the larger Attache Case M and the RIFLE and SCOPE
    (RIFLE).  Anything else is gravy, but on the whole, rather unnecessary once
    you're accustomed to the game.  
    
    Further along this path are two more barrels for smashing, but you're probably
    more concerned with leaving this place.  Combine the rifle and scope, then
    equip them and head for the small opening to the right of the exit.  Start
    picking off various GANADOS with headshots.  All told, there are about seven of
    them wandering around that you can pick off without anyone noticing.  Even if
    one of the GANADOS on the right charges you with the pitchfork, you should keep
    going and try to collect 'em all.
    
    **VALLEY FORTRESS**
    ENEMIES: FORTY GANADOS (including those you may have picked off)
    
    Basically, as soon as you enter this place and are noticed, music will start
    playing and GANADOS will start spawning non-stop.  There isn't any specific
    way of strategizing this other than to warn you.  A lot of them have dynamite
    as well, but try to play that into an advantage for you.
    
    First, you'll want to run up the criss-crossing cliffs on the right side until
    you reach the sandbags.  Break the barrels, get the goods (RIFLE SHOTS (10) and
    PSTAS), and open up the chest to get the EMBLEM (LEFT HALF).  Before running
    back down, you might want to wait for a bit and let some more GANADOS come to
    you, provided you have the red explosive barrel still there waiting to be
    popped.
    
    Make your way down the cliffs (a lot of GANADOS will charge you here, so come
    prepared).  By this time, it's possible that you've killed around thirty
    GANADOS, so you'll be close to killing the last four, which are stationary.  At
    the edge of the bridge, pull out your rifle and snipe the one on top of the
    building to your left.  Inside that building are three more GANADOS.  If you're
    entering it by making a left and going over the short plank bridge, two
    GANADOS will be next to the ladder and another will be further along near a
    door (assuming that your firing didn't alert them).  You can pick up SHOTGUN
    SHELLS (5) in the first room here as well.  In the second room with the ladder,
    you can pick up some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the box and a FLASH GRENADE in the
    locker.  Now climb up the ladder and open the chest to get the EMBLEM (RIGHT
    HALF).  Combine it with the other piece to get the HEXAGONAL EMBLEM.  There's
    a barrel on top here, and another behind where the locker was on the outside.
    
    By now, you should have killed all the GANADOS and the music should stop
    playing, but if it hasn't, you still have a few more to go.  Run up to the high
    ground on this side and break the barrels, then turn around and face the
    GANADOS that spawned behind you.  Inside the nearby building, you can pick up
    1000 PSTAS and a YELLOW HERB from the lockers.  There's also a barrel for the
    breaking if you climb both ladders nearby.
    
    When you're done here, use the HEXAGONAL EMBLEM on the door and open it.
    
    **VALLEY REFINERY**
    ENEMIES: TWELVE GANADOS
    
    Head down the path to the doors.  There will be a barrel on the right just
    before it, and another two to the left.  Inside, there's a barrel on the left,
    but the door on your right is the goal.  Down the path are four more GANADOS,
    so kill them and move on until you find the windows.  Beyond them are five
    GANADOS hiding behind a barricade, a number of which will be tossing dynamite.
    See if you can't alert the group, then kill one of them holding the explosive
    to take out the whole group.  As you go deeper into the room, shoot the traps
    on the right and grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and SPINEL from the furnaces,
    then break a barrel nearby.
    
    The door near the barricade is your goal here, but there are two GANADOS inside
    so stay alert.  Once inside, make a left and break the planks to get into a
    small room and pick up an ELEGANT MASK, which can be combined with some things
    you'll find later.  Break the two barrels in the area and go through the door
    around the corner.  Down at the bottom of the stairs and around the corner,
    you'll meet up with the last GANADO, who will probably make one of the alert
    yells despite there being no other enemies in the area.  Kill him.  After that,
    you might want to jump down to the pit on the left and kill some fish to get
    some life.  You could also pick up a FLASH GRENADE, 1000 PSTAS, and HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10) down there.  When you're done, climb up the ladder.
    
    **MENDEZ' RESIDENCE (REAR)**
    ENEMIES: THREE CROWS
    
    There are some CROWS near a dynamite trap.  Do the math, though you may want
    to subtract the crow closest to you beforehand.  To the left is another well
    with a jewel, so shoot the plank out and grab the BRASS POCKET WATCH after it
    lands.  There's some stuff to break in the shack to the left, but your goal is
    the back of the house in front of you.  Just be sure to shoot the traps along
    the way.
    
    When you get to the top, you'll find your first puzzle of the game...
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [INSIGNIA GLOBE PUZZLE]                             +
    +                                                     +
    + In front of you will be a globe with a mark shaped  +
    + like a plus sign, flanked by two symbols identical  +
    + to the one on the hex emblem.  Get used to seeing   +
    + it in this game.                                    +
    +                                                     +
    + The goal here is to make the center globe look like +
    + that symbol.  Now if you look very carefully at the +
    + globe, you'll see a little prong at the bottom that +
    + resembles one of the lower "arms" on the symbol.    +
    + Flip it up once to gain access to that.             +
    +                                                     +
    + Now you're looking at a spikey version of the       +
    + symbol that doesn't quite look right.  To change it +
    + to the more familiar form, rotate it either to the  +
    + left or the right.  Either way works.               +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    This will open the way to Mendez' bedroom.  To the right is an armoire with
    1000 PSTAS inside.  Grab the FILE on the corner of the bed and get the HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10) from the desk, but your goal is the INSIGNIA KEY in the case in
    front of you.  Now head out the door to the end of the chapter.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 1-3: The Church and The Lake 
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **MENDEZ' RESIDENCE (FRONT)**
    ENEMIES: TEN GANADOS, ONE CHAINSAW MANIAC
    
    For some added fun, you can go back in the door next to you for a bonus scene.
    But more likely, you'll just want to get on with the game, so check the cabinet
    behind you for a GREEN HERB.  On the other side, there are some stairs and
    a bathroom behind them, but there's just a GANADO in there, so don't bother.
    Turn right and explore the corridor to get an INCENDIARY GRENADE from the shelf
    and 1000 PSTAS from the cabinet.  Head out (save at the typewriter, if need be)
    and go into the kitchen, opening the oven to get a BROWN CHICKEN EGG.
    
    Outside, there are a bunch of GANADOS, but fire you'll have to deal with three
    of them flanking a CHAINSAW MANIC.  Grenades help this situation immensely, and
    so does some proficiency with the rifle.  You can safely plug the maniac in the
    head every time he stands up to avoid him getting too close.  Pick up the RUBY
    once he bites it, then continue on and shoot a SPINEL out of the nest in the
    tree up ahead.  Further along there's a shack with a GANADO couple and a RED
    HERB in-a-box, and beyond that, another tree with a nest (this time, it's TMP
    AMMO (50).  Still not done here though, as a pack of four GANADOS guards the
    exit.  Again, grenades are loads of fun here.
    
    **PUEBLO**
    ENEMIES: TEN GANADOS
    
    There are ten GANADOS that appear in this area, but only eight of them will
    come charging up the hill at you.  The other two are atop the buildings in the
    distance, so use your rifle to pick them off.  Again, there's no real strategy
    here other than backing yourself into a corner and fending them off, so don't
    worry about it.  When you're done, you can use the INSIGNIA KEY to unlock the
    door with the same symbol near the tower.
    
    **VILLAGE TUNNEL**
    
    It's a save room!  Pick the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) off the shelf and break the
    box on the stove.  The door beyond will lead you to a barrel (with TMP AMMO
    (50) inside) and a ladder.  First, shoot down the oil lamp to get another
    SPINEL.  Jump down the trap door and run down the hall until you get to another
    oil lamp.  Shoot that down and some shinys will start to appear on the walls.
    Knock 'em all down to get two SPINELS and an ELEGANT HEADDRESS.  There might
    also be some PSTAS in the box.
    
    Further along you'll find your friend and mine, the merchant.  Sell the RUBY,
    the SPINELS, the BRASS POCKET WATCH, and the ELEGANT HEADDRESS.  I sell my TMP
    AMMO too, but I never use the blasted thing anyway (nor do I recommend it).
    There's not much that's new and exciting to buy here, so you may want to head
    through the door and up the ladder.
    
    *****************************************
    ****************MERCHANT*****************
    *    BUY (NEW)      *   TUNE UP (NEW)   *
    * Stock (TMP) (4k)  * TMP FP (0.5, 7k)  *
    ********************* TMP RS (1.93, 5k) *
    ********************* TMP CAP (50, 7k)  *
    *****************************************
    
    **CEMETARY**
    ENEMIES: THREE CROWS, TEN GANADOS, ONE SNAKE
    
    Walk up the path and shoot down the nest overhead for some RIFLE SHOTS (10).
    At the edge of the cemetary, you'll get a scene and a view of three CROWS
    scattered about.  Kill them and this will alert the two GANADOS in the area
    nearby, leading them both to charge you.  Deal with it, then enter the shack
    for some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and two boxes, one of which will have more
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10).
    
    You may be noticing the return of the blue medallions here, so shoot one of of
    the tree on the left, one out of the tree on the right, and one from the tree
    next to the shack.  That's ten down, but for the purposes of getting the
    special upgrade, don't go and retrieve your prize just yet.
    
    Instead, climb the path where you'll meet up with three more GANADOS, one of
    which will have dynamite.  Kill 'em all and take the goods, then examine the
    church door as you can't progress without at least trying that.
    
    After the scene, shoot the eleventh medallion on the left side of the church.
    
    Now you're going to want to head down the right side of the church to search
    the area.  The door you'll find is locked, but beyond that is a GANADO couple,
    one of which has more dynamite.
    
    When you kill them, you can progress and find the twelfth blue medallion on the
    far corner of the roof, but what of the pedestal in front of you?  Kind of
    smells like a puzzle to me...
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [TWIN SYMBOL PUZZLE]                                +
    +                                                     +
    + If you searched the graves in the yard, you may     +
    + have seen a few of them that had twin symbols on    +
    + them.  If you didn't, at ease, I'll give you the    +
    + solution.                                           +
    +                                                     +
    + What you're trying to do is light up the symbols    +
    + that look like an M, a V, and a Z.  Unfortunately,  +
    + you can only turn the dial in increments of three   +
    + and four.                                           +
    +                                                     +
    + To solve this one, turn it three once, four three   +
    + times, three once again, four three more times, and +
    + three for one final turn.                           +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    After taking your shiny new GREEN CATSEYE, head down the path beyond the gated
    area around the church.  You'll find a poorly built bridge, and four GANADOS
    on it, three near you and one near the end.  Like in the valley area, these
    can be kicked into the deep rather easily, so use that method if you want.  The
    GANADO at the end should remain stationary, but you can still snipe him.  Jump
    the gap and go into the shack to find a FILE, and two boxes.  The one below has
    a SNAKE inside, so slash twice and pick up an egg as your reward.
    
    Now it's time to get the last three medallions.  On this side, if you look
    under the gap you just jumped, you can find the thirteenth in plain view.  The
    fourteenth should be just above and behind you.  The last one you should see on
    your way to the second gap, just hanging to the right, so shoot that down to
    get them all.  Don't go running back to the merchant yet, though, just continue
    on as you'll meet up with another one soon enough.
    
    
    **MINING FORTRESS**
    ENEMIES: FOURTEEN CROWS
    
    There's a barrel to the right ahead, but before you go charging onward, pause
    for a second to regard the murder of crows in front of you.  Now toss a FLASH
    GRENADE into the mob to kill them all.  You'll get a ton of PSTAS as well as a
    refund on the flashbang you just wasted.  Now, on one of the carts to your left
    is a SPINEL, but you should be more interested in the tiny huts, where you can
    grab HANDGUN BULLETS (10), a SPINEL, more HANDGUN BULLETS (10).  Further along,
    two barrels waiting to be smashed and a choice between a door at this level or
    one slightly down the stairs.  Take the stairs.
    
    **RIVER SHOP**
    
    Jump down the ladder and grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) ahead.  Turn right and
    you'll see a typewriter and a barrel, but first, hang a left at the typewriter
    and go behind the store where you'll find another barrel.  Now talk to the
    merchant and get your reward.  Buy the 0 PSTA PUNISHER from the screen, then
    ditch your old handgun.  The display will taunt you with visions of new guns
    you can't buy just yet, but patience, all in due time.  Exit when you're done.
    
    *******************************************
    ******************MERCHANT*****************
    *   BUY (NEW)   *      TUNE UP (NEW)      *
    * Punisher (0k) * Punisher FS (0.40, 10k) *
    ***************** Punisher RS (1.47, 8k)  *
    ***************** Punisher CAP (13, 8k)   *
    *******************************************
    
    **MINING FORTRESS**
    
    Nothing else to do here but take a right and go out the door.
    
    **SWAMP**
    ENEMIES: TWENTY-FIVE GANADOS, SNAKES!
    
    See the skull sign, and be aware of it's connotations.  But first, check the
    shack next to you for a barrel and some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the table.
    After you've evaded danger again, turn around and fire at the shiny to get a
    SPINEL.
    
    Further along in the swamp, you'll see a few GANADOS and a few dynamite traps.
    Try to combine the two if you can.  As you continue along the bridge, the
    GANADOS that pushed the boulder, about five of them, will start coming at you
    from behind, so fend them off.  Once things cool down a bit, you might want to
    search the shack, where you'll find boxes containing SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), TMP
    AMMO (50), and a SNAKE.  Also on one side of the beginning of the bridge, you
    can pick up a HAND GRENADE.  Another pack of GANADOS should charge you, but
    that's nothing unusual.
    
    Now, it's time to search the right side of the swamp.  Blow up both of the
    dynamite traps (or just the the second, if the first was already triggered)
    and continue on until you see a tiny bit of dry land with a tree to the left.
    Shoot the nest in the tree and you'll get an ANTIQUE PIPE.  There's also a
    little slope that can lead you back up to the bridge, where you can find an
    INCENDIARY GRENADE.  Once you reach the other side of the swamp you should find
    the last pack of GANADOS, about seven all told.  Kill them all then go inside
    the shack to get more HANDGUN BULLETS (10).  The box just has a snake in it, so
    do with that what you will.  Continue along the path and go through the door.
    
    **LAKE (WEST)**
    
    You can head down the upper path if you want an extra scene, but it's really
    rather unnecessary.  On the lower path, shoot the nest from one of the trees
    to get a GOLD BANGLE W/ PEARLS.  Inside the shack, you'll find a box with a
    YELLOW HERB and a pack of HANDGUN BULLETS (10).  The shack further along has a
    typewriter, a GREEN HERB, and a barrel.  You might want to save soon.  When
    you're done, get in the boat and drive to the other side.  Don't shoot into the
    water unless you want something bad to happen.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #1: DEL LAGO]+                                                  |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Not exactly what you expected, and I don't know that it's involved with the  |
    |the parasites either.  Del Lago will mostly drag you around the lake and     |
    |occasionally into the stumps floating in the water, which you ought to steer |
    |around.  Sometimes it'll make a quick turn and try to knock you off course,  |
    |but again, keep steering around it and you'll be fine.  Keep throwing the    |
    |harpoons at it when things are clear, and don't worry about ammo, as they're |
    |infinite.  It's third attack is to disappear under the water and then        |
    |reappear on one of the far sides of the lake.  You won't be able to tell     |
    |where at first, but some arrows will come up on the screen pointing to it.   |
    |Throwing harpoons at it in this stage seems to deter it from knocking your   |
    |boat over, so there's little risk.  After 20-25 harpoons, it'll die and the  |
    |rope will start dragging you under, so think fast and keep hacking at it.    |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 2-1: Nightfall and The Church, revisited 
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **LAKE (EAST)**
    
    After a few scenes, you're in a cabin on the east part of the lake.  Pick up
    the FILE on the bed, the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the table, the FLASH GRENADE
    on the shelf, and whatever's in the box, if anything.  Save on the typewriter
    if you want.
    
    Head back out to the docks.  There are a lot of fish out here, so if you're in
    dire need of refilling your health, you can go hunting, either with your gun or
    inside the boat using the infinite harpoons.  Get back into the boat either way
    and head across to the blue lights, which indicate a merchant shop.
    
    **LAKE SHOP**
    
    Before you talk to the merchant, you might want to break the three barrels on
    the right (one has HANDGUN BULLETS (10)), then shoot up at the torch to make it
    drop a SPINEL.  Go to the left, break the barrel, then then push the crate to
    the end, hang a right, break the other two barrels, and climb the ladder.
    Solve the box pushing "puzzle", and break the barrels to get 1000 PSTAS and a
    GREEN GEM, which you can combine with the Elegant Mask.  You can also jump down
    the ladder to get behind the Merchant, where there will be some RIFLE SHOTS
    (10).  Talk to the Merchant and do what you have to, selling off what goods you
    don't need, etc.
    
    ***************************************
    ***************MERCHANT****************
    *   BUY (NEW) *      TUNE UP (NEW)    *
    * Nothing new * Shotgun FP (5.0, 20k) *
    *************** Shotgun CAP (10, 10k) *
    *************** Rifle FP (6.0, 12k)   *
    *************** Rifle CAP (9, 8k)     *
    ***************************************
    
    **LAKE (EAST)**
    
    Head back for the docks you just came from, which are straight ahead and
    slightly to the left.  You could go to the other side of the lake, if you
    wanted to, but there's nothing new over there, save for some HANDGUN BULLETS
    (10), and beyond that there's a new vicious enemy you'll find out about later,
    so don't bother.  Get off at the docks and go down to the door.
    
    **UPPER WATERFALL**
    ENEMIES: ONE GANADO and...
    
    Walk forward and you'll get a scene which will reveal a frightening new enemy,
    along with a GANADO behind him.  These enemies will appear at random, and
    there's no particular way to kill them aside from shooting the head, hopefully
    with something powerful.  If you have a flash grenade, these will also kill
    them instantaneously.
    
    When the parasite head dies, it drops 5000 PSTAS.  Continue on and jump across
    the platforms.  You'll have to cross back further on, but first off you'll want
    to break the barrel at the end of this path for a HAND GRENADE.  Jump back over
    to the other side, then pull out your rifle.  Walk to the edge and on the left
    side, there's a small tower where you can snipe a GANADO.  Now climb down the
    rope...
    
    **LOWER WATERFALL**
    ENEMIES: FIFTEEN GANADOS (including the one you sniped)
    
    Walk forward a bit, then snipe the SPINEL off the wall.  If you climb up the
    nearby tower, there's a HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and a barrel.  From here, shoot
    the chain on the box to open up a path across the river.  On the other side,
    turn right and climb up the ladder to break a barrel and get a GREEN HERB, and
    shoot the shiny on the pipe to get an AMBER RING.  Now repeat the process you
    just used with the boxes to get another bridge across the water.  There's
    another barrel on this sidke, but the goal is the ladder, where you can flip
    a switch to divert the current.
    
    As you cross the boxes on your way back, the other fourteen GANADOS will make
    their appearance.  If you really want it easy, jump over the boxes again and
    wait for the GANADOS to try to do the same.  You can shoot them off easily and
    they'll drown.
    
    In the cave, you can grab the ROUND INSIGNIA that will let you open the church,
    then the path will lead to...
    
    **LAKE CAVE**
    
    Two barrels here.  Get on the boat and ride to...
    
    **RIVER SHOP**
    
    There's nothing here that's new, but you can save and you might want to.  When
    you're done here, climb up the ladder and prepare yourself.
    
    **MINING FORTRESS**
    
    Two barrels in front of you, and one will have a GREEN HERB.  Head to the left
    and into the main arena and you'll get a scene...
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #2: EL GIGANTE]+                                                |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |There's nothing to like about this fight, particularly with how he'll break  |
    |the houses which typically hold goodies.  It doesn't seem to matter where    |
    |you shoot him, but I still try for the head with the RIFLE or SHOTGUN.       |
    |After some time passes, the dog that you saved earlier will come to help you |
    |distract it which makes things easier.  El Gigante will either charge you,   |
    |stomp on you, or grab you for his main attacks.  The grabbing can be solved  |
    |via the knife, but everything else you should be able to dodge easily (you   |
    |can run through his legs).  He has been known to bowl rocks at you, so stay  |
    |alert.  If he walks over and grabs a tree, he'll start swinging that at you, |
    |so get around that by tossing flash grenades, which will cause him to drop   |
    |it.  When you do enough damage to him, he'll fall to his knees and the       |
    |parasite will appear on his back, so hop on and slash at it.  Do this        |
    |routine three times and he'll drop dead.                                     |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Gigante will drop 15000 PSTAS upon death.  Depending on how you fared in this
    battle, the three shacks will be either secure or shattered.  The east one has
    a SPINEL, SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), and 1000 PSTAS, the middle one has HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10) and 1000 PSTAS, and the west one has TMP AMMO (50), a SPINEL, and
    a GREEN HERB.  There's also some additional treasure around here, and back by
    the carts and kindling you can find a RED HERB, a YELLOW HERB, and HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10).  There's another barrel on the way to the door as well.
    
    **CEMETARY**
    ENEMIES: THREE COLMILLOS
    
    Head up the path, jumping the gaps when needed.  The shack will have two new
    boxes to smash.  Continue on, but get your shotgun out, and when you see a dog-
    like figure ahead, fire.  These are COLMILLOS, and there are three of them.
    Kill them all quickly because they get nastier if you leave them alone.  Once
    you've killed them all, use the ROUND INSIGNIA on the door and go inside.
    
    **VILLAGE CHAPEL**
    
    Up ahead, you can raid the collection plate for 3000 PSTAS.  To the right of
    the entrance is a barrel with a FLASH GRENADE, but your goal is the ladder on
    the left side.  On the upper level, jump across on the chandelier, and run
    around the right side to break two barrels, one of which will hold an
    INCENDIARY GRENADE.  But now, it's puzzle time...
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [KALEIDOSCOPE PUZZLE]                               +
    +                                                     +
    + Well, it's not really a kaleidoscope, but still.    +
    + The goal here is to get each of the individual      +
    + color wheels to match up with the whole image in    +
    + the center.                                         +
    +                                                     +
    + Notice the large red chunks on the ride side of the +
    + central image?  Turn the red twice to make it fit.  +
    + The green is primarily on the left side, so turn it +
    + three times to line up those pieces.  Last, we have +
    + the blue wheel.  It's kind of hard to tell with     +
    + this one, but notice how there's more blue at the   +
    + top and bottom and it's purple in the middle?  Turn +
    + that once to get it in order, then combine them.    +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    Now you have access to the door in the center, so it's time to head right and
    visit Ashley.  Break all the barrels in here to get some goods, two boxes of
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10), a GREEN HERB, and other goods, then turn around and jump
    down the ladder.  Catch Ashley, then continue into the chapel to end the
    chapter.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 2-2: The Great Standoff 
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **CHURCH STORAGE**
    
    No enemies here, but you can get 1000 PSTAS, a RED HERB, and HANDGUN BULLETS
    (10) here.  Exit when you're ready.
    
    **CEMETARY**
    ENEMIES: ~TEN GANADOS
    
    You may be thinking it could be bright idea to charge back into the church, but
    the crossbow monks are still there, so don't.
    
    Instead, walk forward, pause for a second, then shoot the cart to run down most
    of the GANADOS.  In the shack, the boxes are back and you can grab more HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10), and the nest from last time will also yield HANDGUN BULLETS (10),
    but your goal should be the ladder and the tunnel.
    
    **VILLAGE TUNNEL**
    
    If you talk to the merchant, you can now buy the RED9 handgun and stock.  It's
    my favorite toy, and you may like it too, but it's not for everyone.  Continue
    on and up the ladder at the other end.  Shoot the lamp and you can get another
    SPINEL, just make sure Ashley isn't in the way.  In the room beyond, there's
    the typewriter, as usual, and a replenished box.
    
    **********************************************
    *******************MERCHANT*******************
    *      BUY (NEW)    *      TUNE UP (NEW)     *
    *     Red9 (14k)    * Punisher FP (1.3, 15k) *
    * Stock (Red9) (4k) * Punisher CAP (16, 10k) *
    ********************* TMP FP (0.6, 14k)      *
    ********************* TMP CAP (100, 15k)     *
    ********************* Red9 FP (1.7, 15k)     *
    ********************* Red9 FS (0.47, 10k)    *
    ********************* Red9 RS (2.20, 6k)     *
    ********************* Red9 CAP (10, 6 k)     *
    **********************************************
    
    **PUEBLO**
    ENEMIES: EIGHT GANADOS
    
    One GANADO to your left will announce your arrival with a yell.  There's
    another by the cowshed, one on the opposite side, on behind the two-story
    house, and four more on the path to the farm.  Your goal is the farm, so kill
    them all, but be sure to trip the beartraps along the way by firing at them.
    
    The goods in the village have been replenished, and you can find a SPINEL in
    the bell tower, TMP AMMO (50) in the cabinet of the two-story and HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10) within one of the barrels, HANDGUN BULLETS (10) in the house
    adjacent, 1000 PSTAS in the shack near the door to Rancho Mendez (locked), and
    1000 PSTAS in the big house.  Once you've had your fun scrounging you can head
    for the door to the farm.
    
    **FARM**
    ENEMIES: EIGHT GANADOS
    
    The first thing you'll want to do here is to sand next to the dumpster and
    press the X-Button.  This will hide Ashley until you press X again, and thus
    save her from any sort of unwanted attention.
    
    There's a FILE and a barrel (HANDGUN BULLETS (10)) in the typewriter shack.
    This area also has eight GANADOS, one in the barn, one in the area by the
    blocked door (your goal), two on the platform, three beneath them, and one
    inside the house.  In the cabinets inside the house you can find two boxes of
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and a GREEN HERB.  The barrels will yield 1000 PSTAS,
    among other possible supplies.  There's also another 1000 PSTAS in a barrel
    behind the barn and in the shack near the blocked door.
    
    Once you've jumped off the platform near the blocked door (and shot all the
    beartraps in the area) call Ashley out and catch her when she needs to jump.
    With some help from her, you can now unblock the door and enter an entirely
    new area.
    
    **CABIN**
    ENEMIES: The welcoming party is on their way...
    
    Talk to the merchant ahead and make some preparations.  There's going to be a
    huge battle as soon as you cross this bridge, so be prepared.
    
    Once you're inside the cabin, Luis will be helping you and Ashley will be in
    hiding.  Don't shoot at Luis.  It's not like he can get damaged, but if you
    shoot him too much, the game is over.  Push the shelves to barricade the
    windows and then run around collecting the items on this floor, which will
    include some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), a RED HERB, and a YELLOW HERB.
    
    The group outside will eventually bust in, and there will be forty of them all
    told that you'll have to kill.  If you have grenades, huck 'em out the windows
    when there are too many GANADOS coming from any one of them.  Use flashbangs
    only when overwhelmed by parasite heads (this will happen).  Otherwise, you can
    snipe through the windows for giggles, but it's really not advised.
    
    During the fight, Luis will toss you HANDGUN BULLETS (10) at fairly regular
    intervals.
    
    After a certain length of time, Luis will suggest the two of you run upstairs.
    Ladders will start crashing through the nearby windows, but push them out with
    some regularity and you should be safe.  In the meantime, other groups of
    GANADOS will be charging up the stairs and you'll just have to deal with that,
    preferably by standing guard at the top with a shotgun.  On the top level here
    you'll find another FLASH GRENADE, a GREEN HERB, and an INCENDIARY GRENADE, all
    of which you can probably find a use for.  When you've filled your kill quota,
    the chapter will end.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 2-3: Two Paths and a Duel 
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **CABIN**
    
    The enemies are all gone, so run through the house and see if there's anything
    you've missed or didn't have a chance to pick up the first time.  To your left
    upon leaving is a box of HANDGUN BULLETS (10) atop a woodpile, and another pack
    of TMP AMMO (50) next to the house.  Chat with the merchant and do your
    business, but them you might want to check out the shack and grab the FILE,
    which will explain what you're up against, and the typewriter.  I recommend
    saving.
    
    
    **********************************
    *************MERCHANT*************
    *   BUY (NEW)    * TUNE UP (NEW) *
    * Punisher (20k) *     (none)    *
    **********************************
    
    From here, depending on how you choose to handle this, you'll be taking the
    left path, which will feature a ton of ganados and a couple of female chainsaw
    maniacs, or the right path, which will feature a fight with an El Gigante in
    very tight quarters.  Me, I pick both, but let's start out with the left side.
    Scroll down if you want info on the right (hope you have fire grenades for the
    left side and flashes and standards for the right).
    
     ---------
    |LEFT PATH|
     ---------
    
    **LEFT PATH**
    ENEMIES: ELEVEN GANADOS (First wave)
             FIVE GANADOS, TWO CHAINSAW MANIACS (Second wave)
             ~TWELVE GANADOS  (Third wave)
    
    The first thing you'll want to do here is stash Ashley in the box ahead.  The
    second thing?  Run like hell back to the door and wait for the standoff.  Two
    female GANADOS charge you right off, followed by three GANADOS from the sides
    and one GANADO from atop.  Shoot the cart to clear out a few of 'em.  Continue
    on and you'll see a female GANADO pacing the high ground, and male GANADO
    further along.  Kill them both (rifle) and climb up the ladder.  There are
    three more GANADOS circling the central pit here, and you should kill them all.
    You can move Ashley up to the safety of the new dumpster up here, but you don't
    have to just yet.  Before you go jumping into the central pit, you'll want to
    break the barrel on the platform for a GREEN HERB, then jump down the smaller,
    secondary pit for some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and a RED HERB in a barrel.
    
    Now you should be ready to take on the central pit and the second wave (after
    you've reloaded, of course).  Go to the far side of the pit and kick down the
    ladder next to the dumpster.  When you jump in, this triggers the second wave,
    two female CHAINSAW MANIACS and five GANADOS.  Climb up the ladder on the
    opposite side, then kick it down.  This buys you a good chunk of time with
    which you can back yourself into a corner and start sniping off anyone in the
    area, particularly the chainsaws.  Keep knocking that ladder down in the
    meantime.  When you've killed both of them, one will drop a RUBY and the other
    will drop the CAMP KEY.  Jump back down into the pit, break the barrels
    (HANDGUN BULLETS (10)), then call Ashley out and catch her when she arrives.
    
    The third wave is a bit tricky, so tell Ashley to wait behind in here where
    they won't be able to find her.  Unlock the door, then hang a right and break
    the box for more HANGUN BULLETS (10).  Open the door, break the barrel, and
    jump down into the hole where there's another barrel (HANDGUN BULLETS (10)) and
    a HAND GRENADE.  Climb back up and break the planks to the right of the door
    and continue on to some breakables and, inside, a FLASH GRENADE and a RED GEM.
    Around the other side of the path you can find the third wave, twelve GANADOS
    total.  Kill 'em all, then break all the barrels nearby, which contain at least
    two boxes of HANDGUN BULLETS (10), then call Ashley out.  Unbar the door here,
    then either head out or go back to the interchange and take the right path.
    
     ----------
    |RIGHT PATH|
     ----------
    
    **RIGHT PATH**
    ENEMIES: EL GIGANTE
    
    I don't recommend doing this unless you have at least two hand grenades.
    
    Walk forward for a bit and the El Gigante will drop in from behind you.  With
    Ashley around, this is, in a lot of respects, much more difficult than it would
    be solo.  Not only are the quarters incredibly tight, but Ashley spends the
    first half-minute of the fight gawking at the boulder overhead, and if you try
    shooting she's just going to waste your time by ducking as the Gigante
    approaches.  If you haven't gathered as much already, Gigante isn't too fond of
    Ashley and will kill her rather easily, either by falling on top of her or by
    conventional means.  Thus this whole ordeal can take FOREVER to complete
    because she's too stupid not to get killed.  Shooting down the boulder is a
    nice fix to stun him, but it does too little damage for how much pain it is to
    aim at it, so you're better off hucking what grenades you have (flash and
    standard) in an effort to knock him down and get your slashes in.  If he gets
    too close, run between his legs just as you did in the previous fight.  You may
    also choose to shoot the chains off the nearby door and continue running, but
    if you do that, Gigante will eventually destroy the goodie huts, which are one
    of the few reasons you have for taking this path.  When you know you're about
    to kill him, tell Ashley to wait a ways away, then jump on and do the stabby.
    15000 PSTAS is your reward after the battle.
    
    Continue on and you can get HANGUN BULLETS (10), TMP AMMO (50), 1000 PSTAS, and
    a SPINEL, and an INCENDIARY GRENADE in the first hut, a box outside, and the
    OLD KEY, three boxes of HANDGUN BULLETS (10), and 2000 PSTAS in the second hut,
    along with yet another box of HANDGUN BULLETS (10) outside.  You can also aim
    at the shiny in the bucket to get a PURPLE GEM.
    
    If you've finished up around here, use the OLD KEY on the door at the far end
    and either exit or take the left path, if you're feeling more adventurous.
    
     ---------
    |END PATHS|
     ---------
    
    **UPPER CANYON**
    ENEMIES: THIRTEEN GANADOS
    
    Which path you came out of will determine your location, but if you came out
    on the left side, you should double back to the right where there's a house
    with HANDGUN BULLETS (10) outside, and a FILE, RIFLE SHOTS (10), and a
    typewriters inside.  When you're done there, you might want to head over to the
    nearby merchant platform, where you can break a barrel for a HANDGUN BULLETS
    (10) pack and sell your junk, but there's nothing new and exciting available.
    
    Head to the left side of the path, past the big door you can't yet open, and
    you'll find a gondola service.  There's HANDGUN BULLETS (10) in the barrel on
    the right, but before you get on the gondola, you should head over to the left
    side, pull out your rifle, and snipe the two GANADOS in the distance.  This
    will make your life a lot easier.
    
    Reload when you're done and hop on.  You'll have to shoot another eleven
    GANADOS off the neighboring gondolas, but keep using the rifle and you'll do
    fine.
    
    **LOWER CANYON**
    ENEMIES: THREE GANADOS
    
    In the control center nearby, you can grab a FLASH GRENADE and a pack of
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10).  Continue along down the first set of stairs, but tell
    Ashley to wait here.  Go into the cave and see if you can edge around the
    corner until you have a clear shot of the dynamite in the hand of one of the
    GANADOS.  Shoot it to take out both of them.  Further along, there's a ladder
    with a GANADO waiting at the top, so snipe him off and climb up.  Inside the
    chest here, you'll find the YELLOW CATSEYE to complete the Beerstein.
    
    Get Ashley and head down the second set of stairs, where you'll find the
    merchant, a typewriter, and some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and TMP AMMO (50).
    Continue on when you're ready.
    
    **TORTURE CABIN**
    ENEMIES: ...
    
    You'll tell Ashley to wait once you reach the house (don't bother going down
    the side).  Once inside, you'll have to dodge something pretty soon, and then,
    it's on.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #3: BITORES MENDEZ A]+                                          |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: INFANTILE]+                                                    |
    |AKA, the Mendez-pede.  For as large and imposing as he is, this form is      |
    |surprisingly easy to beat.  Mendez lacks the ability to charge and will      |
    |maintain the same approximate pace whenever he walks towards you.  His       |
    |attacks, which consist of swinging his shoulder blades grabbing you and      | 
    |swinging you around, or doing a bear hug on you, which will likely follow an |
    |attack where he smacks you upside the head to stun you (though it does no    |
    |damage at all).  His attacks are rather easy to dodge, and there is more     |
    |than ample space to use on the sides.  So whenever he gets too close to you, |
    |run straight past him (dodging, while you do this, will cause you to dive    |
    |back in front of him, which makes it rather pointless to try, though he      |
    |can't usually attack you in time even if you do mess up).  The weakpoint you |
    |should aim at is the spinal column (head works too), either sniping it with  |
    |the RIFLE or pulling out the RED9 or PUNISHER and blasting it at a much      |
    |faster rate (which I highly recommend).  I wouldn't use the SHOTGUN here, as |
    |it wastes ammo.  There's an explosive barrel you can blow up near the ladder,|
    |and that can take a significant chunk off his life.  Your attacks will stun  |
    |him periodically on their own, either causing his jaw to drop or making him  |
    |lose balance and fall backwards while his legs keep going, but neither seem  |
    |to be dependant on quality shots or how much life you've taken away.  You    |
    |should be able to kill him without taking any damage at all.                 |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After a yucky mutation scene, you get to play around some more with this...
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #4: BITORES MENDEZ B]+                                          |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Mendez got no legs now and seems pretty pissed about his future inability to |
    |dance.  The appendages on his back are now used to allow him to swing from   |
    |pipe to pipe at the top of the room.  This makes it a bad idea to stay down  |
    |on the floor, so take it to the upper level via one of the ladders.  Get to  |
    |the end of the room and snipe him at a distance, then either TMP or SHOTGUN  |
    |him when close.  Just be warned that if he does get close, he'll try to maul |
    |you with his claws or stab you with his shoulder blade, which ends up doing  |
    |a lot of damage.  Either run to the sides when he gets too close or just     |
    |bear it and pick up any healing items you can find nearby.  An unusually     |
    |solid tactic here is to stay on the short end of the upper level (i.e. near  |
    |the ladder) and run from one side to the other there shooting Mendez as he   |
    |tries to track you at a much slower pace.  Another trick is to toss out      |
    |flash grenades.  When they go off, Mendez will lose his grip and fall down,  |
    |but be warned, he pops up rather quickly and you should plan ahead for that. |
    |There are a few spots on the upper level where you can hide from Mendez      |
    |successfully and avoid attack.  I've done it in the upper left corner        |
    |(relative to the ladder), but I had more success hiding behind the pillar of |
    |the barricade on the left side of the second floor.  It isn't necessary to   |
    |hide (and sometimes difficult to do, so don't bank on it), as this is the    |
    |last boss fight for a while, but it does make things easier.                 |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    There's a lot of things to pick up here, including TMP AMMO (25), an INCENDIARY
    GRENADE, a SPINEL, a GREEN HERB, SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), and HANDGUN BULLETS (10)
    on the lower level, and more HANDGUN BULLETS (10), a HAND GRENADE, a RED HERB,
    a YELLOW HERB, and another GREEN HERB up top.  Don't forget the FALSE EYE and
    your 30000 PSTAS before jumping out and leaving this place.
    
    **LOWER CANYON**
    
    Take the gondola back up.  Nothin' doin' here.
    
    **UPPER CANYON**
    
    Head for the big door and use that FALSE EYE to open it.
    
    **PATH TO CASTLE**
    ENEMIES: ~TEN to TWELVE GANADOS
    
    Grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) next to you, then pull out your rifle right away
    because there's gonna be trouble soon.  Walk forward and the three GANADOS
    ahead will be run down by a truck.  Snipe the driver as soon as you're able,
    then wait for the truck to crash, yielding 5500 PSTAS if you check it.  GANADOS
    will start pouring out soon from the gate behind you, so whip around and kill
    the sods.  Up on an outcropping ahead you can get a VELVET BLUE and HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10) from the barrels, but your goal is the bridge ahead.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 3-1: Castle Gates 
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **DRAWBRIDGE**
    
    You're safe for the time being, and there's also a bunch of items to get in
    this room.  Talk to the merchant inside the hut and trade in your rifle for a
    SEMI-AUTO RIFLE and scope.  Also, if you aren't planning on using the shotgun
    to the end, trade in for a RIOT GUN.  You should also by the ATTACHE CASE L,
    but that goes without saying.  When you're done bartering/upgrading, pick up
    the GREEN HERB and save near the typewriter, if you wish.
    
    
    ************************************************************
    ****************************MERCHANT************************
    *      BUY (NEW)                *      TUNE UP (NEW)       *
    * Attache Case L (40k)          * Handgun FP (1.4, 10k)    *
    * Treasure Map (Castle) (10k)   * Handgun FP (1.6, 15k)    *
    * Blacktail (24k)               * Handgun FS (0.33, 12k)   *
    * Broken Buttefly (38k)         * Handgun RS (0.87 10k)    *
    * Riot Gun (32k)                * Handgun CAP (16, 6k)     *
    * Rifle (semi-auto) (35k)       * Handgun CAP (19, 8k)     *
    * Mine Thrower (28k)            * Shotgun FP (6.0, 25k)    *
    * Scope (semi-auto rifle) (10k) * Shotgun RS (1.50, 15k)   *
    * Scope (Mine Thrower) (8k)     * Shotgun CAP (12, 12k)    *
    ********************************* Rifle FP (8.0, 20k)      *
    ********************************* Rifle RS (2.33, 18k)     *
    ********************************* Rifle CAP (12, 12k)      *
    ********************************* TMP FP (0.8, 18k)        *
    ********************************* Red9 FP (2.0, 20k)       *
    ********************************* Red9 CAP (12, 8k)        *
    ********************************* Blacktail FP (1.8, 15k)  *
    ********************************* Blacktail FS (0.40, 10k) *
    ********************************* Blacktail RS (1.47, 8k)  *
    ********************************* Blacktail CAP (18, 8k)   *
    ********************************* Butterfly FP (15.0, 25k) *
    ********************************* Butterfly CAP (8, 15k)   *
    ********************************* Semi-auto FP (8.0, 15k)  *
    ********************************* Semi-auto RS (1.90, 9k)  *
    ********************************* Semi-auto CAP (12, 10k)  *
    ********************************* Riot Gun FP (5.5, 20k    *
    ********************************* M.Thrower CAP (7, 25k)   *
    ************************************************************
    
    In the barrel by the stairs, there's a SPINEL.  By the trees, a pack of SHOTGUN
    SHELLS (10), and in the two boxes and a barrel, 2500 PSTAS and a SNAKE.  Behind
    the merchant shack, you can pick up 5000 PSTAS as well.  When you've finished
    up here, head up the stairs and go for the door.
    
    **EXTERIOR GATES**
    ENEMIES: Wait and see...
    
    This area up ahead is pretty dangerous, but take Ashley with you anyway as the
    consequences if you don't could be messy.
    
    Head around the corner and pick up some RIFLE SHOTS (5) from the box, then whip
    out that weapon and take out the two ILLUMINADOS pacing up ahead on the second
    level.  As you get to the top of the stairs, there will be a scene, and bad
    things will start happening...
    
    Pause for a second and wait for the blast, then run forward, hanging a left at
    the first opportunity.  Down there, in a small room with a canon, you'll find
    some goods in the form of a VELVET BLUE and an INCENDIARY GRENADE in the
    barrels.  Now run up and take a left under the small covered area.  In there,
    pull out the semi-auto again and aim up, sniping both the red and black
    ILLUMNIADOS.  Alternatively, you can jsut aim at the exploding barrel nearby
    and take 'em both out.  One down, three to go.  Head around the corner and up
    the stairs, but at the opening you should pull out the rifle and snipe the
    explosive on the other side.  Two down.  Third one's a little tricky; first get
    on to the stone bridge, turn around, and moonwalk until you see the exploding
    barrel, then snipe that.  The fourth one can wait, in the meantime, head for
    the little brick hut and kill the helmeted ILLUMINADO inside.  Headshots will
    be completely ineffective.  In the chest is a YELLOW HERB, and in the boxes are
    a VELVET BLUE and 2500 PSTAS.  Around the corner outside, you'll find a chest
    next to the shack with a GOLD BANGLE.  Now head for the upper bridge and, just
    before the stairs, peek through the hole and try to snipe the ILLUMINADO by the
    last catapult on your right.  Once that's done, run up, find the crank, and
    start turning that until the canon appears.  Fire it and you're done here.
    [If you're wondering why you can't leave Ashley behind for this, a stream of
    ILLUMINADOS will come pouring from the lower area once the catapults are
    triggered, and they stop once the cannon is fired.  Chances are, you heard them
    chanting at some point during your ascent.]
    
    Once the gates are blown up, you can head on through.  You can also head down
    to where the gazebo got blown up and find a SPINEL, if you want it.  There's
    a merchant waiting for you on the other side of the walls (?), but the only
    new thing he offers is an upgrade to the Riot Gun, and I generally avoid
    spending money on that anyway.  There's also a SPINEL in the torch near the
    door, if you blow that up.
    
    **************************************
    *************MERCHANT*****************
    * BUY (NEW) *     TUNE UP (NEW)      *
    *  (none)   * Riot Gun FP (6.0, 24k) *
    **************************************
    
    **SWORD ROOM**
    ENEMIES: NINE ILLUMINADOS (one red)
    
    This room can be a little tricky for those of you new to the game, and even
    some veterans.  Take Ashley with you, lest bad things happen.
    
    There's some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) ahead on the table, and 2000 PSTAS in a
    cabinet nearby.  Equip a good gun (your shotgun or handgun) and head up the
    stairs, and around the right corner as you reach the top.  Three ILLUMINADOS
    will be waiting for you up here, but you should only see one or two in front of
    you.  After a scene, another wave of three will come up the stairs, followed by
    two more as you hear the door slam again.  Kill them all, then start going down
    the stairs.  You'll see a red ILLUMINADO, but the poor fellow is so insane you
    can shoot him from the top of the stairs and he'll never attempt to chase you.
    He will take forever to kill though, and chances are he's got parasites on the
    brain (new type, can instant kill at close range), but when he does bite it,
    he drops 4500 PSTAS.
    
    On the table upstairs, if you haven't grabbed it already, is a box of PSTAS and
    inside the cabinet is a RED HERB.  One of the boxes on the other side has a
    SPINEL.  Go to the door here and take the GOLDEN SWORD, then go downstairs,
    take the PLATINUM SWORD there, replace it with the GOLDEN SWORD, and use the
    PLATINUM SWORD on the door upstairs.  This will open the way.
    
    **INTERIOR GATES**
    ENEMIES: NINE ILLUMINADOS (Guardhouse area)
             FIVE ILLUMINADOS (Storage area)
    
    This area can be a little tricky with Ashley around, so I recommend leaving her
    by the big doors to the right that you can't open yet.
    
    Go through the small door and you'll see an ILLUMINADO standing guard ahead.
    The guardhouse he's stanind by contains five other ILLUMINADOS so be prepared,
    and use the explosive barrel to the right for added devastation.  Inside the
    guardhouse, you can find a SPINEL in one of the barrels, 2500 PSTAS in a
    cabinet, and HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the table.  From the guardhouse, use your
    rifle to snipe the bow-weilding ILLUMINADO ahead.  Continue on, but watch out
    for the two shield ILLUMINADOS down the path, as they can kill you with some
    ease in this small area.
    
    In the storehouse, you'll find a GREEN HERB and a barrel with a VELVET BLUE.
    In the chest nearby is the CASTLE GATE KEY, which is your whole reason for
    being here.  Unfortunately, once you snatch that,  ILLUMINADOS start
    pouring in, so you may want to use that explosive barrel to your advantage.
    Use the key on the gates by Ashley when you're done.
    
    **ENTRANCE HALL**
    
    Head forward and you'll get a scene which will explain your surroundings (to a
    certain extent).  When it's over, head to the top of the stairs, turn around
    and shoot the object down from the wall behind you to get a GREEN GEM (yes,
    this means there's a mask later).  Smash the clay pots on either side of the
    stairs to find a VELVET BLUE and a random item.  Save by the blocking panel if
    you need to, then head through the door on this side.  The door on the other
    end of the hall is locked from the other side.
    
    **OBSERVATION ROOM**
    
    To the right along the enclave you can find HANDGUN BULLETS (15) and 5000 PSTAS
    behind the portrait.  Opposite the portrait, there's a pot with a random item
    and, if you aim between the columns, you should be able to see a green box
    which you can shoot down.  Turn right and grab the FILE at the end of the hall,
    then break the two barrels nearby, one of which has a YELLOW HERB.  Continue to
    the left towards the fire, then hang a right to grab the PRISON KEY from the
    painting.  Now go back to the entrance and take the turn leading to the large
    metal door.  Break the barrels here as well (an INCENDIARY GRENDADE is in one),
    then tell Ashley to wait.  Use your newfound PRISON KEY to open it up.
    
    **CASTLE PRISON**
    ENEMIES: I wonder...
    
    Head down the stairs, for starters.  When you reach the bottom, follow the wall
    around to the left where you can find a GREEN HERB.  You can also pick up the
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) you knocked down a few moments ago.  To the left, you'll
    notice the central cell and a switch inside, but the cell seems to be occupied.
    After the scene, knock it down and try to enter.  This will be your first
    encounter with a GARRADOR.  If you haven't figured it out already, the garrador
    is completely blind and follows you by sound, so avoid running unless you're
    headed around a corner and planning on slowing down after that.  Those claws
    are deadly, and will either knock a sizeable chunk off (swinging) or kill you
    outright (charging).  You may have noticed the bells on either side of the room
    by now, so shoot those to distract him.  He'll probably charge the wall and
    get his claws stuck in it, at which point you should pull out the rifle, zoom
    in on the parasite on his back (his only weakness) and fire until he goes down.
    Repeat thep rocess as many times as necessary, and he'll drop 15000 PSTAS.
    When the battle is over, pull the switch in the cell to stop the fire in the
    other room, then head on up to get Ashley again.
    
    **OBSERVATION ROOM**
    ENEMIES: SIX ILLUMINADOS
    
    When you get into the main part of the room and face down the hallway, an
    ILLUMINADO should run out, shout something, and leave again, which will trigger
    two more ILLUMINADOS to enter.  Kill them, possibly by dropping the oil lamp
    on them, and continue on.
    
    In the next part of the hall, where the fire was, you should encounter a
    dynamite ILLUMINADO followed by two crossbow ILLUMINADOS.  Careful timing can
    take out all three at once, but the dynamite one is your biggest concern.  The
    others you should be able to pick off without too much difficult.  In the room
    after that, you'll find the ILLUMINADO that signaled the others earlier, but
    most of the time he'll be mindlessly wandering around like the red leader from
    before.   Plug him, grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (20) on the table, and prepare
    yourself for a serious melee on the other side of the door.
    
    **GREAT HALL**
    ENEMIES:  SEVEN to NINE ILLUMINADOS (one red) (first wave)
              SIX ILLUMINADOS (second wave)
              TWO ILLUMINADOS (non-wave)
              TEN to TWELVE ILLUMINADOS (third wave)
              FIVE ILLUMINADOS (one red) (fourth wave (?))
              TWELVE ILLUMINADOS (final wave)
    
    This battle is a huge pain as the setup for it tends to be completely random.
    The first thing you'll want to look at is the upper balconies to the left and
    right of the center.  Are there crossbow ILLUMINADOS there?  If so, snipe them
    down immediately.  By this time, a couple of shield ILLUMINADOS are in front
    of you, so drop an explosive or use your shotgun to blow them apart.  There
    should be a mace ILLUMINADO on either side now (there were two initially, but
    one tends to run off), so knock one down and use the space to fend off the
    others.  There are two unarmed ILLUMINADOS now in the area, but the red leader
    should continue to look on.
    
    Once you've killed most from the first wave (or enough time passes), the second
    wave will start, and you'll be notified by one mace and one shield ILLUMINADO
    coming out each side of the hall.  The bad thing about this is that the
    remaining illuminados (three or so) have now taken notice, and since they'll
    catch up to you rather quickly, there's not right place to stand and fend them
    off.  But use the shotgun to break through shields and take out groups and you
    should be okay.  It's possible that not all of them will attack you right
    away, but picking off stragglers is easy.  Now you can raid the jars adjacent
    to the door (HANDGUN BULLETS (20) and VELVET BLUE), the 2000 PSTAS from the
    right side, and the four jars on either side of the center (INCENDIARY
    GRENADE).
    
    Further on, you'll find four staircases and two ILLUMINADOS at the bottom near
    the center, which can be sniped off rather easily.  The right one will probably
    notice you and start running before the left one will though.  At the bottom of
    these stairs, two more jars (HAND GRENADE in one).  Go through the door, grab
    the GREEN HERB on the table and the SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) from the chair, then
    position Ashley on one of the yellow panels (while telling her to wait) and
    stand on the other.  This triggers the third wave and makes the crank in the
    central area rise up.
    
    You might think it clever to leave Ashley in this area while you fend off
    the badies, but this is an exquisitely bad idea, and the game will punish you
    severely for it by spawning an ILLUMINADO in the room (probably with a shield)
    who will probably tear into Ashley as opposed to just grabbing her.  The best
    option you have is to get out of the room, run to the right past the yelling
    helmeted ILLUMINADO, and up the stairs past all the others until you can stake
    out a safe spot.  There will be about ten ILLUMINADOS you'll have to face in
    all, and about four of them will have shields.
    
    Upon clearing the room, start working on the crank.  Every once in a while (but
    not all the time), five scythe ILLUMINADOS, including a red, will come charging
    down when you finish, but this isn't too much of a threat.  Just make sure they
    don't throw them at you, either with a grenade or a shotgun.  When you're done
    with those, access the balconies on the sides to get a FIRST-AID SPRAY.  Ashley
    will signal the cranks as you move on, but break the jars near the water first
    for SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and RIFLE SHOTS (10), which you'll need shortly.
    
    Boost Ashley up to the upper level to start the final wave.  You'll want to
    pull out your rifle for this one, because ILLUMINADOS will be coming out of the
    walls above to grab Ashley.  Of course, that's not all you'll have to deal
    with; there's a smaller group that will appear and attack you at regular
    intervals, so don't hold that finger on the R button for too long.  Snipe the
    ones above, keep the ones below in check.  After finishing one crank, Ashley
    will run across and start the other.  Repeat the process, there will be about
    twelve ILLUMINADOS you'll have to deal with in all, with about two-thirds of
    them up top. When Ashley's done, meet up with her and grab her when she calls.
    Jump across the water pits and exit from this crazy place.  At least the red
    illuminados drop a huge chunk of change.
    
    **CASTLE CHAPEL**
    
    Safe area, for the time being.  Run between the two statues ahead, then turn
    around and shoot the SPINEL out of the eye of one.  In the chest on the right,
    you can get a HAND GRENADE, and to the left, HANDGUN BULLETS (20) and jars
    containing SHOTGUN SHELLS (15) and a GREEN HERB.  Do what you have to at the
    merchant shop and go to your first shooting range, if you so desire (or need
    the scratch), but the goal is the hallway, where a scene will occur.
    
    ***************************************
    **************MERCHANT*****************
    * BUY (NEW) *      TUNE UP (NEW)      *
    *  (none)   * Handgun FP (1.8, 18k)   *
    ************* Handgun CAP (22, 10k)   *
    ************* Rifle FP (10.0, 25k)    *
    ************* Rifle CAP (15, 18k)     *
    ************* TMP FP (1.0, 24k)       *
    ************* TMP RS (1.17, 15k)      *
    ************* Punisher FP (1.5, 20k)  *
    ************* Punisher FS (0.33, 20k) *
    ************* Punisher RS (0.83, 18k) *
    ************* Punisher CAP (20. 15k)  *
    ************* Red9 FP (2.4, 24k)      *
    ************* Red9 FS (0.40, 15k)     *
    ************* Red9 RS (1.67, 10k)     *
    ************* Red9 CAP (15, 12k)      *
    ************* Semi-auto FP (9.0, 18k) *
    ************* Semi-auto CAP (14, 12k) *
    ************* Riot Gun RS (2.43, 7k)  *
    ************* Riot Gun CAP (9, 10k)   *
    ***************************************
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 3-2: Mazes
    *******************************************************************************
    
    You're still in the same area as before, but you'll want to head out a door
    behind you to continue on.
    
    **SEWER ENTRANCE**
    ENEMIES: What he said...
    
    A couple of barrels will greet you on the right, containing HANDGUN BULLETS
    (20) and a FLASH GRENADE.  Hop down into the sewers and don't worry about what
    happens next.  At the end, make a quick u-turn into the hole to get a random
    item in a box.  When you get out of there, pull out the rifle and zoom to the
    right.  Notice a slight breathing in the corner, with something that looks like
    a mouth whipping around?  Fire on it, then grab whatever eye it leaves behind.
    Around the corner in the pit are two more of them, but you can repeat the
    process rather easily.  Around the pit, you can find HANDGUN BULLETS (15), a
    VELVET BLUE, and (useless) TMP AMMO (50).  Climb up the ladder and go through
    the door when you're done.
    
    **SEWER PRISON**
    ENEMIES: THREE NOVISTADORS (first wave)
              NOVISTADORS (second wave)
    
    Head into the open area, but that big pipe is just as bad as you might think,
    and a NOVISTADOR will drop down.  Another will come from the left.  Deal with
    them, then start examining the cells.  Upper right has HANDGUN BULLETS (20) and
    a YELLOW HERB, upper left has an INCENDIARY GRENADE (and a NOVISTADOR that will
    drop behind you), and lower left has SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and a FILE.  Head
    around the other part of this area (water keeps you from going on), killing the
    third one if it's around, and continue on until you reach a small room beyond
    some broken cells.  Open the chest for a BUTTERFLY LAMP (used for combining
    with the eyes), and two boxes, one of them containing a GREEN HERB and the
    other, SHOTGUN SHELLS (15).  Turn the handle to drain the water and trigger
    the second wave.
    
    When you exit, stay put in the doorway and pull out the rifle, sniping up into
    the hole in the corner.  Shoot the NOVISTADOR down, then keep your sight on
    that same spot and shoot the second NOVISTADOR when it spawns.  Continue on
    to the main prison and a NOVISTADOR will bust out of the lower right cell,
    while another drops from the hole in the center.  Kill them both and continue
    to the recently drained area, where the last NOVISTADOR will drop down and try
    to get you from behind.  Use the shotgun to tell him you'll be having none of
    that, then grab the VELVET BLUE from the corner.  Break the barrels up top (if
    you feel like it), then head through the door.
    
    **AXE ROOM**
    
    A bit excessive, isn't it?  The axes travel in a set path that coincides with
    the black lines below.  Use those to gauge when and where it would be a good
    idea to run.  At the end there's another VELVET BLUE to the right, and a door.
    
    **SEWER EXIT**
    
    Two barrels up top here, and one of them has a SPINEL.  Head out.
    
    **CASTLE CHAPEL**
    ENEMIES: ELEVEN ILUMINADOS (one red)
    
    Hope you have a grenade handy.  Go to the right and toss one down into the
    crowd (or pick the ricochet of your choice), but try to take them all out.
    Jump down and pick off the stragglers if you missed.  The red leader will
    probably have survived, but pick him off you want a valuable ILLUMINADOS
    PENDANT.  The rest drop off SPINELs, which isn't bad, but the pendant is much
    better.  If you kill them all, the entrance to the sewers won't be blocked off,
    which is kind of funny, but there's not much point in going back through there
    anyway.
    
    Once you've cleaned out this area (and increased your net worth a bit), you'll
    want to climb back up the ladder and walk to the balcony that overlooks a
    chandelier.  Use it to cross the gap, and break the pots (VELVET BLUE) on the
    other side.  Now go to the second balcony and repeat the process.  There's a
    chest with an ELEGANT MASK on the other side, and a switch you can flip to
    unlock the next area.  There's nothing new with the merchant, so head through
    the red door.
    
    **GALLERY**
    ENEMIES: EIGHT to NINE ILLUMINADOS (one red) (first section)
             FOURTEEN to SEVENTEEN ILLUMINADOS (second section)
             
    
    A rather large area, so be prepared.  Ahead of you is a RED HERB, so grab that
    before you head on up the stairs.  In the upper room, there's a FILE and more
    HANDGUN BULLETS (20).  You may be hearing some muttering by this point, which
    should be a sign to you.  Bust through the door, rifle equipped, and begin
    pciking off the two crossbow ILLUMINADOS on the upper level.  The red
    ILLUMINADO will run off, so you can't snipe him right away (or rather, it's
    difficult to pull off).  Two more ILLUMINADOS will be attacking you from the
    ground, but there's an explosive barrel to the left that can be used to your
    advantage.  When you've killed these four, run around breaking things and
    acquire a VELVET BLUE and a GREEN HERB, among other goodies.
    
    Now it's time to head through the second door.  Break the barrels for random
    items, then snipe up the stairs to tag the ILLUMINADO waiting up there.  He has
    a helmet, so be aware of that.  On the upper level (beyond the door), you'll
    have a better view of the two helmeted ILLUMINADOS guarding the door.  Kill
    them, then prepare yourself for a little exercise.  The red ILLUMINADO will
    begin running towards the gallery entrance.  In his alcove, you can pick up
    more SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and four sets of 1000 PSTAS, but you really should
    kill him as soon as you can.  If you have to follow him back, you'll encounter
    a shield and mace ILLUMINADO, and if the red guy gets too far along... well,
    there's a minigun in the main area, and that could pose a problem (aiming at
    him requires running around, which can be a pain).  Either way, you're going to
    come out of it with the GALLERY KEY in your hot little hand.  Make your way
    back to the door at the end and open it with the key.
    
    You can shoot a VELVET BLUE out of the deer's eye here, and there are breakable
    pots (one containing SHOTGUN SHELLS (10)), but the goal here is the puzzle at
    the panel.
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [GALLERY PUZZLE]                                    +
    +                                                     +
    + On examination, the panel will inform you that "the +
    + sacrifice of six lives shall make way the true      +
    + path", which is crazy person speak for "make sure   +
    + the portraits show six bodies.                      +
    +                                                     +
    + Numbering the portraits from left to right, there   +
    + is one in 1, three in 2, and two each in 3 and 4.   +
    + Of course, by selecting one portrait to flip, you   +
    + also flip the adjacent portraits, so 1 flips 1 and  +
    + 2, 2 flips 1, 2, and 3, and so on.  Each portrait   +
    + has a different image on the opposite side as well, +
    + and there will be two sacrifices on the 1 and 2     +
    + reverse, one on the 3 reverse, and three on the 4   +
    + reverse.                                            +
    +                                                     +
    + To line them up properly, flip 4, 3, 1, and 2 to    +
    + get the six (which is the smallest number possible) +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    Solving it will reveal a door that will lead you deeper into the gallery...
    
    Oh beans, you're surrounded again.  Well, there's four ILLUMINADOS in front of
    you and you want to be where they are (there's some rocket launcher nonsense
    going on if you don't move).  Two more ILLUMINADOS will be coming from the side
    staircases, and if that's not bad enough, four crossbow ILLUMINADOS will be
    joining them with the scene (which only shows two, but you get the idea).  Two
    more will join once you start killing them all.  Use the oil lamps to your
    advantage if you're able to, the crossbows tend to run around a lot.  Of
    course, once you've cleared the area, you can grab SPINEL off the chair, a
    YELLOW HERB in the side stairwell, and a GREEN HERB on the opposite side from
    the spinel.  There's also some HANDGUN BULLETS (20) in front of the danger
    portrait, so grab those and hit the red switch near the white door to your
    right.  Now run for it, again to the right, by where you found the greenie.
    There's still ammo left in those things.  Head inside the small room, break the
    pot, and flip the switch inside.  Now once you open the door, there will be
    the two rocket launcher ILLUMINADOS waiting for you, so back up immediately and
    let them catch the door.  Without their toys, though, they're almost harmless,
    so pick them off at will.  I've only seen this happen on rare occasions, but
    sometimes, at this point, three helmet and scythe ILLUMINADOS will bust up the
    stairs, hungry for blood.  If you hear any odd laughs, that would probably
    be them, so be aware of that.  When you've cleared the area, open the chest to
    get a GOAT ORNAMENT.  The white door will unlock and you'll be free to go.  
    
    **GARDEN BALCONY**
    ENEMIES: VARIOUS CROWS
    
    There's a typewriter just sitting there waiting for you, if you want it.  Down
    the hall, there are two doors and a table with a pot.  The pot has HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10), so you might want to grab those.  Now, the red door is locked
    (for the time being), so you'll want to be taking the blue door on the left.
    Eight CROWS will fly through the windows whiel you're here, but that's nothing
    to be concerned about as they're harmless in this game (and these are also
    worthless to kill).  Shoot the SPINEL from the top of the door and go through.
    Ahead is a fountain, and three more CROWS crowded around it.  Toss a flash
    grenade into their midst to kill all of them, and possibly any other CROWS
    drifting around up above.  Examine the fountain and continue examining it until
    you have two VELVET BLUEs, a SPINEL, and a chunk of PSTAS, worth about 2400.
    Further along is a bunch of barrels blocking your way to the door, so break
    them all and pick up the INCENDIARY GRENADE one of them drops.
    
    **MAZE**
    ENEMIES: ELEVEN COLMILLOS
    
    As you continue along the balcony you'll find a door with an indentations.
    This is important, this means something.  You can't do anything with it now,
    so continue along until the scene and your formal introduction to the maze.
    
    The implication here is that you'll never be able to make it through this
    place, but Leon's apparently equipped with a sort of GPS because you can just
    press Z and pull up a map of the whole thing, and the two items you need are
    marked by the large octagon indentations.  I don't think that this is
    particularly, but I have enclosed a jewel that will help protect you...
    
    
               ----------------------------------------------------
              |   =                           |  3|                \
              |   |      -------      -----   |   |    -----        |
              |---|     |       |    |     |      |   |             |
              |4        |       |    |  10  ------    |     11      |
              |   ------    |   |    |                |     /\      |
              |             |   |    |            VVVV|    /  \     |
              |   ----------|    -==- ----------- VVVV|    \  /     |
              |            5|   |                |VVVV|     \/      |
              |-------------|   |                |VVVV|             |
              |   ----------|   |   ********     |VVVV|-------------|
              |   >>>>>>>>>************/\***      ****      =       |
              |   >>>>>>>>>***********|7 |**      ****      =       |
              |   >>>>>>>>>************\/***      ****  1   =       |
              |   ----------  |    2********     |^^^^ -------      |
              |               |                  |^^^^|       |     |
              |               |                  |^^^^|       |     |
              |           ----|    ----------    |^^^^|   |   |     |
               ---    |       |   |              |    |   |   |     |
              | 8 |   |       |   |              |    |   |   |     |
              |   |    ---    |    -==-------    |    |   |   |     |
              |   |       |   |   |          |   |    |   |   |     |
              |   |       |   |   |          |   |    | 9 |   |     |
              |   |       | 6 |   |           ---      ---    |     |
              |    ----    ---    |                           |     |
              |                                               |     |
              |                             ------------------   X  |
               ----------------------    =-|
                                     |  |  |
                                      -- -- 
    
    In case you haven't guessed already, most lines are walls, = are gates, the X
    is the start/finish point, ^, V, > all indicate stairs, and * is high ground.
    Not pretty or to scale, but it'll do for our purposes.  Basically, this is the
    plan to get from X to 11 and back, collecting what items you feel like getting
    along the way, though 7 (MOONSTONE (RIGHT HALF)) and 10 (MOONSTONE (LEFT HALF))
    are the most crucial.  Otherwise, you can take your pick of the VELVET BLUE (1)
    GREEN HERB (2), SPINEL (3), HANDGUN BULLETS (10) (4), FIRST-AID SPRAY (5), RED
    GEM (6), YELLOW HERB (8), SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) (9), and TMP AMMO (50) (10).
    
    The downside to this is that the whole place is filled to the brim with
    COLMILLOS.  Just inside the gates, break the barrels to the left to get a
    VELVET BLUE, then get the shotgun out and prepare to do battle.  A COLMILLO
    will run out from the left side of the high ground, so kill it and continue on
    to grab the GREEN HERB from the barrel.  Bust the gate down and continue on,
    proceeding to point 3 if you want the SPINEL.  You should've already heard the
    COLMILLO inside the gate near point 4, so pull out the rifle and snipe it.
    Head around the corner for your HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and FIRST-AID SPRAY.  Now
    go under the high ground, where another COLMILLO will ambush you.  Continue to
    point 6 for the RED GEM to accompany the mask from earlier, then climb the
    stairs to pick up the MOONSTONE (RIGHT HALF) from the fountain.  Head around to
    point 8 for the YELLOW HERB.  Here's where things get a little tricky.  On your
    way to 9, there's a small indent in the lower half and a gate in there.  This
    is another cage, except there are the three COLMILLOS in it this time.  The
    best route here is to toss a grenade, but I HIGHLY RECOMMEND having an
    incendiary grenade handy for use after point 11, and you should have that
    already.  If you have the grenade for the cage, use it, if not, get all rambo
    with the shotgun.  Point 9 has SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) anyway, albeit with two
    COLMILLOS waiting to ambush you after you collect.  Cross the upper platform,
    get the TMP AMMO (50) at point 10 if you absolutely have to, then grab the
    MOONSTONE (LEFT HALF) at 11.  If you think the puppies are done with you, well,
    they aren't, so as soon as you round the corner, you'll want to throw the
    incendiary grenade near the stairs.  There are three more COLMILLOS here, but
    this should thin their ranks considerably.  Now get back to the high ground on
    the stairs, hop off, and exit through the gate.
    
    When you get to the door, combine the halves to get a BLUE MOONSTONE for use
    on the door.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 3-3: Deeper Into The Castle
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **BEDROOM**
    
    Back at the entrance is an INCENDIARY GRENADE in the pot.  Near the chairs, a
    box of HANDGUN BULLETS (20) waits, and further along, you can shoot a SPINEL
    down from the top of the inside of the bedm then collect another SPINEL from
    the pot nearby.  There's a FILE by the merchant in the other room and another
    pot to smash, but the big thing to get here is the MIRROR W/ PEARLS & RUBIES
    from the armoire.  Do what you will with the merchant here, then go to the
    other door near the entrance, saving at the typewriter if you want to.
    
    ****************************************
    **************MERCHANT******************
    * BUY (NEW) *      TUNE UP (NEW)       *
    *  (none)   * Blacktail FP (2.0, 18k)  *
    ************* Blacktail CAP (21, 10k)  *
    ************* Butterfly FP (17.0, 30k) *
    ************* Butterfly RS (3.00, 15k) *
    ************* Riot Gun FP (6.5, 28k)   *
    ************* Riot Gun CAP (11, 12k)   *
    ************* M.Thrower FP (4.0, 25k)  *
    ****************************************
    
    **DINING HALL**
    ENEMIES: Not just yet...
    
    Ahead is a pot with SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) inside.  On the table to the left, a
    GREEN HERB and HANDGUN BULLETS (20) on the table beyond that.  If you haven't
    noticed them already, there are a bunch of stone tablets with random sayings
    on the walls, but the most important one is the one next to the door, which
    gives you a hint about breaking bottles.  Of course, you might want to run down
    the other end of the hall first, break more stuff, and collect some random
    item.  Just don't go through that door yet.  Back in the main part of the room,
    there's a bell near the door which you should aim.  Home in on the bottle and
    fire to open the door.
    
    Before you go opening that treasure chest, you might want to snatch the FLASH
    GRENADE from the cabinet to the left.  Now head towards the middle of the room
    (there's no avoiding it) and badness will occur.  A GARRADOR and a pack of
    ILLUMINADOS (FOUR?) will jump down into the cage you're now trapped in.
    Well, grab the prize in the box (HOURGLASS W/ GOLD DECOR) then work on getting
    out, via attacking whatever locked door isn't by the garrador, but probably
    after clearing the area slightly.  The pain of this is that ILLUMINADOS will
    continue to drop down, almost indefinitely, and most of them have weapons that
    will attack you through the cage.  Let me emphasize again, it is CRUCIAL that
    you get out of there ASAP.  Once you do, it is your responsibility to be where
    the GARRADOR isn't.  If that means running back into the cage at some point
    because he's tearing around outside, do it.  First clear the area of most or
    all of the ILLUMINADOs, then go after him.  Like before, he'll drop 15000 PSTAS
    when he dies.  ILLUMINADOS, possibly with the type-three parasite heads, will
    continue dropping, so you'll want to finish up pretty quickly.  Get behind the
    bell to get the MAGNUM ROUNDS (3), then head for the door niside this area to
    exit.
    
    **BLUE HALL**
    ENEMIES: ELEVEN ILLUMINADOS (two red)
    
    This is an area where it's rather beneficial to have an excess in rifle shots.
    The door on the opposite end is your goal, but you can't get to it without
    raising the platform, and aside from that, you have to deal with one
    ILLUMINADO on the opposite end, three ILLUMINADOS on the floor (two red), and
    more later.  Bust the pot to the left of the opening for RIFLE SHOTS (5), then
    begin sniping the targets on the lower level.  Jump down there once you've
    sniped all four targets.  There might be a shield ILLUMINADO behind the gate
    down here, and it would be wise to bust him up while it's especially convenient
    to do so.
    
    Now flip the switch and climb back up.  This triggers a new wave of ILLUMINADOS
    to enter through the door you used, but there are only two of them.  The bad
    news is, three more shield ILLUMINADOS come from behind you, so get a grenade
    ready or something.  Alternatively, you could also fire at the oil lamp on the
    other side and get the job done that way.  Cross the platform, but be warned
    that a crossbow ILLUMINADO is hanging around a window on the other side once
    you make it around the corner.  Snipe him and grab the 1800 PSTAS from the
    table below.  Now, you have a choice.  If you have a 2 X 8 spot left in your
    inventory, by all means, jump down, but if not, hold off and scroll down.
    Below, there's a pot on the right with a VELVET BLUE, and a mace ILLUMINADO who
    might take a sudden interest in you, but the goal is the centerpiece, which
    contains a ROCKET LAUNCHER.  Flanking it are RIFLE SHOTS (5), SHOTGUN SHELLS
    (5), a FLASH GRENADE, HANDGUN BULLETS (10), and an INCENDIARY GRENADE, but
    you should be able to figure out which one you'll need in the not-so-distant
    future.  But first, I must give a disclaimer...
    
    DO NOT USE THE ROCKET LAUNCHER UNTIL I TELL YOU TO.  DOING SO WOULD BE A WASTE
    REGARDLESS OF THE CIRCUMSTANCES.  I AM NOT EVEN KIDDING.
    
    That said, climb up the stairs, break the lock and exit through the door, go to
    the opposite end and through that door, break the pots in this area (SPINEL),
    and talk to the merchant.  If you want/need it (and surely you do), buy the new
    ATTACHE CASE XL.  Save if you have to after that, and head through the door for
    a scene and the end of the section.
    
    *****************************************
    ***************MERCHANT******************
    *       BUY (NEW)       * TUNE UP (NEW) *
    * Attache Case XL (73k) *    (none)     *
    *****************************************
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 3-4: Ashley's Big Adventure
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **INTEROGATION ROOM**
    ENEMIES: Sure...
    
    Heading around the room clockwise (and ignoring the platform and doors), you
    can pick up HANDGUN BULLETS (20), RIFLE SHOTS (5), a FLASH GRENADE, more RIFLE
    SHOTS (5), 5000 PSTAS (portrait), and a SPINEL.  Now, you're free to pull the
    rifle out and snipe the bars off Ashley.
    
    Unfortunately, she's not alone.  Three ILLUMINADOS will come in, and once
    you've killed them, seven more ILLUMINADOS (two crossbows and one red in the
    mix) will join them.  Makes you glad you picked up all those shots, doesn't it?
    (Though I've done it with just a handgun, I don't recommend it).
    
    **ASHELY'S HALL**
    ENEMIES: TWO ILLUMINADOS
    
    Now you're playing solo as Ashley.  Her abilities are limited to a few actions,
    picking up items, dodging, and throwing the occastional lantern.  While this
    side trip isn't particularly pleasant, it isn't impossible either.
    
    Take a turn to the left to grab a SPINEL near the dresser and a YELLOW HERB
    in the little enclave.  Save at the typewriter if you have to.  Further along,
    you'll see your first ILLUMINADO.  There are three lanterns in this area, two
    on the near side, and one near the crank in the corner.  There's also a GREEN
    HERB on the table.  While there is a passage you can crawl under on the near
    side, the crank is a decent method as well.  I don't recommend using the
    lanterns just yet, as there are two enemies, both of whom take three lanterns
    to kill, and six lanterns total.
    
    Start off with the crank.  If the ILLUMINADO gets too close, crawl underneath
    the table, wait for him to chase, then repeat.  When the gate is lifted, run
    through, alert the other ILLUMINADO, then crawl under the table in the corner
    to get a prime spot to throw a nearby lantern.  There are two more lanterns
    here, one near the two other cranks and one on the opposite side.  You don't
    have to do it, you can even keep running and cranking just enough to get
    through the openings, but I prefer to kill both the ILLUMINADOS and take my
    time with the rest.  You'll have to come back through this area anyway.
    One method is to use the lever and trap them in the first area.  Anyway, when
    you're done, use both cranks until you can get through.
    
    Don't take the door on the left just yet, as it isn't worth it to do so.  Grab
    the RED HERB on the right-hand dresser instead, and continue down that hall.
    
    **DUSTY ROOM**
    ENEMIES: Yes...
    
    This is less A room, and more a series of rooms, but for the purposes of the
    guide, I'll list it as a single location as its all connected.
    
    Turn left as you enter and crawl underneath the table, pushing the button on
    the wall.  Examine the fireplace to get the STONE TABLET, then press the switch
    on the left side to open another gate.  Walk through the new opening, pick up
    the GREEN HERB on the table, then push the bookshelf out of the way to reveal
    the third and final switch.  Go through the new opening and pick up the 1800
    PSTAS from the cabinet and the VELVET BLUE from the table, then head through
    the door.
    
    This area's a great deal darker than the last, so be aware of where you're
    going.  There's a SPINEL ahead on the chair.  The path will eventually lead
    down to a panel, which you should examine...
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [SLIDING PUZZLE]                                    +
    +                                                     +
    + Chances are, you've probably seen one of these      +
    + before; the classic sliding puzzle that forms an    +
    + image upon completion.  The difference is that you  +
    + probably aren't familiar with the Salazar insignia  +
    + that it eventually forms.                           +
    +                                                     +
    + To solve the puzzle, flip the pieces in the order   +
    + given: right, top right, top middle, middle, left,  +
    + bottom left, bottom middle, bottom right, right,    +
    + middle, top middle, top left, left, bottom left,    +
    + bottom middle, middle, right, bottom right.         +
    +                                                     +
    + There's still one piece missing, so add the STONE   +
    + TABLET to complete the puzzle                       +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    In the opened room, there's a GOLD BANGLE in the chest opposite the door, and
    a SPINEL in the cabinet on the right side.  Examine the statue here to get the
    SALAZAR FAMILY INSIGNIA, and grab the SERPENT ORNAMENT after the statue
    rotates.
    
    Unfortunately, the ARMADURAS in the other room (four of them) are awake now,
    and will follow you into the room, but they aren't particularly fast, so you
    can run through them with little trouble.  More dangerous are the
    three ARMADURAS in the hall, which you have to dodge in the traditional
    buttonmash method.  You should be able to find your way out of here though.
    
    **ASHLEY'S HALL**
    
    Open the blue door across from you.  In the drawer nearby is another VELVET
    BLUE, and there's a SPINEL on the desk near the end.  The lower area has a FILE
    and a drawer with HANDGUN BULLETS (15).  Use the SALAZAR FAMILY INSIGNIA on the
    round object in the center, then turn the handle so the ladder appears (the
    only ladder in the game, I might add, that you can climb down).  To the right
    is 3300 PSTAS (total), but further along you can find the all-important,
    chapter ending door.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 4-1: Castle Gates, Revisited
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **INTEROGATION ROOM**
    
    I'm sure that you're eager to find out what's behind the mystery door you've
    been neglecting ever since you entered the room, but now is not the time for
    that.  Now is the time to go hunt down a magnum.
    
    Go through the door you used to enter this place.
    
    **BLUE HALL**
    
    Nothing new with the merchant.  Save here if you want to, but there's nothing
    left to do here.
    
    **DINING HALL**
    ENEMIES: SEVEN ILLUMINADOS
    
    Four helmet ILLUMINADOS will be in and around the cage area, and three of them
    have scythes.  Due to the risk of a ranged attack, you should probably use
    something more powerful than the pistol if you have it available.  At the end
    of the actual hall, there's two more helmet ILLUMINADOs, which you can kill,
    but your goal is to the left, where the last helmet and scythe ILLUMINADO is
    waiting.  Kill him and continue to the door you haven't used yet.
    
    **WESTERN STORAGE**
    ENEMIES: TWO NOVISTADORS, ONE SNAKE
    
    DON'T.  MOVE.  Pull out the rifle and zoom above where you're facing and shoot
    down the first NOVISTADOR.  Now follow the wall to the corner, turn right, and
    across from you, there shoudl be the second NOVISTADOR hanging from the
    ceiling.  Plug that one and you're safe.
    
    Now it's time to collect the goodies.  Back near the entrance, there's a
    cabinet with 5000 PSTAS.  Next to it, a pot with a random item, and two boxes,
    one with SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), beyond that.  Take the GREEN HERB from the table
    and continue to where the second NOVISTADOR was.  There's a random item in the
    box, but the pot on the right here has a SNAKE, so be prepared to double slash.
    One of the barrels near the door has a SPINEL for the taking.  Slash the lock
    off when you're done, and exit into...
    
    **GARDEN BALCONY**
    
    How about that?  Follow the path to the right until you get to the door by the
    fountain.  Examine the door, then piggyback Ashley into the room, where she'll
    unlock the door.  Don't forget to have her rejoin you.  Inside this room are
    a bunch of chests.  Clockwise from the left, you can find 5000 PSTAS, a RED
    HERB, the BROKEN BUTTERFLY (score!), and the ELEGANT PERFUME BOTTLE.  Now exit,
    taking whatever route you see fit until you're back in the...
    
    **INTEROGATION ROOM**
    
    Take the door in the north here.
    
    **EAST TERMINUS**
    
    There's a typewriter ahead and to the left, if you want it.  To the right are
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10), and the jars around the typerwriter will yield a VELVET
    BLUE.  To the left here is one the transport carts, but don't use it just yet.
    We're on a quest here, to find out what's on the other side of that lava pit.
    Don't worry though, you'll leave Ashley behind for this.  This next part will
    require some quick thinking and a steady shot with a rifle...
    
    **DRAGON ROOM**
    ENEMIES: ~>SEVEN ILLUMINADOS (probably more) (three dragon riders)
    
    This isn't too difficult, just know you have to move fast.  As you approach the
    first set a of stairs, there will be a scene that triggers two ILLUMINADOS
    running out to man the dragons.  Immediately shoot down the ILLUMINADO in front
    of you, which will drop his dragon, then run back to the door and snipe the
    second ILLUMINADO as quickly as possible.  If you've done this properly, two
    chests are your reward, the first containing 5000 PSTAS and the second
    containing an ILLUMINADOS PENDANT.
    
    Go down the stairs for the first chest, then up the next set to reach a cage
    mechanism.  Just wait for the action button to change.  Don't worry; the cage
    can't knock you down.  Make your way to the other side and you'll find two
    ILLUMINADOS waiting.  Switch guns and take them out, then access the second
    chest.  
    
    Here's where things get a little tricky.  Up ahead there are two stone panels
    on either side of a small opening.  This is where the third dragon-riding
    ILLUMINADO comes in, and if you haven't gathered as much already, he'll be
    breathing fire down your back for the duration.  To make matters worse, a
    steady stream of ILLUMINADOS will pour out from around the second chest.  The
    goal here is clearly to slay the dragon, but the fire makes it difficult.  Hide
    behind one of the panels, fending off the wave of ILLUMINADOS while the stream
    of fire is blocked.  Get pretty much right on the far edge of either one of
    them.  When the time is right (i.e., when you won't be interupted by the
    flunkies), run to the opposite side and to the unprotected corner, pull out a
    shotgun, and fire at the dragon rider until he dies.  Repeat as necessary.
    While this may sound complex, it isn't rocket surgery and can be accomplished
    in a VERY short amount of time.
    
    Run up the new staircase to get the LION ORNAMENT from the chest, then descend
    and pick off the stragglers.  Make your way back to the door.
    
    **EAST TERMINUS**
    
    Grab Ashley and head for the cart.
    
    **WEST TERMINUS**
    
    Break the pots you see for SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and a SPINEL.  Exit through the
    door to find yourself back in...
    
    **ENTRANCE HALL**
    
    Head for the central panel and use all your ornament items on it to reveal the
    chimera and your ticket out of this part of the castle.
    
    You may be all gung-ho about running for the door dead ahead, but hang a right
    first and you can go back up to where Salazar first greeted you.  Behind the
    Saddler portrait is 5000 PSTAS, as usual, and the pot will yield a valuable
    HAND GRENADE.  Now, go through the door.
    
    **SOUTH TERMINUS**
    
    Nothing to do here except admire the scenery, then get on the cart.
    
    **NORTH TERMINUS**
    
    The more interesting stop.  The pot close to you has HANDGUN BULLETS (20), the
    one on the other side, a VELVET BLUE, and the portrait (which you wouldn't
    otherwise think to check) has 5000 PSTAS.  Neat, huh?
    
    **PORTRAIT HALL**
    
    First, and probably most importantly, you'll want to take the door on your
    immediate right and find a merchant room, where there's a typewriter, a pot
    with a random item, a cabinet with a box of HANDGUN BULLETS (20), and a door
    to the latest incarnation of the shooting range.  You're also free to snag a
    few new upgrades for your arsenal.
    
    ****************************************
    ***************MERCHANT*****************
    * BUY (NEW) *      TUNE UP (NEW)       *
    *  (none)   * Shotgun FP (7.0, 30k)    *
    ************* Shotgun CAP (15, 15k)    *
    ************* TMP FP (1.2, 35k)        *
    ************* TMP CAP (150, 20k)       *
    ************* Semi-auto FP (11.0, 24k) *
    ************* Semi-auto RS (1.33, 18k) *
    ************* Semi-auto CAP (17, 15k)  *
    ****************************************
    
    Right now, you have two choices.  There are two items required to open up the
    path leading onward, but you'll have to endure two trials in order to get them.
    Typically, I go right first, and if you go right, you'll need two flashbangs.
    If you only have one, you can pick up another FLASH GRENADE on the chair
    opposite the main door.
    
    For the sake of continuing the guide, let's say you've met these
    qualifications.  Head to the right, open the cabinet for SPINEL, grab the
    YELLOW HERB and FILE off the table, and head through the door.
    
    **KNIGHT'S HALL**
    ENEMIES: Wait...
    
    Leave Ashley here, as there's no sense in dragging her into trouble.  Bust out
    the shotgun, as you'll need it shortly.  There are HANDGUN BULLETS (20) ahead
    on the lion statue, so grab those and continue down the hall, where you'll
    have to dodge twice.
    
    Depending on your inventory, you may want to grab the SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and
    the GREEN HERB before opening the chest and getting the KING'S GRAIL.  Once you
    do, three lower-grade ARMADURAS will come out of the walls.  Aim for their
    heads with the shotgun, and when you knock the helmet off all three (revealing
    the parasite), toss a flash grenade.  They'll drop a GREEN HERB, HANDGUN
    BULLETS (20) and SHOTGUN SHELLS (15).  Three more ARMADURAS will now join the
    fight, but these ones are considerably more difficult, and you may want to use
    a magnum on them.  Repeat the process once the helmets are knocked off, then
    pick up the 19500 PSTAS they leave behind.  Now rejoin Ashley and leave this
    crazy place.  Oh, and don't reload the butterfly, you'll just be upgrading the
    capacity again soon.
    
    **PORTRAIT HALL**
    
    Run across to the door at the opposite end.
    
    **NORTHERN STORAGE**
    ENEMIES: Yeah, sort of...
    
    This isn't really a puzzle, it's just another form of what you did in the melee
    in the hall.  Push two of the statues onto switches (any switch), put Ashley on
    another, and stand on the final one yourself.
    
    In the next room, there will be a scene and you'll have to shoot at four
    switches in the ceiling, preferably with the shotgun so accuracy isn't an issue
    (technically, you can shoot them all out before entering, but I'm not supposed
    to tell you that.  It takes away from the horror).  Grab the HANDGUN BULLETS
    (10) in the corner (clever little devils...) and go to the hall.
    
    At the end of the passage, the gate will slam down, trapping Ashley, so pull
    out your rifle and snipe the two ILLUMINADOS at the mechanism.  This will allow
    her to get through.  There are more HANDGUN BULLETS (10) nearby (devils again!)
    and a bunch of boxes containing a SPINEL, a VELVET BLUE, and RIFLE SHOTS (5).
    In the cabinet nearby, there's also an ELEGANT CHESSBOARD.  Open the chest to
    get the QUEEN'S GRAIL, then head through the locked door and out to...
    
    **PORTRAIT HALL**
    ENEMIES: SIX ILLUMINADOS,
    
    There's the FLASH GRENADE here to the left, if you haven't taken it already.
    Further down the hall are six ILLUMINADOS, four scythes (two with helmets), and
    two shield and maces.  Destroy them to continue on, but before you go solving
    any puzzles, you might want to check out the statues.  Shooting down the
    objects, you can collect two SPINELS, a PURPLE GEM, and a VELVET BLUE.  The gem
    should complete your mask from earlier.  Place the QUEEN'S GRAIL on her side of
    the door and the KING'S GRAIL on the other side (not like you can do otherwise)
    and head through the door.
    
    **BALLROOM**
    ENEMIES: You bet...
    
    Well, we're not quite to the dance yet, but we'll get there.  Break the pots
    on the left to get HANDGUN BULLETS (20), and on the right for a SNAKE and a 
    VELVET BLUE (double slash).  The cabinet further along has a box of 1800 PSTAS,
    and the one after that has 2800 PSTAS.  The jar at the end has SHOTGUN SHELLS
    (15).
    
    Don't go through the door yet.  Instead, hop out near the door onto a balcony,
    where there's a RED HERB and a ladder.  Up the ladder is a chest with another
    BUTTERFLY LAMP, which can only mean one thing.  Head for the nearby window and
    begin shooting at the hive with whatever weapon you deem fit.  It doesn't take
    a whole lot to drop the thing, but it is in your interests to do so.  Now hop
    down or head for the door.  Either way, trouble awaits in the center of the
    room.
    
    A pack of NOVISTADORS will attack you now.  You may feel more comfortable
    running to a corner and fending them off, or you may want to stand them down,
    but you don't have to worry about falling off or anything.  Once you've killed
    all of them, there are four GREEN EYES, three RED EYES, and one BLUE EYE lying
    where you shot down the nest, enough to complete the lamp and then some (but if
    you still have an unfinished lamp lying around, don't worry, there will be more
    later).  Make your way around to the far side and pull the lever to lower the
    bridge.  Problem is, it stops midway, and you have to shoot them down from
    there, but that's less than challenging.
    
    **PATH TO CLOCK TOWER**
    ENEMIES: Absolutely...
    
    On this side you can find HANDGUN BULLETS (10), a typewriter, and our good
    friend the merchant, with more tune-ups for your guns.
    
    ****************************************
    ***************MERCHANT*****************
    * BUY (NEW) *      TUNE UP (NEW)       *
    *  (none)   * Handgun FP (2.0, 20k)    *
    ************* Handgun CAP (25, 12k)    *
    ************* Rifle FP (12.0, 35k)     *
    ************* Rifle CAP (18, 25k)      *
    ************* Punisher FP (1.7, 25k)   *
    ************* Punisher CAP (24, 18k)   *
    ************* Red9 FP (2.8, 28k)       *
    ************* Red9 CAP (18, 16k)       *
    ************* Blacktail FP (2.3, 24k)  *
    ************* Blacktail FS (0.27, 20k) *
    ************* Blacktail RS (0.83, 15k) *
    ************* Blacktail CAP (25, 15k)  *
    ************* Butterfly FP (20.0, 35k) *
    ************* Butterfly CAP (10, 20k)  *
    ************* Riot Gun FP (7.0, 32k)   *
    ************* Riot Gun CAP (13, 15k)   *
    ************* M.Thrower RS (2.57, 18k) *
    ****************************************
    
    Further along, the hallway ends in a door that opens out to face the clock
    tower.  Break the barrels here for a VELVET BLUE, then smash the left torch for
    a SPINEL.  There are going to be two ILLUMINADOS pacing on the upper level,
    though you may not be able to see both right away (one is hiding on the right).
    If you kill them both, you'll have safe passage over the bridge.  If not,
    you'll be spotted and have to deal with three catapults on the other end of the
    ravine raining down pain on you.  Do what you will.
    
    On the other side, you'll find a set of stairs leading up, and two more
    ILLUMINADOS on the top.  Opposite from where the stairs are, you can find a
    door leading in, but on the right side of the tower, there are two barrels, one
    with RIFLE SHOTS (5).  Might want to grab those before continuing on.
    
    **CLOCK TOWER**
    ENEMIES: Not just yet...
    
    God, this feels like Castlevania.
    
    Basically, your first goal here is to bust up three wooden planks hidden in the
    gear.  There's a file that mentions this later, but I'm sparing you the BS and
    going for it now.
    
    To the right is a little platform with a ladder.  Stand there and aim up to the
    left slightly, and you should see the first plank.  Fire on it, then climb up
    the ladder.  On this level, there's a box to the right, and around on the other
    side, the next ladder and some HANDGUN BULLETS (20).  On this ladder platform,
    aim up and a little to the right, to fire down the next plank.  The top level
    has a path that winds upward, and along it you'll find a GREEN HERB and the
    afformentioned FILE.  Continue on and fire on the last plank, which you'll find
    at the end, and then pull the lever to move the bridge.
    
    As you start moving down again, you'll hear a door open.  This is pretty much
    what you think it is.  Hop down a level, turn, kill the ILLUMINADO, repeat with
    two ILLUMINADOS on the next level.  Don't exit through the door here, just keep
    on going down.
    
    There will be a scene, and a stick of dynamite will fall down in front of you.
    Wait for it to pop, then continue running, going down the stairs and killing
    the ILLUMINADO you meet, along with the four ILLUMINADOS beyond him.  Break the
    boxes for a HAND GRENADE, then continue on, past both doors, for another box.
    Now open up the door closest to you, but you might want to reload all your
    weapons before going for it.
    
    **PATH FROM CLOCK TOWER**
    ENEMIES: SIXTEEN ILLUMINADOS
    
    There are three shield ILLUMINADOS walking towards you, so if you have any sort
    of killing grenade, now's the time.
    
    As you start to cross, six ILLUMINADOS will appear in front of you and three
    ILLUMINADOS behind you.  The ones in front are considerably more dangerous (the
    leader has a rocket launcher), so handle them first, either with another
    grenade or the shotgun.  As if things weren't already bad enough, four more
    ILLUMINADOS will drop down, two from either side of the door.  I recommend
    cornering yourself and fending them off from somewhere where you know they
    can't get your back.  Along with the numerous random items, the leader will
    drop a GOLD BANGLE.  Reload again before heading through the door.
    
    **BELL HALL**
    ENEMIES: SIX ILLUMINADOS, TWO GARRADORS
    
    The bonus here is that none of the enemies notice you right away, so if you're
    good, you can snipe two of the ILLUMINADOS right away, before the GARRADORS
    charge you.  Run around one of the pillars and up the stairs to avoid the claw
    men, then turn left and kill the helmet ILLUMINADO quickly for a FIRST-AID
    SPRAY.  Continue down the passage to three more ILLUMINADOS, and kill them all.
    The garradors will continue to patrol the area, but there are two bells here,
    one on the upper level and one on the middle level, that you can shoot to
    distract them.  Hopefully by now you've perfected your technique to where you
    can get a few shots in a row on their parasites, but if you haven't keep using
    the tunnel on the left side of the room.  These ones tend to get stuck a lot,
    which leaves them open to all kinds of attacks.  The key here is get the other
    enemies cleared right away, so you can focus solely on the garradors, from
    a distance if possible.  As usual, each will drop 15000 PSTAS when they're
    killed.  You can find SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) on the upper level in a pot, an
    INCENDIARY GRENADE and a random item on the middle level, and a GREEN HERB on
    the lower level.  Open up the double doors and continue on, taking (not
    shooting) the two SPINELS off the statues, then open the doors ahead to get a
    scene (be prepared to dodge).
    
    **SPIKE TRAP**
    
    Clockwise from here, you can find a VELVET BLUE (on the right), and TMP AMMO
    (50), MAGNUM ROUNDS (5), a YELLOW HERB, a merchant, an INCENDIARY GRENADE, and
    a typewriter further along.  Beyond that, there's a CROWN, which you should
    pick up, but don't sell it just yet.  You can pick up a striker from the
    merchant now, which I'd recommend.
    
    *********************************
    ************MERCHANT*************
    *   BUY (NEW)   * TUNE UP (NEW) *
    * Striker (43k) *    (none)     *
    *********************************
    
    Climb up the ladder and pick up a VELVET BLUE from the drain pipe on the left,
    a RED HERB further along to the right, and SPINEL to the left again.  Go
    through the door again.
    
    **NITROGEN HALLWAY**
    ENEMIES: The biggest!
    
    Keep running forward after you enter.  The goal is the hallway at the end, but
    you may have to dodge a few times as you go along.  Go around the corner inside
    the room, then a left at the end, where you should find a lever on the right.
    Pull it and examine the door.  This triggers a scene and a boss fight.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #5: VERDUGO]+                                                   |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: VERY EASY]+                                                    |
    |After so much dodging, the monster finally shows itself.  Run past it into   |
    |the main part of the room and find the cannister.  Knock it over and the     |
    |liquid nitrogen will freeze the Verdugo.  From here, just shoot it with your |
    |ROCKET LAUNCHER and it's done for.                                           |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Now wasn't that just the prettiest explosion you've ever seen?  Pick up the
    CROWN JEWEL from the ice, then you're free to explore this area.  You can find
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (15) and a GREEN HERB opposite the lever in this room, and in
    the room on the right further along, TMP AMMO (50).  In the room on the left
    (which has the elevator you need to be using), you can find HANDGUN BULLETS
    (25) and a FIRST-AID SPRAY.  Now go down to end this section.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 4-2: The Pit
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **MINE ENTRANCE**
    
    GREEN HERB, dead ahead.  Down the stairs, a merchant, barrels with RIFLE SHOTS
    (5), a HAND GRENADE, and a SPINEL.  There are HANDGUN BULLETS (20) on one side
    of the typewriter, and a FILE on the other.  A new shooting range quest is now
    open, so you might want to check that out as well.
    
    ***************************************
    ***************MERCHANT****************
    * BUY (NEW) *      TUNE UP (NEW)      *
    *  (none)   * Riot Gun CAP (15, 20k)  *
    ************* M.Thrower FP (6.0, 45k) *
    ***************************************
    
    **MINING COMPLEX**
    ENEMIES: TWO GANADOS (pre-waves)
             TWELVE GANADOS (first wave)
             FOUR GANADOS, ONE CHAINSAW MANIAC (second wave)
    
    Right ahead are a pair of GANADOS, but they're only as strong as they were in
    village and can be dispatched rather quickly.  In one of the carts ahead, you
    can get a VELVET BLUE.  There's HANDGUN BULLETS (20) and a random item in the
    barrels near there.
    
    Further ahead, you'll see a bunch of GANADOS standing around in the complex,
    not really doing anything.  There are two GANADOS beyond the boulder, one on
    the machines, four wandering around below, and two on the other side.  About
    three of them will pay enough attention to try to climb up the ladder, so stake
    out that spot until it's safe to head down.  Safe in relative terms, of course.
    Down there, four of the remaining GANADOS should charge you now, while the
    remaining three will stand oblivious on the other side.  Since he's not a
    concern, pick up SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and the 2800 PSTAS on the upper
    semi-circle, and a VELVET BLUE from the cart near the switch, which you should
    pull.  This will alert the last three, so be prepared for combat as you head up
    the stairs on the other side.  Behind the switch up here is 5000 PSTAS, so grab
    that before you do anything else.  Now pull the switch.
    
    Jump down off the ledge to the lower level.  This will alert the CHAINSAW
    MANIAC, which means some serious danger.  Run back into the little metal alcove
    where the cart should be to fend off him, and the four GANADOS that jump down
    from above the ladder.  If the maniac doesn't notice you, you can always snipe
    him through the grate to lure him over.  The good doctor is as dim-witted as
    ever and will keep running into your fire until he dies and drops a 10000
    PSTAS.  Now flip the switch he was by and grab the DYNAMITE from the cart,
    using it on the boulder and running away before it detonates.  Two barrels,
    containing MAGNUM ROUNDS (5) and a HAND GRENADE, will greet you on the other
    side.  You'll probably need both shortly.
    
    **SMELTING ROOM**
    ENEMIES:  Boo-yah...
    
    To the right, you can grab a FIRST-AID SPRAY and a FLASH GRENADE.  To the left,
    a box of SHOTGUN SHELLS (15).  Now head to the door beyond...
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #6: LOS GIGANTES]+                                              |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: MEDIUM]+                                                       |
    |This is the hardest boss battle in the game, so far as I'm concerned.  You   |
    |may not believe that from the start, but each of these Gigantes has a much   |
    |bigger damage resistance than any of the ones you've fought previously.  In  |
    |spite of your advanced weaponry, these things take very little damage from   |
    |your attacks, and fighting both at once is a guarenteed method for draining  |
    |all of your healing items.  The solution is to climb up the ladder on the    |
    |side of the room and wait until one of them starts shaking the platform.     |
    |Ride the rope swing down to the other sided and operate the lever, which     |
    |will start up a different camera angle.  When one of the Gigantes is over    |
    |the circle in the middle, pull the switch again, which will drop it into the |
    |pit.  That will leave you with one Gigante to fight, but STAY AWAY FROM THE  |
    |PIT!  The Gigante in there has a nasty habit of trying to drag you down with |
    |him.  For the remaining Gigante, use your most powerful weapons, including   |
    |whatever hand grenades you have.  This battle will be a lot more difficult,  |
    |and the Gigante has a new trick which involves kicking you into the air and  |
    |immediately pounding you down again with his fist (rarely works), but you    |
    |should be able to pull through so long as you have a lot of healing items.   |
    |You can keep on using the ladder and swing method if you want to as well.    |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Each Gigante will drop 15000 PSTAS upon dying.  If you dropped one in the pit,
    you'll have to exit the room first, then re-enter to find the 15000 PSTAS for
    that one.  Two barrels by the door ahead will hold an INCENDIARY GRENADE and
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (15).
    
    **NOVISTADOR CAVES**
    ENEMIES: Take a wild guess...
    
    The name says it all, you'll be fighting a lot of Novistadors here, so be
    prepared.  Remember that by shooting them out of the air, you instantly kill
    them.
    
    To the left as it opens out, you can pick up a GREEN HERB.  The statue also
    gives a hint, but it's kind of obvious, so don't worry.  About five NOVISTADORS
    are floating around here, so kill them before you take the path to the right,
    where there's a FLASH GRENADE.  As you continue up this path, you'll be
    attacked by about seven more NOVISTADORS.  Pick up the SHOTGUN SHELLS (15)
    after clearing the area, then continue to the right and into the cave.  Pick up
    the GREEN HERB there, then push the white panel.
    
    This solves the first part of the puzzle, but it also releases a wave of six
    NOVISTADORS that will try to kill you before you can continue.  Go along the
    path from before, and you'll meet two more NOVISTADORS.  Further along, a pack
    of TMP AMMO (50), four more NOVISTADORS coming out a cave, and HANDGUN BULLETS
    (20).  Go into the cave, grabbing the GREEN HERB, and repeat the process from
    before.
    
    Just like last time, six NOVISTADORS will attack you, so fend them off and
    continue out.  As you head across the natural bridge, four more NOVISTADORS
    attack, one from behind.  Kill them all, pick up the RED HERB, and open the
    gates by pressing the switch.
    
    This is a new continue point from now on, so don't worry too much about messing
    up.  The first two presses are pretty straightforward, just run underneath them
    as the opporunity arises, jumping down in front of the second press right as
    it starts to come up.  Flip the lever on the left ahead, which will stop the
    second of three consecutive presses ahead.  That'll leave you a little space to
    hide in before you run under the last press.  When the room opens to a stone
    panel, pick up the ROYAL INSIGNIA and check the panel to end the chapter.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 4-3: Ancient Ruins
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **UPPER RUINS**
    ENEMIES: TWO GANADOS (outside fire)
             EIGHT GANADOS (near fire)
    
    Ahead are two barrels with a GREEN HERB and HANDGUN BULLETS (20).  There's a
    FILE posted on the merchant shack, so grab that before you go in and conduct
    business.
    
    **********************************************
    ********************MERCHANT******************
    * BUY (NEW) *           TUNE UP (NEW)        *
    *  (none)   * Handgun EX (5x headshots, 57k) *
    ************* Shotgun FP (8.0, 45k)          *
    ************* Shotgun CAP (18, 20k)          *
    ************* Rifle EX (18.0 FP, 80k)        *
    ************* TMP CAP (200, 25k)             *
    ************* Punisher FP (1.9, 35k)         *
    ************* Punisher CAP (28, 24k)         *
    ************* Red9 FP (3.5, 45k)             *
    ************* Blacktail FP (2.7, 30k)        *
    ************* Blacktail CAP (30, 20k)        *
    ************* Butterfly FP (24.0, 50k)       *
    ************* Butterfly RS (2.33, 20k)       *
    ************* Semi-auto FP (13.0, 30k)       *
    ************* Semi-auto CAP (20, 20k)        *
    ************* Striker FP (7.0, 25k)          *
    ************* Striker FP (8.0, 28k)          *
    ************* Striker RS (2.40, 8k)          *
    ************* Striker CAP (14, 10k)          *
    ************* Striker CAP (16, 12k)          *
    **********************************************
    
    Ahead there will be a scene that shows the area around you, but don't worry,
    there isn't a whole 'nother castle you'll have to run through.  Beyond the
    torches on the path, you'll find two GANADOS, one dead ahead and one on the
    right, so kill them both.  To the right, there's a SPINEL, and to the left,
    you can find 2200 PSTAS and RIFLE SHOTS (5).  Climb up the ladder ahead and
    take a glance at the crowd around the fire.  There are eight GANADOS there, so
    toss a grenade (hand) directly into the fire and kill them all.  You have to
    do it by feel, but it's not that hard.  To the right, you can find 1800 PSTAS,
    a VELVET BLUE, and a random item up the ladder.  The barrel holds a FLASH
    GRENADE.  There's a door to the left here, but it requires an item to unlock,
    so run around back and climb through the window, picking up the random item
    from the box, then cranking the crank until you reveal the ladder.
    
    **UNDERGROUND RUINS**
    ENEMIES: SIX GANADOS, TWO CHAINSAW MANIACS (pre-door)
             FIVE GANADOS (post-door)
             THREE GANADOS (post-key)
             TWO PARASITES (ceiling trap room)
    
    Head around the tablet and go down the path, breaking the two boxes if you feel
    like it (there's a VELVET BLUE, you should).  The path will lead to a mazey set
    of ruins, where you'll see four GANADOS in plain view and a CHAINSAW MANIAC up
    in the upper level, if you look close enough.  Kill those four and one more
    GANADO will run up from below.  If you stand to the right of the room, you can
    see another GANADO in the distance, which you can snipe.  You can probably hear
    the maniac going just nuts right now, and it is possible to keep sniping him
    from below, but it's not as fun and it leaves you open to having someone else
    sneak up on you.  Go down the  left side and make a quick U-turn to the right
    to pick up a VELVET BLUE. Continue around and down to find a coffin with a
    STAFF OF ROYALTY.  Now return to the main level and shoot the three beartraps
    that block your way.  To the far right at a blocked junction, you can find
    another VELVET BLUE.  Shoot the next three beartraps and go through the cleared
    path.  Now, you CAN climb up the ladder and face off with the maniac, but for
    the purposes of the walkthrough, I'll assume you just turned to the right and
    went for the door where the ganado was earlier.  Shoot the door down or kick it
    open, but know that one CHAINSAW MANIAC, which you haven't seen before, is
    behind there.
    
    Once you go inside, five GANADOS will spawn behind you.  This means a serious
    melee if you aren't careful, but when you clear it, you should have 20000
    PSTAS, 10000 each from the maniacs.  Inside, break the crate to get a HAND
    GRENADE and the barrels to get a random item.  Upstairs, grab the KEY TO THE
    MINE, and the YELLOW HERB from the barrel.
    
    There are now three GANADOS on the lower level outside, ready to attack you,
    but they're nothing special at this point.  Climb up the stairs and head around
    for a RED HERB, then use the key on the door, breaking the box in the left for
    a random item, and continuing down to the bottom.
    
    Through the door you'll find a ceiling trap much like the one in the castle.
    To make things worse, two PARASITES will be running around to make your life
    more difficult.  You don't have to kill them, as solving the puzzle will
    eliminate them, but it will make your life easier.  As usual, there will be a
    box of HANDGUN BULLETS (10) in the upper left corner, and there's 5300 PSTAS
    total in the coffin nearby.  Down the stairs, break the barrel for a VELVET
    BLUE and a random item, then go through the door.
    
    **MINE CART TUNNEL**
    ENEMIES: Lots...
    
    To the right ahead, there are two barrels, one with a random item, one with
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).  Around the left corner is a GREEN HERB.  Jump into the
    second cart and fire on the lever to the left to start the madness...
    
    A lot of people recommend the rifle for this thing, but it's hard to zoom in
    while moving, so I go with the striker, because you can fake out the ganados
    into jumping too early and getting run down by the cart.  It's really up to
    you, but your goal here is to shoot down the ganados before they land in your
    cart and try to attack you.  If you do, there's a minor bonus later, but it's
    nothing too exciting.
    
    The first leg has three GANADOS on the first left, three GANADOS on the first
    right, a pause, five GANADOS on the left platform, a pause, a place you need to
    duck, and a platform with a GANADO and a CHAINSAW MANIAC on the left and two
    GANADOS on the right.  Another GANADO will flip the switch and stop the cart,
    but if you fire on him and the lever, you can get through without any more
    (five more, actually) jumping down.
    
    The second leg has three GANADOS ahead on the left, a place to duck, a GANADO
    and a CHAINSAW MANIAC on the left and two GANADOS on the right (again), a
    sizable pause, a duck, four more GANADOS split between left and right, and a
    jump plus a button-mash climb.  The door ahead will lead to another chamber,
    much like the entrance, where you can find a ton of PSTAS, depending on your
    mine cart success, in a pile of bones to the immediate left, and a STONE OF
    SACRIFICE ahead on the central tablet.  Climb up the ladder that is revealed.
    
    **UPPER RUINS**
    
    Take a left and use the STONE OF SACRIFICE on the lion door and use the
    elevator to end the section.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 4-4: The End of the Castle
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **STATUE TOWER**
    ENEMIES: TWELVE ILLUMINADOS (pre-switches)
             FOUR ILLUMINADOS (first switch)
             SIX ILLUMINADOS (second switch)
    
    Run ahead and on the left you'll find two boxes of HANDGUN BULLETS (15 and 10)
    and a typewriter.  Save if you want to, I recommend it.  Down the hall is a
    ladder and two pots.  Don't climb the ladder just yet, but break the pots for a
    VELVET BLUE and a random item.  Now head down the stairs and try to cross the
    water bridge and there will be a scene.  You'll now have to flip two switches
    to cross it for real, just like the other water bridge earlier.
    
    One ILLUMINADO will await you up the stairs, so floor him and continue up the
    ladder.  Shoot the ILLUMINADO behind you here, then the two others on the
    platform ahead.  Two more ILLUMINADOs may jump down from up top, and you can
    plug two on the opposite end as well.   Steady your aim on the ladder until
    you're sure all eight are dead.  Break the pot up the ladder now for a random
    item, and then hop on the moving hand to go to the upper level.  Whip around
    and kill two ILLUMINADOS up there, then snipe the two on the opposite side.
    If the music stops, everything in the area is dead, and you're free to break
    the pots up here and grab the SPINEL.  Now pull the switch to start the second
    wave.
    
    Snipe the two ILLUMINADOS on the other side of the level.  There's a crossbow
    ILLUMINADO on the mid-level across, so kill him too.  Jump to the hand and
    ride it to the mid-level, then operate the switch to start the second arm.
    Ride it up to the top, break the pot on that side for an item, then get behind
    the head of the statue, smashing the pot for another item, and pull the switch
    nearby.  This just synchs up the hands, so don't worry.  Ride the near hand
    down to the mid-level again.  Two pots here will yield a VELVET BLUE, but
    breaking them will alert the red ILLUMINADO from the scene.  He'll drop 5000
    PSTAS when you kill him.  Down below, the pot holds SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and
    the final switch is nearby.
    
    As before, this triggers some enemy spawns, and three ILLUMINADOS will jump
    down to attack you.  Climb up the ladder when you knock them down to keep out
    of danger, then kill them from above.  On the opposite side of the mid-level is
    another ILLUMINADO, perfect for sniping.  Two more helmeted ILLUMINADOS will
    climb up from below, but you can take them.
    
    While crossing the bridge, bad things will start happening, so button mash
    A to keep running, hitting L, R, and L + R as you need to.  Slash the lock at
    the end with a knife, then keep running through.  You'll have to hit A some
    more, then jump, then climb up to get out of danger.  Open the door to continue
    on.
    
    **RITUAL TOWER**
    ENEMIES: Lots of ILLUMINADOS
    
    This area will open up with a scene, but don't get too comfortable, as you'll
    have to dodge near the end of it before you can continue on.
    
    Once you're free to go, head to the left and grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (20),
    then go behind the row of boxes to get a chest with a YELLOW HERB.
    
    There's nothing more on this floor, so start climbing the stairs on the other
    side of the room.  This is what I refer to as the "Donkey Kong" section of the
    tower.  You'll see why.  If you keep running and take the first opening on the
    left, you can avoid any trouble.  Cross the catwalk going around, and two
    scythe ILLUMINADOs will hop down on the other side, so plug them before they
    toss anything at you.  The barrel nearby has a random item, so grab that and
    head up the ladder, plugging the last ILLUMINADO (if he hasn't accidentally
    blown himself up).  You can stand here for a while, playing with the switch and
    sending more explosive goodies to your friends below, but eventually, you'll
    have to continue on up.
    
    Up the stairs is a GREEN HERB, but to the right, you'll probably want to take
    out the dynamite ILLUMINADO with the rifle.  Of course, he'll take out the
    other two ILLUMINADOS nearby, given enough time, so it's not a priority.  Go
    around the other side of the lift (the thing with the crates) and bust up the
    barrels for SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), an INCENDIARY GRENADE, and a random item.
    Push the two crates off the side of the lift, then start this baby up.
    
    This is going to be like any other elevator segment of the old school side-
    scrollers, but in this case you have to worry about the crossbow ILLUMINADOS
    around you as well.  There's one crossbow ILLUMINADO at the very beginning, and
    following him, the lift will stop momentarily and drop two red ILLUMINADOS.
    There's another crossbow ILLUMINADO slightly above you here, so you might take
    him out first.  The lift keeps moving and one, then three more red ILLUMINADOS
    will drop down to join you.  Nine more red ILLUMINADOS, one after the other,
    drop after that, so throwing a grenade may be wise if you get overrun.
    
    After all that is over with, things will calm down quite ab it and you'll
    reach the top.  Don't worry about any voices, as they can't get you up here.
    Head around the outer path, break the barrel for TMP AMMO (50), hop over the
    gap, break two more barrels for HANDGUN BULLETS (30) and SHOTGUN SHELLS (15),
    grab the RED HERB around the corner, then take the secondary lift up.  Up the
    stairs, you'll find the merchant, a typewriter, and a whole lot of goodies
    including RIFLE SHOTS (5), FIRST-AID SPRAY, TMP AMMO (50), and MAGNUM ROUNDS
    (5).
    
    **********************************
    *************MERCHANT*************
    * BUY (NEW) *     TUNE UP (NEW)  *
    *  (none)   * Red9 CAP (22, 22k) *
    **********************************
    
    Once you're ready, make your way through the big door...
    
    
    **RITUAL ROOM**
    ENEMIES: Some parasites, plus...
    
    Walk ahead and you'll get a scene, which foreshadows the upcoming boss fight...
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #7: RAMON SALAZAR]+                                             |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Plant 42 eats Salazar and the Verdugo and suddenly this happens.  This fight |
    |is a royal pain because most of the time Salazar is protected, but on the    |
    |whole it's not too hard.  The left and right tentacles will constantly swing |
    |about, but you can dodge them.  If you don't they'll grab you and throw you  |
    |to the ground, where there are a bunch of detached Plagas running about      |
    |(speculation is that the plant is the hive for them).  That leaves the head, |
    |which usually bashes up and down on the platform, but if you hear Salazar    |
    |say something like "payback" or "now it's my turn", the head will open up    |
    |and the mouth will try to get a one hit kill on you.  Run to the side as     |
    |Salazar will be revealed at this time and shoot him with the RIFLE, the      |
    |BROKEN BUTTERFLY, or a shotgun type.  The other way to reveal Salazar is to  |
    |shoot the head in the eye on the right side until it's stunned and drops     |
    |down.  This generally means that you'll be spending a lot of time on the     |
    |right side of the screen, so keep dodging and run to the left when you have  |
    |to.  One thing that I've found works rather nicely is to stand at the very   |
    |front edge of the platform and fire a shotgun from that angle.  This keeps   |
    |the head from turning too much and obstructing your shot, and seems to place |
    |you mostly out of the reach of the tentacles.  It's possible to get through  |
    |the entire battle unscathed from this position, but you may want to switch   |
    |to another weapon when Salazar is revealed.  After enough shots to him, the  |
    |whole thing will die.                                                        |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Your rewards for killing Salazar can be found all over the room, and include
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (15) on the right side, a GREEN HERB and HANDGUN BULLETS (20) on
    the left, 50000 PSTAS on the central platform, RIFLE SHOTS (10) and an
    INCENDIARY GRENADE on the left side of the platform and a GREEN HERB and TMP
    AMMO (100) on the right, SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and a FLASH GRENADE on the ground
    right of the starting position and HANDGUN BULLETS (20) and a FIRST-AID SPRAY
    on the left. That's a lot of goodies.  When you're done, climb up the ladder to
    the central platform and exit.
    
    **OUTER TOWER**
    
    Two barrels on your left, containing a GREEN HERB and a random item.  In upper
    right corner is a rope swing going down.  Here, on the lower level, on of the
    barrels has a SNAKE inside, so train your aim on the lower part of the right
    one and fire twice to kill it.  As usual, it will drop some sort of egg.  The
    barrel on the left has a random item.  Ride the elevator down.
    
    Here, you'll find a barrel with a random item, a box with a SPINEL, a FLASH
    GRENADE, another barrel with a random item, SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), RIFLE SHOTS
    (5), and HANDGUN BULLETS (15).  Talk to the merchant and do what you will, but
    you don't need to save just yet.
    
    *****************************************************
    ***********************MERCHANT**********************
    * BUY (NEW) *             TUNE UP (NEW)             *
    *  (none)   * Shotgun EX (Same FP at distance, 90k) *
    ************* TMP CAP (250, 35k)                    *
    ************* TMP EX (1.8 FP, 100k)                 *
    ************* Punisher EX (5x penetration, 40k)     *
    ************* Red9 EX (5.0 FP, 80k)                 *
    ************* Blacktail FP (3.0, 40k)               *
    ************* Blacktail CAP (35, 25k)               *
    ************* Blacktail EX (3.4 FP, 80k)            *
    ************* Riot Gun FP (8.0, 50k)                *
    ************* Riot Gun FS (1.50, 20k)               *
    ************* Riot Gun CAP (17, 25k)                *
    ************* Riot Gun EX (12.0 FP, 120k)           *
    ************* M.Thrower CAP (10, 40k)               *
    ************* Striker FP (9.0, 32k)                 *
    ************* Striker RS (1.50, 15k)                *
    ************* Striker CAP (20, 16k)                 *
    *****************************************************
    
    Go through the door beyond the merchant to end this chapter, as well as this
    disk.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 5-1: Disembarking
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **LOWER CLIFFS**
    ENEMIES: ~THIRTEEN COMMANDOS, ONE GATLING COMMANDO (you shoot the light)
             ~FIFTEEN COMMANDOS, ONE GATLING COMMANDO (you don't shoot the light)
             TWO COMMANDOS (after the light)
    
    After a few scenes (and one of the best Saddler lines ever), you'll be on the
    island.  Follow the path around and hop off the ledge.  Don't go across the
    wooden bridge yet, instead, go to the end fo the path ahead and climb up the
    two smaller cliffs to get to two boxes, one with a random item and one with an
    EMERALD.  Climb down and cross the bridge from earlier and follow that around
    'til you get a scene.
    
    Now, you have two choices here, you can either shoot out the search light and
    reduce the number of enemies that will attack you here, or you can jump right
    over and deal with the standard melee.
    
     ---------
    |LIGHT OFF|
     ---------
    
    On the other side, you can find HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the box ahead.  Inside
    the building, you'll see your first COMMANDO, which you shouldn't have too much
    trouble with.
    
    Walking into the main area will alert the GATLING COMMANDO.  Be warned as you
    should be using nothing less than a shotgun on him and more if you can spare it
    (not the magnum though).  The gun is dangerous, so run around him if he starts
    firing.  Don't try to climb up anything nearby either, as he can jump it in a
    few seconds.  He'll drop 15000 PSTAS when he dies.  A total of thirteen more
    COMMANDOS will join the fight after the gat, so be aware of your surroundings.
    These guys have everything the illuminados had and then some (cattle prods, for
    example).
    
     --------
    |LIGHT ON|
     --------
    
    You might have time to grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) across the way, you might
    not.  More likely, you'll have to deal with enemies immediately, as the spot
    grabs you right away (ala the catapults at the clock tower).
    
    Four COMMNADOS will charge you immediately, two from either side.  In the main
    area, just like before, the GATLING COMMANDO will drop down to attack you, so
    take him out quickly and from a distance, if at all possible.  He'll drop 15000
    PSTAS once he falls for good.  Eleven more COMMANDOS will be roaming the areas
    nearby, and you'll have to kill them before you can really progress.
    
     ----------
    |END LIGHTS|
     ----------
    
    There's quite a few things you can do here, now that the coast is clear.  First
    off, you might want to grab the GREEN HERB underneath the tower the gat jumped
    out of.  Since the rest of the items are along the way, head up to the door and
    check it to start the laser beam "puzzle" (don't worry, the beam doesn't hurt
    you).
    
    Head back down and towards the lower tower that the light is pointing towards.
    In the bottom floor of the tower is some TMP AMMO (50), but the goal is the
    mirror on top, which you should adjust to fire at the other mirror on the upper
    tower.  Don't worry about precision because once the beam is on, it's on.
    
    Cross this area and go inside the first building to find a ladder.  Climb up
    and grab the MAGNUM ROUNDS (3), then turn the mirror so that it hits the red
    spot on the other side of the door.  This will unlock the next area.
    
    Beyond the door are some sandbags, and there are some SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) behind
    that.  Follow the path on, but be prepared to dodge just before entering the
    second cave.  The barrels in there will yield a GREEN HERB, which you may need,
    considering the battle.  The third cave will have a crossbow COMMANDO and a
    regular COMMANDO waiting, so be prepared to dispatch both.  Before you climb
    up the ladder, though, you'll want to head to the left and pick up the SHOTGUN
    SHELLS (5) lying near the end.
    
    **UPPER CLIFFS**
    ENEMIES: ~TWENTY-FOUR COMMANDOS
    
    Head forward and to the left, you'll see a COMMANDO, midlessly watching guard
    by the sandbags.  Kill him quick and he won't alert anyone else just yet
    (perfect sniping opportunity).  Grab the TMP AMMO (25) by where he was, if you
    want it.  Turn around and head along the side of the cliff, jumping the gap
    when it comes.  There's another spotlight ahead, but it's irrelevant and can't
    be capped.  Jump through the opening on the right and pick up the RIFLE SHOTS
    (5) on the table, then turn to face three COMMANDOS, all with cattle prods.
    Take the right path first and grab the EMERALD off the box, then turn and take
    the left path, grabbing the RED HERB on the left, then blowing up the barrel to
    reveal a secret cave.  Inside, there's a treasure chest with a GOLDEN LYNX, but
    don't sell that just yet, as you can add stones to it.
    
    Make your way out of the tunnels and back to the path from earlier.  One
    COMMANDO might dart past as he sees you.  There are three more COMMANDOS on the
    upper level bridge, but two can be taken out immediately via timing a shot on
    the explosive barrel.  Snipe the other off after that.  Now, you'll be in a bit
    of a situation, because ahead there's a COMMANDO with a rocket launcher, and
    two more COMMANDOS with dynamite will join the fight soon.  Kill one of them
    on the left and take the tunnel up to find the one that ran from earlier, and
    two new cattle prod COMMANDOS.  At the end of this area is a GREEN HERB and
    some SHOTGUN SHELLS (5).  Turn around and head down again.  You can shoot the
    barrel cart on the right here and send that down a path of destruction, or you
    can kill the five COMMANDOS along the way manually.  If you haven't killed the
    other dynamite guy already, now's a good time.  On the box ahead are more
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (5), and there's an enclave on the left that has another
    COMMANDO and TMP AMMO (25).  The guy who had the rocket launcher from earlier
    might be waiting on top here, if you haven't killed him already.
    
    Unlock the gates and head inside.  There's a merchant and a typewriter ahead,
    but heading into this area causes a COMMANDO to spawn behind you.  Ahead, there
    are five COMMANDOS, one with a crossbow on the upper level, but you can snipe
    them all rather easily.  Head for the door at the end when you're done.
    
    *************************************************************
    ****************************MERCHANT*************************
    *         BUY (NEW)           *      TUNE UP (NEW)          *
    * Treasure Map (Island) (10k) * Butterfly CAP (12, 25k)     *
    * Killer7 (77.7k)             * Semi-auto FP (15.0, 40k)    *
    ******************************* Semi-auto CAP (24, 25k)     *
    ******************************* Semi-auto EX (0.40 FS, 80k) *
    ******************************* M.Thrower EX (Homing, 30k)  *
    ******************************* Striker FP (10.0, 40k)      *
    ******************************* Striker CAP (24, 18k)       *
    *************************************************************
    
    **KITCHEN**
    ENEMIES: TWO COMMANDOS
    
    Open the locker on the left for 2000 PSTAS.  Continue down the hallway and when
    it turns to the right, open up the box for an INCENDIARY GRENADE.  Open the
    door and you'll alert a nearby COMMANDO, who will rush you with little results.
    To the left there's a GREEN HERB, and in the alcove you could see through the
    busted up part of the wall, the case has SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).
    
    Continue down the hall to the main part of the kitchen, but watch out for that
    oven...  In the sinks on the left you can find a HAND GRENADE, and a door that
    leads out of here.
    
    **MESS HALL**
    ENEMIES: FIVE COMMANDOS
    
    Head around the corner and you'll meet your first big COMMANDO, who is only
    vulnerable if you shoot him in the head.  Ignore the door for now and head
    down the stairs.  There's a crossbow COMMANDO down here and another big
    COMMANDO, so be prepared to dispatch them quickly.  Two more COMMANDOS will
    join the fight as you move out of the stairwell, and one of them has a shield.
    Once you've taken them out, open the case for a RED STONE OF FAITH (for use
    in combining with the lynx), then continue around to a small pantry behind the
    table that holds a random item and a YELLOW HERB.
    
    Now climb up the stairs and enter the room you skipped before.
    
    Grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) ahead.  A scene will follow once you progress
    far enough into the room.  Turn around and examine the lockers behind you to
    get 5000 PSTAS, then exit through the door.
    
    **FILING ROOM**
    ENEMIES: SEVEN COMMANDOS
    
    Turn left and grab SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) from the filing cabinet, then go right
    through the opening and pick up some more SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) and RIFLE SHOTS
    (5).  Chat with the merchant and buy the SURVIVAL VEST if you can possibly
    afford it.  This is extremely valuable for the next section of the game, so if
    you can't afford it, run through a session at the shooting range nearby and
    hope that's enough.
    
    ***************************************************
    ********************MERCHANT***********************
    *      BUY (NEW)      *      TUNE UP (NEW)        *
    * Tactical Vest (60k) * Striker FP (12.0, 60k)    *
    *********************** Striker CAP (28, 25k)     *
    *********************** Striker EX (100 CAP, 60k) *
    *********************** Killer7 FP (30.0, 62k)    *
    *********************** Killer7 RS (1.53, 20k)    *
    *********************** Killer7 CAP (10, 30k)     *
    ***************************************************
    
    In one of the filing cabinets in the other part of the room is an EMERALD.
    Unfortunately, there's two COMMANDOS on the other side of a shutter that opens
    and closes (depending on where you stand), and they keep throwing dynamite at
    you.  There are a number of classy ways to handle this, but one of my personal
    favorites is to toss a flashbang, then snipe one of them, leaving him to blow
    the other up.  As an alternative, you could also shoot the dynamite, but this
    is often surprisingly ineffective.  A third dynamite COMMANDO will join up
    sooner or later, then three more crossbow COMMANDOS after him.  Killing them
    will alert the COMMANDO that was "operating" the shutter (it's actually a
    script independant of the commando that runs regardless of his presence).
    
    Inside, you can find a RED HERB near the operator's post, TMP AMMO (50) in a
    red cabinet, and a door to exit through.
    
    **MEDICAL FACILITY**
    
    To the left is a GREEN HERB and a door that leads back to the entrance (hint:
    don't use it).  Inside the room near the herb, there's a box with a BRASS
    POCKET WATCH and a typewriter, so save if you need to.
    
    Head out and up the stairs, and when you hit the junction at the top, head to
    the left and grab the INCENDIARY GRENADE from the red cabinet nearby.  There's
    a box along the way the will hold some MAGNUM ROUNDS (3), which you could
    probably think up a few uses for.  Enter the double doors you find at the end.
    
    **OPERATING ROOM**
    ENEMIES: Yes.  That is foreshadowing.
    
    The door in front of you will open automatically.  when you get to the viewing
    window, there will be a brief scene.  You can't get into that room though, so
    you'll have to access the panel on the right side...
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [ARROW PUZZLE]                                      +
    +                                                     +
    + The object here isn't obvious, but the goal is to   +
    + turn the arrows so that there's a flashing current  +
    + traveling from the upper left corner to the lower   +
    + right.  Each selection of a color will rotate all   +
    + of the arrows of the same color counter clockwise   +
    + once.  You don't even have to light them all up.    +
    +                                                     +
    + Operate the blue arrow once, the green twice, and   +
    + the red three times to unlock the door.             +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    There's a FILE inside on the left that explains the next major enemy you'll
    have to face, so read up on that and then grab the TMP AMMO (50), if you want
    it.  On the other side of the table you can find a FREEZER CARD KEY.
    
    Something in the other room will start moving.  This is your first REGENERATOR,
    but you can't kill it unless you have a ton of ammo or are extremely lucky in
    your shots, so either run into the room it came out of and pick up the EMERALD
    in there if you can manage it, or run out the door to get away from this thing.
    
    **MEDICAL FACILITY**
    ENEMIES: TWO REGENERATORS
    
    Yes, you read that right, but fortunately, you'll only have to deal with one
    REGENERATOR that you'll find on your way down the hall.  Go past the junction
    and into the first door on the right, which you can now unlock with your
    newfound key.
    
    **CRYO STORAGE**
    ENEMIES: Yup.
    
    To the left is a pack of RIFLE SHOTS (5) (yes, devils), and in the glass
    cabinet at the end here you can pick up a GREEN HERB.  Back near the entrance,
    the first door on the right has cryo device which you'll need to switch off to
    get to the major item in this room.  You'll also want to use the key rewriter
    nearby to get the WASTE DISPOSAL CARD KEY.  Now head into the other room and
    grab the INFRARED SCOPE after opening the valve.  This can be used on either
    model of the rifle.
    
    Right on cue, a REGENERATOR will drop down, so combine the new scope with your
    rifle, pull it out, and wait.  When you see the glowing spots on the
    REGENERATOR, shoot 'em, as they're parasites that sustain the body and this is
    the fastest way to dispose of them.  Pick up the 5000 PSTAS when the music
    stops and head out.
    
    **MEDICAL FACILITY**
    ENEMIES: TWO REGENERATORS
    
    Now that you can take both of these on in [un]fair grounds, head to the right
    and stake out the alcove with the case, which holds an EMERALD.  Gun down both
    REGENERATORS as they come, and if you've shot all of them off the front of one,
    but it keeps moving, shoot out one of its legs and search for another on its
    back.  Repeat that process whenever you're stuck with these.  Pick up each of
    the two 5000 PSTAS when you're done, and while you're at it, open up the red
    cabinet further down the hall and pick up some more RIFLE SHOTS (5).  Use the
    new key at the end to open up the door.
    
    **WASTE DISPOSAL**
    ENEMIES: FOUR COMMANDOS
    
    At the end, you'll find some more TMP AMMO (25) and a door.  Open it and grab
    the HAND GRENADE next to the control levers.  This is one of the more amusing
    parts of the game, as you can use the controls to pick up about three of the
    four COMMANDOS below and drop them into the pit.  The remaining one or two will
    get wise to your scheme and try to climb up the ladder to where you are, but
    swift violence solves this problem.
    
    Jump down and head around the waste bins, picking up a GREEN HERB that's lying
    around one of them, and the EMERALD that's on top of another.  Behind the next
    door, there's more TMP AMMO (25) and a staircase leading upward.  Pick up the
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) on the table in the control area and the YELLOW HERB by
    the desktops.  One of the lockers before the door holds a FLASH GRENADe as
    well.
    
    **HOLDING AREA**
    ENEMIES: TWO COMMANDOS (both big)
    
    There's some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) in the red cabinet on the righthand side of
    the hall.  When you see the two big COMMANDOS, prepare yourself, as they'll be
    rushing you as soon as they see you.  Once you've floored both, talk to Ashley
    to shut her up, but you can't get in just yet, so exit through the other door.
    
    **X-RAY ROOM**
    ENEMIES: SIX COMMANDOS
    
    Down the hall there's even more SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) to stash away.  There are
    six COMMANDOS behind this door, one of them has a shield and another has a
    crossbow.  Pick up some RIFLE SHOTS (5) and the FLASH GRENADE (which you might
    want to hold on to for a while) from this floor, then head down the stairs,
    picking up the pack of MAGNUM ROUNDS (5) that hides behind them.  Open the door
    and continue on, saving and grabbing the GREEN HERB through the door at the end
    if you have to, but otherwise heading through the left door.
    
    **EXPERIMENT ROOM**
    ENEMIES: Yeah huh.
    
    Ready your rifle and head deeper into the room, beyond the door.  You'll see
    something weird show up on the surveilance cam.  That's an IRON MAIDEN which is
    like a regenerator, but creepier and more deadly.  You may have to shoot its
    leg out to get to the parasite on its back.  When you're done, pick up the
    RIFLE SHOTS (5) nearby and the TMP AMMO (25), if you really want it.  Most
    important though is the STORAGE ROOM CARD KEY that the baddie drops.
    
    There are a lot of neat goodies to pick up in this general area, like the RIFLE
    SHOTS (5) from the case on the right, the EMERALD from the vertical sample
    shelves, the SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) from the side shelf, more RIFLE SHOTS (5) from
    the second valve lock, and a RED HERB and a GREEN HERB from the glass cabinets
    on the other side.  Head through the automatic door and out the second door
    behind it.
    
    **CONTROL TOWER**
    ENEMIES: CROWS!
    
    There's a pack of CROWS ahead on the metal girders, so pull out a flash grenade
    and toss it, trying to hit the same girder for maximum effect.  They'll drop
    a lot of small pstas, HANDGUN BULLETS (10) 5000 PSTAS, and another FLASH
    GRENADE to replenish the one you just spent.  Further ahead there's a merchant,
    though he doesn't have anything new to sell you, you probably have some stuff
    you can get rid of.  In the barrels, you can pick up an INCENDIARY GRENADE and
    a YELLOW HERB.
    
    Ride the lift up and turn left for another GREEN HERB.  Inside the control
    tower, you'll have a short scene, and you can pick up SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) on
    the table.  Leave the same way you came when you're done.
    
    **EXPERIMENT ROOM**
    
    Nothing to do here, unless you have more you can and want to pick up.  Head
    out the other door.
    
    **X-RAY ROOM**
    ENEMIES: FIVE COMMANDOS
    
    Once you reach the stairs going up, you'll meet three crossbow COMMANDOS, with
    two more COMMANDOS lurking behind them.  Take 'em all out, using a grenade or
    the shotgun, then head through the doors.
    
    **HOLDING AREA**
    
    Head to the left and unlock the door using the key, then go inside to end the
    section.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 5-2: The Factory Depths
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ENEMIES: FIVE COMMANDOS (one big)
    
    There are some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) to pick up on the left.  As you exit, a FILE
    in the form of a paper airplane will fly into the room, so pick that up before
    you leave here.
    
    Tell Ashley to wait, then head out the door.  There's a full scope of
    COMMANDOs outside, one big one, one shield, one axe, one cattle prod, one
    crossbow.  When you've killed them all, call Ashley back and head out the door
    on the left side.
    
    **WASTE DISPOSAL**
    ENEMIES: FOUR COOMMANDOS (first wave)
             THREE COMMANDOS (second wave)
    
    As you enter, four COMMANDOS will be alerted to your presence, and one of them
    will shut the door in front of you.  Two of them with melee weapons will rush
    you while a third uses a crossbow (the guy at the panel is useless).
    
    Accessing the panel to open the door will trigger the second wave of three
    COMMANDOS which will literally rush and surround you.  Bust out the shotgun on
    them, then move on down the stairs and out to the dumpster area, where you'll
    decide on the bright idea of jumping into the pit.
    
    **DUMP**
    ENEMIES: TWO IRON MAIDENS
    
    Leon knows what's up, because as soon as you flip the switch, the first IRON
    MAIDEN will get up.  Take a right and grab the RIFLE SHOTS (5) sitting there,
    and flip the switch on this side.  Back off, then finish off the baddie before
    it breaks through the gates.  There's a dumpster that you can hide Ashley in,
    if it does indeed break through.  Pick up the 20000 PSTAS (!) it drops, and
    activate the other switch to head into the next area.
    
    You and Ashley will need to push the red block to get across, but ditch her as
    soon as you're done, and make the run around to the left, where you'll see
    the next IRON MAIDEN.  Take care of it quickly, then pick up the GREEN HERB
    and RIFLE SHOTS (5) stitting around nearby (and the 20000 PSTAS).  Call Ashley,
    then push the next red block away from the door to get out.
    
    **DEMOLITION ROOM**
    ENEMIES: Indeterminate!
    
    Be prepared, because this next area has an absolute swarm of enemies and is
    grueling to get through.
    
    A big COMMANDO will notice you when you enter and run over to bring the smack
    down, but a quick shot with the rifle (hopefully with the regular scope) will
    solve that problem.  Two more standard COMMANDOS will follow him.  Further
    along the path, you can find two barrels, one of which holds SHOTGUN SHELLS
    (10).  A GREEN HERB waits at the end of the hall, then you can cross through
    the oversized vent to get to the pit and the wrecking ball.
    
    This is where the real fun starts, as enemies will start pouring out from all
    directions, and all of them are terribly interested in turning you into a thin,
    red paste.  Inside the small control room is a panel which you can use to move
    the ball into the wrecked part of the wall.
    
    The first goon squad consists of four COMMANDOS, one big, who will run out to
    the left, and others will continue to pour down from the right and, eventually,
    behind you.  I can't keep track of all of them, believe me, I've tried, but
    it's roughly the same amount as the swamp, but in a smaller locations.
    
    Advice I can give you includes:
    
    * Don't be afraid to bust out the shotgun on occasion, as it's the only weapon
      that can knock a large group of enemies backwards for a short length of time.
    * Grenades of all types, but particularly flashbangs, are invaluable for this
      fight.
    * When all else fails, you can knock them into the the firey molten pit o'
      doom, so keep that in mind and try it out a few times.
    * The wrecking ball takes a while to get back into position, so start it off,
      run around and do some killing, then come back and set it off again.
    
    Inside the control room, you can find HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and a RED HERB.
    Exit through the new door once you've opened the way.
    
    **SHUTTER HALLWAY**
    ENEMIES: TWO REGENERATORS
    
    Before you go out and flip the switch ahead, head to the right and enter the
    small room behind the door.  Pick up the RIFLE SHOTS (5) from the fridge and
    the INCENDIARY GRENADE from the cabinet, then leave.
    
    Behind the first shutter is a REGENERATOR, which you'll have to deal with
    rather quickly.  Grab the 5000 PSTAS it drops, then head down the hall where
    you'll find another REGENERATOR hanging around down the right fork.  When
    you've killed it (and picked up your loot), take the left fork for another
    small room with SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) in the locker, a GREEN HERB in one corner,
    and a red switch you'll have to push to continue in the other.
    
    Back in the hallway, send Ashley under the shutter to open the way.  Take the
    YELLOW HERB ahead, then go to the right if you want to shop and save.  If not,
    scroll down.
    
    **MERCHANT STORAGE**
    
    There's a RED HERB in the locker here, but otherwise, nothing new at the
    merchant.  If you haven't had the cash for something previously, you probably
    will now, so upgrade what you will (it's an especially good idea to get the
    exclusive for the Striker) and head on out again.
    
    **SHUTTER HALLWAY**
    
    With the double-locked door ahead, position Ashley on one side of the door
    and tell her to wait, then operate the lock on the other side and she'll
    follow suit.  When the lights hit the middle, pull the switch.  It's absurdly
    simple.
    
    **BULLDOZER SOUTH TERMINUS**
    ENEMIES: Loads
    
    This is the beginning of the always interesting bulldozer segment.  Bust the
    boxes on the right to get some SHOTGUN SHELLS (5), then grab more SHOTGUN
    SHELLS (5), RIFLE SHOTS (5), and a FIRST-AID SPRAY in the box on the other
    side.
    
    Climb into the back of the dozer and Ashley will take over at the controls.
    Leon's job is to stay in back and fire at all the enemies chasing after you.
    
    Advice again, as there's no strategy:
    
    * Stand as far as you can to the back.  The first leg of the course, you don't
      have to worry about any COMMANDOS dropping down from behind, but staying back
      gives you a wider scope to deal with.
    * Use a shotgun-type weapon, preferably a Striker, as often as possible.  This
      knocks the hordes down rather quickly.  Pistols can do it too, but using
      anything else is bad news.
    * Enemies have a lot less health in this segment than they would otherwise.
      That's part of the magic.
    * Don't worry about items.  They drop, but there's nothing you can do to get
      them unless they fall on the 'dozer.
    * Ashley can be hurt.  Rather easily.  So don't screw around.  Commandos will
      go after her.
    
    When the truck comes, fire at it and it will eventually crash.  It'll start up
    again later, but repeat the process and don't worry.  Soon, you'll reach the...
    
    **BULLDOZER (MID-POINT)**
    ENEMIES: Less than before
    
    This is a big pain in the arse because you'll have to climb up and pull a
    switch, and in the meantime, baddies will keep dropping down and attacking
    Ashley.
    
    Get off and climb the left ladder.  At the top, grab the TMP AMMO (25), pull
    out the rifle (regular scope) and snipe off four COMMANDOS.  About now, Ashley
    will scream, so turn and snipe a COMMANDO that has dropped down.  Once you run
    through the covered area, one COMMANDO will have spawned behind you and four
    more in front of you.  Kill them, snipe the two COMMANDOS on the dozer, pull
    the switch, bust the boxes for SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and TMP AMMO (50), run
    around the other side, take the GREEN HERB, hop down, and climb up to the
    dozer again.
    
    **BULLDOZER NORTH TERMINUS**
    ENEMIES: Another load
    
    Use something to heal Ashley if she was hit, then pull out the shotgun and
    continue on.  When Ashley notifies you that a truck is coming (just after the
    second stop), turn around and snipe it immediately.  Don't worry, it's supposed
    to crash into you, but not in a bad way.
    
    When you get off, grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (10), then head through the door.
    
    **MEETING ROOM**
    
    From the left to the right just in front of you, yuou can get 5000 PSTAS in a
    cabinet, SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) from the chair, and a HAND GRENADE from the other
    cabinet.  Ahead is a GREEN STONE OF JUDGEMENT in a case, and a box of 1600
    PSTAS on the shelf.  There's nothing new at the merchant this time either,
    and no sense in saving as the door to the left will end this section.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 5-3: Experiments
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **FACTORY CHAPEL**
    
    On your own again.  Grab the 5000 PSTAS on the left side of the stairs, then
    the FILE on the table up top.  Enter the door on the left and there will be a
    short scene.
    
    **BOILER ROOM**
    ENEMIES: SEVEN COMMANDOS
    
    Rather than taking the first left, take the second and grab the SHOTGUN SHELLS
    (5).  On your way back, a COMMANDO might yell, but don't worry.  Pull out your
    gun and shoot out the object from the window to get an EMERALD, then take the
    GREEN HERB at the bottom of the stairs.
    
    Behind the door are the COMMANDOS, one of whom might be waiting as soon as you
    open the door.  Around the corner, you'll find three more COMMANDOS, and up the
    stairs on the left, three more COMMANDOS.  In the room up here, grab the
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) and the 1600 PSTAS in the locker.  Before you go through the
    door at the bottom, hand a right into a small room that contains a FLASH
    GRENADE and 3000 PSTAS.  Now use the door.
    
    **WAREHOUSE**
    ENEMIES: Sort of...
    
    Outside the door ahead, you can find SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) near a chain-link
    fence.  Grab them and take the elevator to the upper level.
    
    ==ALERT==
    This next section will require that you dodge six times, in relatively quick
    succession, so keep your fingers around L + R and B + A.  You'll dodge five
    times, then get knocked below where you'll have to dodge once more.
    Following the sixth dodge, begin tapping A or B as quickly as possible,
    whichever one the screen says, then switch halfway through (as indicated).  You
    might want to get a head start on that, because if you die, you'll have to
    start the second part over again and it's really rather easy to die in this
    part.
    
    Hop down the ladder on the other end after the scenes, then head out the door.
    
    **LASER ROOM**
    
    This is an exceedingly bad idea, but it has to be dealt with nonetheless.
    
    The first one is easy, just wait for the bar to rise up and the two verticals
    to pass, then run through.  The second one, just wait until both bars are
    above you and continue then.  The third one requires stupid matrix dodging,
    as will the fourth and fifth, in quick succession.  When you get to the end,
    turn around and be prepared to dodge the sixth time.  This comes on quicker
    than any of the others, so be prepared.
    
    **THRONE ROOM**
    
    While you can sit in the throne, it's better to turn around and shoot down the
    ELEGANT HEADDRESS, grab the EMERALD on the left side of the throne, and
    continue on.
    
    **CONTAINER YARD**
    ENEMIES: Not immediately...
    
    Behind the stairs, you can find a GREEN HERB and another EMERALD.  Pick up the
    FILE by the merchant ahead (nothing but some magnum tune-ups), and save if you
    have to.  Most importantly, grab the MAGNUM ROUNDS (5) in the tiny room and the
    RED HERB, if you need it.
    
    ****************************************
    **************MERCHANT******************
    * BUY (NEW) *      TUNE UP (NEW)       *
    *  (none)   * Butterfly FP (28.0, 70k) *
    ************* Killer7 FP (35.0, 78k)   *
    ************* Killer7 RS (0.93, 30k)   *
    ************* Killer7 CAP (14, 49k)    *
    ****************************************
    
    Once you're through the door, take the YELLOW HERB from the busted cage on the
    left side of the path.  Near a burning barrel, you'll find some TMP AMMO (50).
    The next scene will give you a rough idea of the area you'll have to trek
    through next area, which isn't exactly... well, fun.  Climb up the path and
    you'll get another scene, in which you'll meet "it".
    
    In here, your goal is to flip the switches to open the door on the other side.
    Unfortunately, this will also drop the container in thirty seconds and the
    "it" keeps on trying to mangle you.  If it gets too uppity, fire at it a few
    times to get it away, but watch out for when you need to dodge and shake off.
    If it says dodge, just 
    
    The actual containers each pose their own problems.  To access those red
    switches, you'll need to fire at the green glass button to unlock the shutter.
    Sometimes, the green ones aren't in positions that are condusive to easy
    access.  The first, rather simple map, looks like this....
    
                                   ---------------------
      X = Starting point          |              S|R    |
      G = Green Button            |    ----     --|-    |
      # = Shutter                 |   |    |   |    |   |
      R = Red Switch              |   |    |   |    |   ||
      S = SHOTGUN SHELLS (10)     |   |    |   |    |   ||
      E = GREEN HERB              |   |    |   |    |   ||
                                  |   |    |X  |    |   ||
                                  |G##|    |   |    |   |
                                  | R |----     ----    |
                                  |---|  E        #     |
                                       -----------G-----
    
    First you'll want to run around the "it" and grab the shells, then turn around
    and head around the corner to the end, blast the green button to the right,
    then access the red switch.  Head all the way around again and grab the herb,
    make a turn, and blast the second green button on the right to get through.
    Around the path you'll find another red switch to flip and continue on.
    
                                   ------------G--------
      X = Starting point          |R                   H|
      G = Green Button             ----------    ---    |
      # = Shutter                            |##|   |   |
      ~ = Secondary Shutter        ----------   |   |   ||
      R = Red Switch              |X       ~    |   |   ||
      I = INCENDIARY GRENADE      |    -----    |   |   ||
      H = HAND GRENADE            |   |     |   |   |___||
                                  |   |     |   |   | R |
                                  |    -----     ---    |
                                  |I        |    #      |
                                   --------- G----------
    
    Here, run to the right and grab the incendiary (provided you have room), then
    head into the main area where "it" will drop down and the secondary shutter
    will close behind you.  Turn to the south and fire on the green button, which
    should be up and to the right on a pillar.  The first shutter will open and 
    you'll be able to get to the red switch.  The second green button is also up
    above, but it's behind the shutter (don't worry, it's an easy enough shot).
    When you blast that, head through to the left to hit the second red switch, and
    make a quick turn to get through to the exit on the east side, grabbing the
    grenade if you can fit it in.
    
                                   ---------------------
      X = Starting point          |       #G    |P      |
      G = Green Button            |    -----    |---    |
      # = Shutter                 |   |     | R |   |   |
      * = Secret Passage          |   |      ---    |   ||
      P = Sniping position        |X  |             |   ||
      R = Red Switch              |   #************ |   ||
                                  |    ---        * |   ||
                                  |       |       * |   |
                                  |      R|      - -    |
                                  |       |     |       |
                                   -------       -------
    
    The third one is a little more complicated as the "it" will mutate and get even
    more ornery, AND the green button is behind a shutter this time.  Well, first,
    you'll want to run to the right and flip the first red switch.  This will
    unlock the secret passage, but it will also attract the "it".  "It" can't get
    to you in the passage though, so run through and exit through the other side,
    eventually positioning yourself at P so you can snipe the green button.  Now
    head through the passage again, flip the red switch, and run through the secret
    passage to the exit.  You'll have to open the door and jump to escape.
    
    After all that you're probably thinking, "oh, swell, I've defeated "it" and am
    free to enjoy some quiet".  No, not quite, because as soon as you cross that
    gate, it's going to drop and you're going to be left actually fighting "it".
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #8: U3]+                                                        |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |After so much fanfare, it's time to actually fight Saddler's eponymous "It"! |
    |Well, not quite, as going after it in an open area is not the brightest idea |
    |in the world.  Immediately turn around and grab the nearby GREEN HERB and    |
    |SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).  Continue running until you get to a gate.  Open it up, |
    |run in, and close it again.  Wait for the U3 to come around then pull out a  |
    |handgun type and blow up the explosive barrel behind it.  Now back up a bit, |
    |because the U3 is going to want to tear its way through the gate and will    |
    |attack you through it if you get too close.  Pull out the BROKEN BUTTERFLY   |
    |or the SHOTGUN and begin firing at it, aiming for the parasitic head.  Once  |
    |you get a few shots off, the gate should break and it will start chasing you |
    |through the passage.  You'll pass another explosive barrel along the way,    |
    |and some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) before that, but keep running until you've     |
    |successfully gotten through the gate.  From there, steady your aim on either |
    |the U3's head again or the explosive behind it and fire.  A few more shots   |
    |coupled with the explosion should do it in, BUT more often than not, the U3  |
    |will mutate a little more and take another method of attack, that being      |
    |digging underneath the ground and trying to rise up and kill you that way.   |
    |If it does do this, keep moving around and dodge when the buttons appear on  |
    |screen.  It will eventually surface again, at which point you should keep    |
    |taking shots at its head.                                                    |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The gate will rise up again, and you'll find a cool 50000 PSTAS lying in the
    corpse.  Pick up any items you might want from this area, then head through the
    door on the other side of the gate.  Behind the stairs at the end of the tunnel
    is another GREEN HERB.  From here, go up the stairs and you're left with two
    options.  You can either ride the tram on the left back to the other side and
    pick up ANOTHER GREEN HERB, or you can climb up the ladder to exit this area
    entirely.
    
    **SOUTHERN CAMP**
    ENEMIES: EIGHT COMMANDOS
    
    Climb up the ladder and help yourself to more SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) and a HAND
    GRENADE in the cabinet.  Open the door and you'll be outside again, with some
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10) in the barrel ahead.  Approach the edge and you'll see
    seven COMMANDOS crowded around some barrels.  While there is a eighth COMMANDO
    below that can probably spot you, just shoot the barrels to take out the mob,
    then pick off any stragglers.
    
    Hop down and bust up the barrels for some TMP AMMO (50).  Beyond that in the
    main camp, there's some more TMP AMMO (50), but don't forget the YELLOW HERB
    far to the right.  Inside the tent are some boxes with SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), so
    grab those before you jump down the ladder.
    
    In the lower mining area, aim up and to the right of the support beams and
    shoot the object down to get an EMERALD.  There's also a barrel nearby.
    Further along the path, you'll find a small opening to the right where you can
    pick up the BLUE STONE OF TREASON to complete the lynx.  Head back out, then
    down a path on the left to get 5000 PSTAS.  Near the ladder you'll find a
    merchant, a typewriter, a door to the shooting range, a barrel with HANDGUN
    BULLETS (10), and a FILE that makes a negative amount of sense.  You should've
    already completed all of the shooting range quests, but the merchant has a few
    choice upgrades to the butterfly that make the next big battle a lot easier.
    Also, take note that the merchant is quite infested now.  Not that it matters
    or anything.
    
    ********************************************
    *****************MERCHANT*******************
    * BUY (NEW) *        TUNE UP (NEW)         *
    *  (none)   * Butterfly EX (50.0 FP, 150k) *
    ********************************************
    
    Climb up the ladder, bust up the barrel behind you for a random item, then exit
    through the door.
    
    **ISLAND RUINS**
    ENEMIES: In a manner of speaking...
    
    Bust up the barrel on the left to get a GREEN HERB, then hop down at the end of
    the path.  As you exit through the pillars, there will be a scene and you'll be
    under attack by Krauser.  His bow shoots explosive arrows, so keep on the run
    into the small hut ahead.  Try to open the door, but it will be on a time lock.
    This will attract Krauser.
    
    I should probably stop for a minute to talk about Krauser as an enemy here.
    His main thing is to flip around and dodge all of your shots, then charge you
    and try to cut you with the knife.  If you're not into getting hit, the only
    sure way out of it is to slash him before he does, which will stun him (and
    lead him to give you more props when he taunts you).  If you turn your back on
    him, he'll grab you and try to slit your throat, which will knock you down to
    minimum life if you aren't careful.  Sometimes, a special button mash dodge
    sequence will initiate.  If you're hit here, you will die instantly, so keep
    dodging until you kick him out of the way.  In other areas, you'll have to deal
    with him pulling out greandes or an SMG on you.  Every time he's "defeated",
    he'll toss a flashbang and disappear.
    
    The box here has MAGNUM ROUNDS (5) and there's a GREEN HERB next to it.  Climb
    up top and wait for Krauser, the bust out a rapid  fire weapon on him.  He'll
    mostly huck grenades, flip and dodge almost constantly, and
    try to knife you here, so this is a perfect time to get your basic strategy
    down.  When he's had enough, he'll toss a flashbang and disappear.  The door
    will unlock now as well, so head out (unless you want the FLASH GRENADE and the
    TMP AMMO (50) up top).
    
    In the next area, Krauser will wait behind a busted wall and shoot at you with
    his TMP until you've done something with him.  Grab the SHOTGUN SHELLS (10)
    ahead, then deal with him as you did last time (dodging is more likely here).
    Head down the stairs to the relief wall.  You can't do anything here yet,
    because you don't have the pieces, but you can grab some HANDGUN BULLETS (10)
    to the far left side.
    
    Head back up the stairs and go straight and to the left this time.  Krauser
    will fire his TMP at you from the tower across from you.  Inside the tower are
    some barrels with a FIRST-AID SPRAY and more SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).  Krauser will
    probably jump down to join you, so climb up the ladder and jump down the other
    side (grabbing the TMP AMMO (50) if you absolutely have to).  Follow this path
    down the stairs ahead, then go up the passage, taking the GREEN HERB and
    coming to rest in the open area with the PIECE OF THE HOLY BEAST, PANTHER.
    
    After the scene, you'll be fighting with Krauser again.  His thing is to hide
    on the upper level and huck grenades down, so stand underneath his platform and
    wait for him to join you.  You don't have to say anything if he taunts you, I
    don't think.  Once he leaves, grab the RED HERB and the HANDGUN BULLETS (20),
    then push the statue north, then west until it's on the panel.  Flip the switch
    to exit.
    
    There may or may not be a crowd of flying robots waiting for you, but if there
    are, kill them.  They aren't dangerous, but they are troublesome.  This time,
    head right when you reach the bottom of the stairs.  Make a left around the
    corner, then huck a grenade to the end near the gate to catch Krauser off-guard
    here.  You don't have to kill him, but you will need to pull the switch to
    continue.
    
    Some ground-based robots will be waiting here to the left, so blow them up.
    Pick up the TMP AMMO (50) nearby if you need it, and the GREEN HERB.  Head
    around where the 'bots were, destroy another in the ground, then continue on.
    There will be a flybot to your right here, and two more groundbots around the
    corner.  Krauser will taunt you, then you'll have to face another pair of
    'bots.  Take the YELLOW HERB and the gate will close behind you.  Keep going
    up.
    
    This area is eerily calm, but before you go ahead and grab the PIECE OF THE
    HOLY BEAST, EAGLE on the walkway ahead, you might want to take a side trip to
    the other side of this platform to pick up a MAGNUM ROUNDS (3) and a GREEN
    HERB.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #9: JACK KRAUSER]+                                              |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Throw those old strategies you were using out the window because Krauser's   |
    |new arm is bulletproof.  He's also lost any and all interest in knives, hand |
    |grenades, and his sub-machine gun, so keep those fingers close to the dodge  |
    |buttons at all times.  Krauser's modus operandi is to try to get you with    |
    |his mega-claw, which is a dodge move, but on occasion he'll jump back and    |
    |try to impale you with an overhead attack.  You can dodge this, but if you   |
    |happen to be standing too close to the edge at the time, you'll get knocked  |
    |off, and Krauser will grind his foot into your hand, but some button mashing |
    |will get your knife into his leg.  Speaking of which, Krauser absolutely     |
    |HATES getting stabbed, so pull that knife out at every opportunity.  Most of |
    |the time, Krauser will be using his arm as a shield, but there is a little   |
    |open space near the feet.  That should be where you fire at with a shotgun   |
    |type (or TMP if you aren't following my advice).  Since there's enough space |
    |on the field, use it to your full advantage and run back and forth to get    |
    |some space, just be warned that Krauser's pretty fast.  After enough shots   |
    |to the knees, Krauser will drop, at which point you should switch to your    |
    |magnum and plug him in the head as often as you can.  Another nifty method   |
    |is to shoot him with your best weapon while he's doing his roundhouse kick,  |
    |as he's completely open at that point.  He'll recover quickly, though, and   |
    |return to the flipping and skewering pattern, but you should have more than  |
    |enough healing goodies and cunning to get out of this one under the three    |
    |minute limit, but if you're down to thirty seconds left, and still haven't   |
    |killed him, you won't make it.                                               |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Krauser will drop the PIECE OF THE HOLY BEAST, SERPENT.  Jump down the ladder
    hole, then run out the door, placing all the pieces in the relief and going
    through.  Don't save though.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    CHAPTER 5-4: Showdown
    *******************************************************************************
    
    **NORTHERN CAMP**
    ENEMIES: Metric tons
    
    You'll hear an explosion from behind you, which means you can't exactly go
    back, but don't worry, there's nothing to see anyway.  Take the GREEN HERB
    ahead and use the typewriter, if you want.
    
    Walking up the slope will trigger a radio transmission, and a somewhat
    confusing one at that.  After you head up the slope some more, there will be
    another transmission, which will introduce you to your "backup" for this
    extended area.  He'll pretty much take out anything, and you can just hang out
    while he does it, but since he doesn't ever attack you, you might as well have
    some fun with it, right?
    
    Hide in the tent, grabbing the SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), while the COMMANDO at the
    gat fires at you.  Apparently, the tent is made of kevlar.  Once the commando
    is shot down, break the barrels outside for another GREEN HERB and more MAGNUM
    ROUNDS (5).
    
    You'll have your choice here as to whether or not you want to take the upper
    path or the lower path.  The lower path takes longer, and will yield RIFLE
    SHOTS (5), a HAND GRENADE, and a YELLOW HERB, while you're forced to fight
    about fifteen COMMANDOS (with varying degrees of support).  The upper path
    features a quicker route with nine COMMANDOS (one with rocket) and a measley
    GREEN HERB.  For the sake of argument, let's say the upper path joins with the
    lower when the lower climbs the metal ladder and the upper breaks the lock on
    the door.  Inside the room here, you'll find HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and a GREEN
    HERB, and a FLASH GRENADE waits outside (by the low path).
    
    Open up the door with the red switch and head out.  Ignore the GATLING COMMANDO
    and keep rushing up the hill (the barrel doesn't have anything either),
    blasting two COMMANDOS and finally reaching the wire swing, which you can use
    to crash into the gat.  Kill the gat, and pick up the 15000 PSTAS he drops (and
    the HAND GRENADE nearby) before flipping the switch to open the gate.  There's
    some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) you might want to grab in the boarded area across from
    you before starting the second leg of this course.
    
    
    This area has a lot of commandos manning stationary guns, so be on the watch.
    First run to the left and into the tunnel, grabbing the random item, then head
    up the ladder and wait for it to cool down a bit.  A couple of COMMANDOS might
    wander in, but they're easily killed.  After you hear Mike blow up one of the
    towers, run across the bridge and behind the shack for SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).
    There's also some TMP AMMO (50) by the dead gunner.  Those in hand, knock the
    gate down and pull the right-hand switch.  Now for the left one...
    
    Avoid the fire and run back the way you came, killing the three new COMMANDOS
    on the upper levels.  Jump down the ladder and run along the left side, picking
    off any COMMANDOS in the way, then pick up the GREEN HERB under the tower.
    There's also some TMP AMMO (50) in the middle on the ground floor here, but
    grabbing it without killing everything else would be unwise.  Climb up the
    nearby ladder and take MAGNUM ROUNDS (5) off the corpse above, then pull the
    left switch, hop down, grab the FIRST-AID SPRAY if you killed the gunner, and
    exit.
    
    
    This is technically an entirely new area, but it's mostly the same old story,
    so I include it in this section.  Enjoy as we explore the emotional spectrum in
    a short set of scenes.
    
    Turn around and shoot the EMERALD off the top of the pillar when it's over.
    Pick up the random loot lying around, and smash the barrel in what looks like
    a palace entrance for a FIRST-AID SPRAY.  Head out again, then down the right
    side, pausing to shoot another EMERALD off a pillar when you have a good aim
    on it.  Go through the door at the end when you're done.
    
    **NORTHERN RUINS**
    
    Hop down the hole and turn aroudn to grab a PEARL PENDANT off the block.
    You'll be treated to a scene in the next room.  When that's over with, take the
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10) off the crate, then head through the next two doors.
    
    **ISLAND PRISON**
    ENEMIES: He's back!
    
    There's a FLASH GRENADE to your immediate left.  Also, in the red garbage bin
    is the mystery critter, though it is quite harmless.  Open the drawer near the
    typewriter to get some MAGNUM ROUNDS (3), then save if you have to.  The green
    box has some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), and around the corner is a small room with a
    YELLOW HERB on a chair.
    
    Head into the main part of the prison.  In the first cell on the right, you can
    find some RIFLE SHOTS (5).  Continue on, but be warned the that next cell on
    the left (which has the bars bent open) holds a REGENERATOR.  Pick up the 5000
    PSTAS it drops, then continue on, snagging the RED HERB by the stairs, then
    climbing up and exiting out the door.
    
    **PRISON YARD**
    ENEMIES: Oodles
    
    Head down and around the stairs to get a random item in the box and a GREEN
    HERB on the ground.
    
    Edge around the corner into the yard and you'll see a couple of crossbow
    COMMANDOS, standing around, completely failing to notice you.  Punish them with
    headshots.  Hordes of COMMANDOS will start pouring in from all directions, but
    there are a bunch of explosive barrels strategically lying around that can be
    used to thin out the crowds.  Three COMMANDOS are in the immediate vicinity and
    should be the first to attack you.  One of them has a shield.
    
    Entering the main part of the yard will spawn a GATLING COMMANDO on one of the
    upper levels, so make a run for one of the covered areas so that he can't get
    to you.  If he eventually decides to drop down on you, you should have enough
    room and time to start a series of headshots to fell him.  Three barrels in
    this covered area will net you HANDGUN BULLETS (10) and a YELLOW HERB.  Some
    COMMANDOS will drop down on you here, so take advantage of the excessive number
    of barrels to be blown up and conserve your ammo.  An advanced tactic here
    would be to blow a large group back with the shotgun, then blow up the barrel
    next to them.  Endless fun.
    
    Eventually, you're going to want to try to head into the northwest corner of
    this area and open the door, but doing so will release the card key, which a
    lucky COMMANDO will snatch up immediately.  This will also cause a bunch of
    COMMANDOs to spawn in the metal gate area and swarm towards you.  Stand your
    ground here and fend them off until you've cleared out about five of them.
    Now it's back into the main yard (where the gat waits, if you haven't killed
    him already), and more explosions if you can help it.  I've really lost track
    of the number of enemies in this area, but trust me, there are a lot.  If any
    of them drops the EMERGENCY LOCK CARD KEY, snatch it up.
    
    Assuming the area is relatively clear, head to the southwest corner near the
    ladder and pick up the INCENDIARY GRENADE, SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), and GREEN HERB
    from the barrels.  Climb the ladder and take the FLASH GRENADE from the table
    here, then continue on, climbing up the next ladder you find.  In the first
    room here, you can find TMP AMMO (50) in the locker and a random item in the
    box.  In the second room is two barrels (random item), RIFLE SHOTS (5), a case
    with 5000 PSTAS, and the card reader you need to use the key on.
    
    Climb down the ladder from before (though the other does lead to a RED HERB),
    and go into the room you haven't entered yet.  Grab some HANDGUN BULLETS (10)
    in the locker, then use the lock in the corner and do the same for the first
    room at this level.  Now you can access the door from earlier.
    
    Inside the door at the bottom of the stairs, you'll meet up with two more
    shield COMMANDOS.  Blast 'em, then pick up some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10) from the
    cabinet near the entrance.  Exit through the door.
    
    **COMPUTER ROOM**
    
    You'll only be in this room for a single scene before you'll head out the door
    again.  In this small outdoor area, take a quick right and snatch up a total
    of 10000 PSTAS from the barrels, then do business with the merchant if you want
    to.  If you need 'em, pick up the TMP AMMO (50), the GREEN HERB, and the FILE
    before you leave.
    
    **EXIT TUNNEL**
    ENEMIES: FOUR COMMANDOS (two big)
    
    Head down the stairs, then pull out the rifle to snipe off the two incoming
    big COMMANDOS.  Take a right, and kill the two regular COMMANDOS, and head
    out the door they were guarding.
    
    **COMPUTER ROOM**
    
    Nothing dangerous here this time around, but there are some free goodies.
    Dead ahead are some SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).  Climb the ramp and cross the catwalk
    to get to the control room, where there's MAGNUM ROUNDS (5) and a RED HERB.
    Stash those, then leave the room the same way you came in.
    
    **EXIT TUNNEL**
    
    This time, take the door that the big guys were guarding to end the chapter.
    
    *******************************************************************************
    The Final Chapter
    *******************************************************************************
    
    Nothing to do here, but head out the other door and grab the YELLOW HERB, the
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (10), and FILE on the upper level before you leave.
    
    **FACTORY EXTERIOR**
    
    Pick up the GREEN HERB, the INCENDIARY GRENADE, and TMP AMMO (50) from your
    surroundings.  This is the last merchant and save point in the game, so make it
    count.  Head down the stairs and a scene will start that will have you ditching
    Ashley for the big battle ahead.
    
    **CONSTRUCTION DOCK**
    ENEMIES: Take a wild guess...
    
    Bunch of scenes, then you're left fighting the big thing.  Surprise surprise.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #10: OSMUND SADDLER]+                                           |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Ordinarily, this might be a pretty difficult battle, but you should have     |
    |enough healing items to survive it relatively unscathed.  As you could       |
    |probably gather from the mutation scene, the weak point is the eye in his    |
    |head, but unfortunately, it's floating up in the air most of the time.  You  |
    |have to do sufficient damage to the legs to knock it out, but don't worry    |
    |about that yet because you can get two cheap shots off right away.  First,   |
    |charge forward until you're on the other side of the explosive barrel, then  |
    |wait until Saddler gets close and blow it up.  Run up to Saddler's body and  |
    |hit A to jam the knife in his eye.  One cheap shot down.  Next run down the  |
    |narrower part of the path until you get to a platform with some controls.    |
    |When Saddler gets close, operate them and it will slam a bunch of metal rods |
    |into his head.  Dismount and jab the knife in his eye again using the same   |
    |methods.  Those are your two cheap shots.  The rest of the battle is a bit   |
    |of a pain because you have to attack his legs, which are invincible unless   |
    |one of the eyes is showing.  If it is, shoot it with a shotgun type and      |
    |he'll react.  Keep repeating the process with the other legs and eventually  |
    |he'll fall down.  This sounds a lot easier than it is considering there are  |
    |tentacles swinging around cutting at you and the occasional leg to stomp on  |
    |or charge at you, but patience is really all it takes.  Hand grenades also   |
    |work amazingly well, flooring him in a single toss.  If you run out of       |
    |supplies, there's a SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) near the barrel, a GREEN HERB at the  |
    |controls, and a HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the walkway to the controls.         |
    |There's another HAND GRENADE and a MAGNUM ROUNDS (3) on the bridge side of   |
    |the helipad as well, just know that the bridges drop of for no reason and    |
    |you may have to wait.  If you get over there before Saddler feels like       |
    |joining you, he may throw girders at you from the other side.  Either way,   |
    |once he joins you, there's another explosive barrel and another set of       |
    |controls on the other side, so that means two more cheap shots.  After five  |
    |to nine knife jabs, Ada will reappear with the ROCKET LAUNCHER (SPECIAL),    |
    |which takes up a 2 X 8 space you'll have to clear.  After that, knock        |
    |Saddler down again and fire the rocket.                                      |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    JET-SKI KEY in head, pick up the 100000 PSTAS Saddler dropped when he died,
    pick up whatever else you need, then get to the elevator as quickly as
    possible.
    
    **FACTORY EXTERIOR**
    
    Short scene, then you're gone...
    
    **ESCAPE TUNNEL**
    
    Keep running, and when you drop down a ladder, be sure to wait and grab Ashley,
    or things will get messy.
    
    The jet ski will wait ahead.  There's no strategy for this, but accelerate as
    much as you can (up) and remember that you can retry this area from the jet
    ski if you mess up.
    
    Enjoy the ending!
    
    =================
    =  07: REWARDS  =
    =================
    
    There are no time, item usage, or save constraints when it comes to unlocking
    these.  All of them just require that you complete some aspect of the game. 
    
    COSTUMES
    
    Upon beating the game, you'll unlock the "special" costumes for when you start
    a new game (either "cleared" or "start").  These new costumes include Leon
    in his old school RPD uniform (which acts as a tactical vest, for some reason),
    Ashley in a white leather outfit, and Ada in her Assignment Ada getup.
    
    ASSIGNMENT ADA
    
    You'll also unlock Assignment Ada your first time through, a small, even more
    action-based minigame on the island where you control Ada.
    
    MERCENARIES
    
    The third thing unlocked on beating the game for the first time is the
    Mercenaries game, a timed killing spree played at various locations using
    characters from the game, with a few surprises.
    
    INFINITE LAUNCHER
    
    The final item received on your first completion is the infinite rocket
    launcher, though you'll have to buy it in the cleared game for one million
    pstas.
    
    CHICAGO TYPEWRITER
    
    Completing Assignment Ada will grant you the ability to access the Chicago
    Typewriter, a sort of high-powered machine gun.  But like the launcher, the
    price is quite steep.
    
    HANDCANNON
    
    Getting a five-star rating with each character in every level of Mercenaries
    will give you access to the Handcannon in cleared games.  It's power is better
    than that of any other magnum, once upgraded, but it uses a different type of
    ammo.  Of course, if you fully upgrade it, its capacity is infinite, and it
    costs less to do so than it does to get any of the other special weapons.
    
    =====================================
    =  08: MEDALLIONS / SHOOTING RANGE  =
    =====================================
    
     ----------
    |MEDALLIONS|
     ----------
    
    One of the more "gamey" quests ever to appear in Resident Evil 4, there are a
    number of medallions scattered through the FARM and CEMETARY areas of the
    village early on in the game, split with seven in the former and eight in the
    latter.  The goal, according to a file found in the farm, is to shoot ten or
    more.  That much will get you a free Punisher handgun, but if you get all
    fifteen, the Punisher's firepower will be bumped up from 0.9 to 1.1, but ONLY
    IF YOU SHOOT ALL OF THEM BEFORE BUYING THE GUN.  Even if you aren't planning
    on using the Punisher all that much, it's still worth buying and taking out
    for a spin before you sell it again for some decent loot.
    
    FARM
    MEDALLION #1:  Tree w/ file
    MEDALLION #2:  Upper window, barn
    MEDALLION #3:  Tree behind barn
    MEDALLION #4:  Upper window, house
    MEDALLION #5:  Roof, right peak house
    MEDALLION #6:  Windmill
    MEDALLION #7:  Up and to the right of barricaded door
    
    CEMETARY
    MEDALLION #8:  Left tree, graveyard
    MEDALLION #9:  Right tree, graveyard
    MEDALLION #10: Near shack, outside barrier
    MEDALLION #11: Left of church
    MEDALLION #12: Behind church, far corner roof
    MEDALLION #13: Under first gap, bridge
    MEDALLION #14: Hanging above between gaps, bridge
    MEDALLION #15: To the right of second gap
    
     --------------
    |SHOOTING RANGE|
     --------------
    
    The shooting range, in reality, has nothing to do with the medallions other
    than the fact that both of them are facilitated by the merchants.
    
    Shooting ranges first start appearing at the end of Chapter 3-1, and come up
    a total of five times, even though the number of courses is four.  The goal of
    the shooting range is to rack up a certain number of points uing either the
    Sniping Set (Handgun, Rifle, Grenade) or the Burst-Fire Set (Shotgun, TMP,
    Grenade).  Targets include male ganados (50 for chest shot, 100 for head shot),
    female ganados (50 for chest shot, 200 for head shot), Ashleys (-1000 points),
    and Salazars (500 points), if you manage to shoot down five consecutive targets
    without missing.  The goal in each is to either shoot all the targets without
    hitting an Ashley or to rack up 4000+ points for the one-time prize, and rack
    up over 3000 points for each of the five other prizes.  The highest possible
    total is 6000 and I've gotten pretty damn close to that.
    
    There's no specific strategy for this, but I do have a few pieces of advice.
    
    * DON'T USE A WIRELESS CONTROLLER.  The game as a whole isn't designed for the
      controller and every once in a while you'll get caught with Leon trying, and
      failing to raise up his gun four to five times, give or take a few.
    * DON'T USE THE BURST-FIRE SET.  The game is set up in a certain way so that
      the shotgun's accuracy is determined by how much of the shot hits targets and
      the TMP will often continue firing (and missing) even if you've hit the
      target with a short burst.  In other words, there's no chance of getting the
      special Salazar target.
    * DON'T JUST USE THE RIFLE.  It's tempting, but will punish you in the same way
      the the burst-fire set does.
    * DON'T MISS.  This should go without saying, but a lot of people simply do not
      get this.  If you miss, you run the risk of TERRIBLE THINGS happening in the
      background.  This is rather innocent in the Village set, with just smoke or
      feathers or insects obstructing your view, but in the Castle set, you run the
      risk of triggering a catapult launch, which I've seen destroy many an Ashley
      target.  Even if you take gut shots with all the targets, that's 1250 points
      right there, plus whatever you get from the Salazar targets (2500 possible
      points, 3000 if you don't miss at all), that's 3750 (4250) points you could
      get all the time.
    * DON'T PASS UP ON SALAZAR TARGETS.  I know it's a pain to pull out that rifle
      and snipe some teensy little head sliding across the back row, but would you
      rather get 100-200 points from that headshot, or 500 big ones?  Besides,
      Salazar targets DO show up on your consecutive kills counter.
    * DON'T MISS THE DYNAMITE MEN.  Every once in a while, dynamite men will appear
      holding an explosive.  If you shoot the explosive, you take out all the
      surrounding targets, sometimes earning headshot caliber points.
    * DON'T WORRY ABOUT AMMO.  Seriously, there are twenty-five targets.  You'd
      have to be nuts to waste all that ammo that quickly.  Reload when you need to
      and during the designated reload times, but don't worry too much.  Don't
      bother to reload after the game either, because once you hit the bell again,
      your supplies (and your current weapon) is automatically refilled.
    * DON'T USE THE GRENADE.  This is more of a style thing for me, but I don't
      like using the grenade here because the blast radius thing is just a pain to
      calculate out and it wastes time to pick one up, throw, wait, explode, switch
      guns, etc.
    
    You are rewarded for completing "rows" (five regular, one rare) of six bottle
    caps.  Each row has a specific psta reward, so going to the shooting range is
    very much worth your while.
    
    First Row: 15000 PSTAs
    Second Row: 25000 PSTAs
    Third Row: 35000 PSTAs
    Fourth Row: 50000 PSTAs
    
    ========================
    =  09: ASSIGNMENT ADA  =
    ========================
    
    Assignment Ada is a mini-game much in line with the previous RE mini-games,
    like 4th Survivor in RE2.  You control Ada and make a run through some of the
    areas of the island that Leon already trekked through, facing an absurd number
    of enemies and struggling with the limitations of the character.  Unlike the
    other mini-games in the past, you not only have an ultimate destination to
    reach, but you also have to pick up five PLAGAS SAMPLES scattered around the
    first part of the island.  Though you won't have to face regenerators or
    anything of that sort, you will have your work cut out for you and will even
    have to face a boss character at the end of your journey.
    
    Ada starts out with a setup much like her arsenal in Mercenaries mode.  She
    comes with a PUNISHER (1.9 FP, 0.33 FS, 1.47 RS, 20 CAP), 30 bullets, a TMP
    (1.2 FP, 0.10 FS, 1.93 RS, 100 CAP), 50 ammo, a RIFLE (SEMI-AUTO) (15.0 FP,
    1.43 FS, 1.90 RS, 12 CAP), a scope, 5 shots, a HAND GRENADE, and a FIRST-AID
    SPRAY, all crammed into a 6 x 10 case.  In other words, you'll be dealing with
    a lot of item management in this mission.  Fortunately, if you die, you'll
    just restart in the area you were just in, and you have an infinite number of
    chances to complete the mission.
    
    **LOWER CLIFFS**
    ENEMIES: FIVE COMMANDOS (before camp)
             ~SEVENTEEN COMMANDOS, ONE GATLING COMMANDO (in camp)
             THREE COMMANDOS (after camp)
    
    Head around and jump down the path after the scene plays.  You'll see two
    COMMANDOS ahead, so plug both of them and move on.  You'll reach a fork, with
    one COMMANDO ahead, and one across the bridge on the right.  Go straight first,
    and climb up the cliffside (using some physics-hatin' moves) where you can find
    two boxes with a YELLOW HERB and a HAND GRENADE.  You'll have to shoot them
    open, as Ada has no knife.  Climb back down and cross the bridge to find
    another COMMANDO (one from earlier should have followed you to the cliffs), so
    kill him before moving on.
    
    There's HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on a box on the other side of the jump.  Three
    COMMANDOS will be waiting in the "courtyard", so kill all of them first.
    Climbing up the ladder in the right-hand building will net you a FIRST-AID
    SPRAY, but if you move around too much, you'll eventually release the GATLING
    COMMANDO and a few of his cronies.  The best method here is to stay up on top,
    wait for him to jump up, and keep on plugging rifle shots into his head until
    he collapses (four or so).  Keep aware, as COMMANDOS will keep coming up while
    you're here.  The big guy will drop a valuable HAND GRENADE when he croaks.
    Since there's no time limit in this quest, stick around up here until you've
    killed all the COMMANDOS climbing up, roughly eleven, and sniped off the
    remaining three with crossbows.
    
    Now to raid the encampment.  There's TMP AMMO (25) below in the adjacent tower,
    a GREEN HERB near the boxes and sandbags, HANDGUN BULLETS (10) in the far
    tower, RIFLE SHOTS (5) on top of it, TMP AMMO (25) on the upper sandbag
    area, and a GREEN HERB to the left of the stairs.
    
    Inside the caves, grab the YELLOW HERB behind the sandbags and continue on.  In
    the entrance to the second cave, you'll see three COMMANDOS on the other side,
    so snipe them all before collecting the goodies in the barrels here.  In the
    far corner, beyond the ladder in the third cave, there's a RED HERB for the
    taking.
    
    **UPPER CLIFFS**
    ENEMIES: TWENTY COMMANDOS
    
    So much for being covert, as a COMMANDO will spot you and will alert the others
    as soon as you reach the top.  Turn around and kill him, then head out.  To the
    left, in barrels, you can find a GREEN HERB and RIFLE SHOTS (5).  Two COMMANDOS
    will have jumped the gap to join you, so take them out (for some reason, this
    part is the worst in the game in terms of lag).  Jump through the window and
    head into the cave interior, grabbing HANDGUN BULLETS (10) from the table, a
    YELLOW HERB from the right fork, and a HAND GRENADE from the lynx chest on the
    left fork.  You may run into a couple of COMMANDOs on your way out of here.
    
    Outside in the searchlight area, another COMMANDO will yell at you.  Take him
    out and deal with the other COMMANDO incoming on the right.  When you reach the
    box blockade, snipe the shield COMMANDO in the far distance, or failing that,
    get the nearby dynamite COMMANDO to blow up at a convenient time.  Two more
    COMMANDOS, one of them with more dynamite, will be crowded around the explosive
    barrel above, so detonate that and take the two birds out.  Head up into the
    upper cave area, which will alert more COMMANDOS (most importantly, kill the
    crossbow).  Inside the cave is another RED HERB.  On your way back down, you'll
    have one, possibly two COMMANDOS to kill.  Grab the TMP AMMO (25) off the box
    on your way up the hill.  At the top, a shield COMMANDO will come after you,
    but it's nothing the tmp can't handle.
    
    On the other side of the door, you'll have to deal with three COMMANDOS that
    will spawn behind you, and one of them has a shield.  Up ahead, on the box,
    you'll find RIFLE SHOTS (5) and two COMMANDO targets (with crossbows) in the
    distance.  Snipe 'em and continue on, up the ladder, and use the amazing
    "infiltrate" command to get inside the base (the door below is locked).
    
    **MEDICAL FACILITY**
    ENEMIES: TWO COMMANDOS
    
    Down the stairs to the left, you'll find a COMMANDO, and beyond him, a goodies
    room with TMP AMMO (25) and a GREEN HERB.  Back up top, head to the left first,
    grabbing the GREEN HERB at the junction and the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) from the
    red box.  The box further down has RIFLE SHOTS (5) and another COMMANDO, which
    is easily dispatched.  Head through the double doors at the end.
    
    **OPERATING ROOM**
    ENEMIES: SIX COMMANDOS
    
    Head through the auto-door and grab the TMP AMMO (25) from the desk.  You'll
    be able to see two COMMANDOS through the window, so run inside and kill both
    (or shoot through the glass, whatever).  Another YELLOW HERB inside is your
    reward.
    
    Back in the other room, you'll find one COMMANDO inside and three more
    COMMANDOS will spawn behind you.  Grab the HANDGUN BULLETS (10) off the table
    when you've dealt with all of the above, then pick up your first PLAGAS SAMPLE
    from the corpse on the other side of the table.  Nothing left to do here...
    
    **MEDICAL FACILITY**
    
    Head to the other side of the junction and the...
    
    **CRYO STORAGE**
    
    No enemies here, but to the right near the freezer controls is some RIFLE SHOTS
    (5), to the left on the boxes is a GREEN HERB, in the back cabinets is a HAND
    GRENADE, and in the freezer itself, another PLAGAS SAMPLE.
    
    **MEDICAL FACILITY**
    ENEMIES: SEVEN COMMANDOS
    
    By the case ahead is one crossbow COMMANDO, and another shield COMMANDO will
    round the corner to get to you.  Two COMMANDOS, one big, will be in that area
    as well, and three more COMMANDOS, another big one and two shields, will come
    in from the other side.  Back yourself in by the case and throw a grenade, then
    kill off whoever's stunned.  The case holds more TMP AMMO (25), and the red
    box has a RED HERB.  Head out the door at the end.
    
    **WASTE DISPOSAL**
    ENEMIES: FOURTEEN COMMANDOS, ONE GATLING COMMANDO
    
    HANDGUN BULLETS (10) at the end of the hall.  Open the door and take out two
    COMMANDOS inside, then grab the RIFLE SHOTS (5) from the desk.  Down below in
    the lower area are three more COMMANDOS and the GATLING COMMANDO, so clear a
    path with a grenade, then snipe the gat 'til he's floored, being wary of any
    commandos coming from the ladder.  When you jump down, two dynamite COMMANDOS
    will spawn and run out, but they're easily dealt with now.  Grab the RED HERB
    near the dumpster, then leave out the other side.  Up in the computer room,
    two more COMMANDOS will be waiting, but one will lock the door.  Kill them,
    take the TMP AMMO (25) from the table, and unlock the door.  Five COMMANDOS
    will rush in, so kill them too before you leave.
    
    **HOLDING AREA**
    ENEMIES: THREE COMMANDOS
    
    There's a YELLOW HERB on the right-hand corner as you're going down the hall,
    and you can find another HAND GRENADE in the red cabinet.  Three COMMANDOS
    (two shields) will be waiting in the cell.  Kill them, grab the HANDGUN BULLETS
    (10) from the table (if needed), the TMP AMMO (25) from the box (again), but
    the goal is the PLAGAS SAMPLE in back.  Pick that up and take the other door
    out of here.
    
    **X-RAY ROOM**
    ENEMIES: FIVE COMMANDOS (pre-locked door)
             FIVE COMMANDOS, ONE GATLING COMMANDO (locked door)
             FIVE COMMANDOS (post locked door)
    
    You won't have to deal with anything until you bust through that door on the
    right, but once you do, there's two COMMANDOS on the other side, and three
    more down the stairs.  If you're able, take the TMP AMMO (25) from the desk
    on top, the RED HERB at the bottom of the stairs, and the HANDGUN BULLETS (10)
    in the windowsill.
    
    Just when you think you're in the clear, a bunch of shield COMMANDOS (four or
    five) and a GATLING COMMANDO will bust in when you try to open the door.  Huck
    a grenade up the stairs, then deal with the gat at your discretion.  Gatty
    drops a FIRST-AID SPRAY when he croaks.
    
    Behind the previously locked door are three COMMANDOs, one shield, to be killed
    as soon as possible.  In the old save room beyond it are two dynamite COMMANDOs
    to be dealt with under the same philosophy.  In their room is another YELLOW
    HERB and TMP AMMO (25).
    
    **EXPERIMENT ROOM**
    ENEMIES: THREE COMMANDOS (pre-lock)
             THREE COMMANDOS (lock)
             SEVEN COMMANDOS (post-lock)
    
    Behind the door is a single COMMANDO, clearly asking for it.  On the table
    beyond him, a GREEN HERB.  Two more COMMANDOs will come in from the storage
    area, but they're just as easily killed.  In the case on the right, there's
    some HANDGUN BULLETS (10).  Jump into the storage area and pick up boxes of
    RIFLE SHOTS (5 x 2), TMP AMMO (25 x 2), and HANDGUN BULLETS (10 x 2) as you see
    fit, leaving enough room for one more item.  On the far side of the room,
    there's a GREEN HERB, a RED HERB, and a YELLOW HERB too.  Same principle
    applies though.  Take what you need, the bust one of the bigger tubes and grab
    a PLAGAS SAMPLE.
    
    This will lock the joint up.  Three COMMANDOS will bust through the open area
    at this time, so kill them all and return to the area with the case to access
    the security panel.
    
    More bad news once that happens, as seven COMMANDOS, two of them big, three
    with shields, are waiting on the other side.  Kill them all, restock as needed
    (regular bullets are not a priority now, if you're stocking on need), and head
    through the door, taking the TMP AMMO (25) on the box if you need that too.
    
    **CONTROL TOWER**
    ENEMIES: Oh, just you wait...
    
    Head forward to meet up with the boss of this mission...
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[ADA'S BOSS FIGHT: JACK KRAUSER]+                                           |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |The first thing you'll want to do is to run to the far side by the lift and  |
    |stand ground there, seeing if you can snipe Krauser from there.  This battle |
    |will be a lot like Leon's, in that involves a lot of dodging, but Krauser    |
    |will also shield himself a lot more often, which means you either have to    |
    |shoot his legs out or toss grenades, which can be invaluable.  When he slips |
    |and leaves himself open for attacks, open up on him with either the TMP or   |
    |some carefully aimed rifle shots (his claw clips in a weird way).  Keep      |
    |dodging and run back and forth as need be, but if you get a little tight on  |
    |ammo, you can pick up TMP AMMO (100), HANDGUN BULLETS (30), and a FIRST-AID  |
    |SPRAY from the barrels.  The best route here is to shoot him when he pauses  |
    |after an attack, particularly if he's attacking from above.                  |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    When Krauser's had enough (a lot less punishment than he does with Leon, mind
    you), he'll drop the final PLAGAS SAMPLE and you're free to take the lift out
    of here.  Use the controls up above to signal for your ride.  Enjoy the weird
    ending.  The repeat showing, oddly enough, is sort of different from the
    original (wide screen, different colors, different music).
    
    ===============================
    =  10: MERCENARIES MINI-GAME  =
    ===============================
    
    The Mercenaries game is a far cry from the version you knew from RE3.  Instead
    of sending you on a mad course from one end of an area to another, the
    programmers have chosen to use four open locations and have five characters
    battle it out there with one thing on their mind: extermination of the ganados.
    
    The system of pure time bonuses and kills for money has also been scrapped to
    make way for time capsules, bonus boxes, and additional points for consecutive
    kills.  The last of which is probably the most crucial to gamepaly as tens of
    kills in a row can translate to tens of thousands of points as you get to the
    higher numbers (30 consecutive alone can often net 20000+).  Of course, it
    won't be that easy, and each level will feature a unique enemy that will appear
    after so many kills.  Are you up for the challenge?
    
    60000+ points = *****
    30000+ points = ****
    16000+ points = ***
    7500+  points = **
    <7500  points = *
    
    ================
    =  CHARACTERS  =
    ================
    
    Each character features their own attributes, weapons, and stage music.  The
    only similarity is that each has a 6 x 10 attache case to store items in.
    
     ------------------
    |LEON SCOTT KENNEDY|
     ------------------
    
    Like almost all default characters, Leon has average abilities: average speed,
    average firepower, average endurance, average melee attack.  Unlike all the
    other characters that follow him, Leon doesn't start out with any grenades
    (though he can pick them up around the levels) and will instead have to rely
    on his Blacktail and Riot Gun.  The Blacktail, as you should know by now,
    handles better than just about any other gun, so use it for sniping and gunning
    down distant enemies when you need to keep your consecutive kills run going.
    Use the Riot Gun in the traditional manner when enemies get too close, and take
    off heads when you get the chance.  Since enemies drop a lot of ammo in this
    mode, there's no shame in using the Riot Gun about 90% of the time and
    switching over to the Blacktail when you need the range (as you should have
    figured out by now, the Riot Gun is all but useless when shooting at distant
    enemies).
    
    INVENTORY:
    
    BLACKTAIL (2.7 FP, 0.40 FS, 1.47 RS, 21 CAP, 2 x 3)
    HANDGUN BULLETS (30, 1 x 2)
    RIOT GUN (7.0 FP, 1.53 FS, 1.50 RS, 13 CAP, 2 x 8)
    SHOTGUN SHELLS (10, 1 x 2)
    FIRST-AID SPRAY
    
     --------
    |ADA WONG|
     --------
    
    Ada's a bit hard to get used to, unless you've already beaten her assignment by
    now.  Following the pattern for a lot of female characters in video games, she
    is by far the fastest character (though her model seems to move at the same
    rate as every other), she can't take too much punishment, and her melees of
    fan kick and back kick are all but worthless in terms of damage.  Her weaponry
    (no, not ballistics) isn't terribly inspired either, and hard to get used to.
    She has an upgraded Punisher, which is still pretty awful and means you'll have
    to get used to shooting through enemies.  The other weapons include the best
    TMP in mercs (your bread and butter), a scoped semi-auto Rifle (for bigger
    enemies), and handful of incendiary grenades.  The Punisher helps out in the
    narrower areas, while the TMP/grenade combo works wonders in the open ones.
    As for the Rifle, well, it's power is such that you can at least stun most of
    the bigger enemies and kill some of them (like the Garrador) outright.  Get
    four stars in the village and she's all yours.  
    
    INVENTORY:
    
    PUNISHER (1.9 FP, 0.33 FS, 1.47 RS, 20 CAP, exclusive, 2 x 3)
    HANDGUN BULLETS (30, 1 x 2)
    TMP (1.0 FP, 0.10 FS, 1.93 RS, 100 CAP, 2 x 3)
    TMP AMMO (100, 1 x 2)
    RIFLE (SEMI-AUTO) (15.0 FP, 0.40 FS exclusive, 1.90 RS, 12 CAP, 2 x 7)
    SCOPE (SEMI-AUTO RIFLE) (1 x 3)
    RIFLE SHOTS (5, 1 x 2)
    INCENDIARY GRENADES (3, 1 x 2 each)
    FIRST-AID SPRAY
    
     ------------
    |JACK KRAUSER|
     ------------
    
    You'll never defeat Krauser with your power!  Hmm, I mean... Krauser comes
    equipped with a bow that, for the most part, will instant kill if you hit the
    head or the torso (and sometimes other places).  The downside is that pulling
    back the bowstring takes some time and aiming it tends to be a pain.  Krauser
    also comes equipped with a number of flash grenades, which come in handy as his
    stationary kick tends to kill most things in one hit.  While he doesn't have
    any wide spread weapon to speak of, you can press X to transform his arm when
    it glows red, then either A to attack or B to cancel.  This attack will
    literally vaporize every enemy within a certain radius, including the uniques
    of each level.  Controls crowds like no other.  For that reason, I find him to
    be the easiest character to play as.  You can acquire him by getting four stars
    in the castle level.
    
    INVENTORY:
    
    KRAUSER'S BOW (10.0 FP, 0.03 FS, 0.03 RS, 3 x 7)
    ARROWS (20, 1 x 4)
    ARROWS (10, 1 x 4)
    FLASH GRENADE (4, 1 x 2 each)
    FIRST-AID SPRAY (1 x 2)
    
     ----
    |HUNK|
     ----
    
    A favorite of the older fans.  Hunk doesn't have anything resembling his
    equipments from RE2, and now comes with a Custom TMP which is about as strong
    as a handgun and a bunch of hand grenades.  So far as large masses of enemies
    go, and even the occasional unique monster, this works surprisingly well, so
    long as you're perfectly aware of what's going on around you.  Unfortunately,
    none of these attacks are particularly precise, so allowing enemies to attack
    you from a distance is unadvised, seeing as you have no means to snipe them.
    Keep close to crowds with him, and try to rack up points by mowing down lots
    of enemies.  They should drop enough grenades and ammo to keep you stocked for
    a while.  If not, Hunk's stationary attack is the neck snap, which has the
    capacity to kill any enemy instantaneously, except the Garradors in the castle
    area.  Stick to your guns when you can, moving around mostly when you're being
    sniped, run out of kills, or are in dire need of picking up some extra time.
    Four stars in the island level will unlock Hunk.
    
    INVENTORY:
    
    CUSTOM TMP (1.0 FP, 0.10 FS, 1.17 RS, 100 CAP, 2 x 4)
    TMP AMMO (50, 1 x 2)
    HAND GRENADES (3, 1 x 2 each)
    FIRST-AID SPRAY (1 x 2)
    
     -------------
    |ALBERT WESKER|
     -------------
    
    Ah, Wesker... He comes equipped with a fully-upgraded (read as "more
    headshots") handgun and a silencer which, while undeniably stylish, is utterly
    useless.  In addition, he also has a level 2 Killer7, a Rifle (semi-auto)
    that's maxed out in all categories, except reload speed (yes, that includes the
    exclusive firing speed upgrade), four hand grenades, three flash grenades, and
    one incendiary grenade.  Why the flash grenades you ask?  Wesker's unique
    stationary attack is the thrust punch, which will rocket any enemy across the
    sceen until they hit a wall, and even does a little bit of collateral damage
    along the way.  His secondary attack, an overhead chikyo chaki kick, will bring
    the foot down on any enemy for massive damage.  The only drawback to Wesker is
    that he seems to take damage rather easily, but this can be overcome by his
    ability to get an instant kill at any range in a very short period of time.
    This is particularly useful for keeping the "in a row" tally going, and I once
    got through the entire Castle level (144 kills!) without one of them being
    non-consecutive.  It takes four stars in the waterworld to release this beast.
    
    INVENTORY:
    
    HANDGUN (2.0 FP, 0.33 FS, 0.87 RS, 25 CAP, exclusive, 2 x 3)
    SILENCER (1 x 2)
    KILLER7 (30.0 FP, 0.70 FS, 1.53 RS, 10 CAP, 2 x 4)
    RIFLE (SEMI-AUTO) (15.0 FP, 0.40 FS (exclusive), 1.90 RS, 24 CAP, 2 x 7)
    HAND GRENADE (4, 1 x 2)
    FLASH GRENADE (3, 1 x 2)
    ICENDIARY GRENADE (1 x 2)
    FIRST-AID SPRAY
    
    ============
    =  LEVELS  =
    ============
    
    Levels contain bonus boxes, time capsules, and explosive barrels all in various
    positions, but trying to stay alive may require different methods for each.
    
    (High Scores aren't anything I've worked on, just my end score with each
    character as I was trying to get the five-star ratings.  My real scores are
    actually quite a bit higher in most areas)
    
     -------
    |VILLAGE|
     -------
    
    HIGH SCORE:
    Krauser: 96910
    
    The village is basically the same as you knew it in the regular game, except
    the barn back near the tower is now open, as is the one near the entrance
    Leon used to initially enter it.  Aside from the window facing the first of
    these barns and the fact that the back end of the open barn in the game is
    closed, the buildings are pretty much the same.  Time capsules can be found in
    all of the barns, behind the tower, and inside the locked room from the game
    (which now has the window), while bonus boxes show up in the locked room, 
    behind the house next to the one that had the shotgun in the regular game, and
    in the loft of the unlocked barn near the entrance.  The start locations are
    the path off the main Leon entrance, next to the tower, and on top of one of
    the houses, which is by far the worst spot.  My approach is to hide in the
    barn near the tower or the locked room and tear through the packs of enemies
    there, but after that I usually climb into the loft in the unlocked barn.  The
    ladder that leads to the top there can be pushed off, and after picking up the
    bonus, you can go on a massive killing spree from that very spot.  The unique
    enemies for this area are the Bella Sisters, who will be chasing you around
    with their chainsaws in packs of two.  The game has no problem with having up
    to six of them chasing you at a time.  When things get dicey, hide in the loft
    killing what you can, and if you run out of ammo, toss down a grenade (flash
    preferred, but others are OK), jump down, pick up what you can, and tear out
    of there to another corner (possibly the one near the entrance).  If you get
    four stars here, you'll unlock Ada Wong.
    
     ------
    |CASTLE|
     ------
    
    HIGH SCORE:
    Wesker: 110910
    
    This level is the castle area at the beginning of chapter three where you first
    encountered the catapults and Los Illuminados.  The only possible starting
    point is the bottom area near where the cannon started out, but this really is
    the lowest spot in the level as the stairs leading to the merchant have been
    bricked off.  In addition, the second level doesn't have a bridge, so you'll
    get up there by the door at the end of the first floor walkway, and that leads
    up to the old storage room.  You can run across to the upper cannon area, but
    you can also hang a right and go up another level.  This balcony area will
    eventually lead to the castle gates, which have been moved up a level, but
    there will be a scene and a bunch of purple illuminados will start pouring into
    the area.  If you haven't figured it out yet, black illuminados are the enemy
    du jour here and have the usual tricks, but the worst part is that there are
    crossbow illuminados who will constantly be sniping you from the upper levels.
    Even if you kill them, they seem to respawn back, albeit at a slower rate.  To
    add injury to insult (in this case), Garradors spawn periodically as the unique
    enemy, the first one coming as you kill your thirtieth enemy or when you go to
    the upper cannon area, whichever comes first.  As many as three of them appear
    the gates, but I've only seen it happen once.  For that reason, this is
    probably the most difficult area and is absolute hell for Hunk, who has no
    easy means of killing a Garrador.  If you're wondering how I pulled off the
    high score in light of that, I got 50 consecutive kills, then 20, then 30, and
    most of that was luck (i.e. huck a grenade into the crowd then run into the
    fray, spin around while Garrador is still stunned and plug him with the rifle)
    Time capsules will pop up near the gazebo, the lack of bridge, the upper cannon
    area, the upper storage area, two on the balcony, and one behind the gates.
    Bonus boxes come in upper cannon, upper storage, and behind the gates.  I
    recommend staying on the lower level until your time is almost gone, making as
    many consecutive kills as possible, then making a mad dash for the upper levels
    and moving on from there.  Get four stars and Krauser will become available.
    
     ------
    |ISLAND|
     ------
    
    HIGH SCORE:
    Krauser: 93390
    
    Remember the first stage of the helicopter seige on the island?  Probably not,
    as you had little time to explore it, but this is it.  The three starting
    places are at the main entrance in front of the four-story tower, on top of the
    tower, and in the tunnels to the side of where you opened the big door before
    (which is now absent).  The enemies here feature the usual suspects from the
    commando crowd, along with the gatling commando (J.J.) who appears on occasion
    as the unique enemy.  The only commandos you have to worry about are the ones
    with rocket launchers and the occasional cattle prod wielder who will sneak up
    on you.  The worst thing you have to deal with is the gats, who will shoot
    around corners and through the thinner walls to get you.  Occasionally, they'll
    camp near an area with a lot of open space and spray you again that way, which
    is bad, so either find a tunnel to escape in (and there are PLENTY) or kill him
    from a distance.  Time capsules are everywhere here, with one in the corner
    near the tower, one on the second floor, two on the third, one on the fourth,
    one near the sandbags by the entrance, one atop the platform across the way and
    another under the ladder that leads to it, one on either side of the rope
    swing thing, and one in the tunnel passage off the third floor of the tower.
    Bonus boxes can be found on the fourth floor of the tower, on the platform at
    the other side of the level, and at the end of the rope swing.  There are no
    convenient corners worth camping in where enemies can't get you, so hang out
    near the boxes and when you run out of things to kill, run to another area.
    Four stars here gets you Hunk.
    
     ----------
    |WATERWORLD|
     ----------
    
    HIGH SCORE:
    Ada: 97960
    
    This is an all new level that has nothing to do with the game, and can be a bit
    hard to explain as a result.  The three starting places are in front of the
    tower, on top of the tower, and inside the east barracks.  If you end up on top
    of the tower, just like in the previous level, you'll probably die.  Time
    capsules are found on the second tower level, the fourth tower level, one at
    either entrance of the west barracks, one inside the west barracks and one on
    top, one on the elevated platform near the east barracks, three in or around
    the east barracks and one on top of them.  Bonus boxes can be found on the
    north side of the east barracks, on the roof of the west barracks, and near the
    central elevated platform.  The enemies are more commandos, with the same
    issues as last time, but the unique enemies are berserkers that can appear
    three at a time just like in the island.  This is incredibly bad new.  Since
    the level is so open, it's also impossible to find a good corner, so either
    seek one out in the barracks or camp near the bonus boxes.  Climbing on top of
    the tower is a very bad idea as berserkers will jump the ladders.  Hiding near
    the north entrance to the east barracks is also a terrible idea as commandos
    with shields spawn up the stairs from there near constantly and would like
    nothing more than to slam you at every opportunity.  Stay calm and you'll make
    it through here, with Wesker as your reward if you get four stars.
    
    ==========================
    =  11: FILE TRANSCRIPTS  =
    ==========================
    
    All files were transcribed by me.  Spelling errors in this are most likely
    direct transcriptions from the game, i.e. "an incredible speeds" in File #23.
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #01: PLAYING MANUAL 1                              /
    FOUND IN: DEFAULT                                       \
                                                            /
                      PLAYING MANUAL 1                      \
                                                            /
     1. Shooting - Hold down the R button then use the      \
             Control Stick to aim the laser sight.          /
                                                            \
        2. Combat Knife - Press and hole the L button       /
        to ready your knife then press the A button to      \
                     swing the weapon.                      /
                                                            \
     3. Action Button - You'll be able to perform various   /
         actions by pressing the appropriate buttons        \
                 that appear on the screen.                 /
                                                            \
        4. Camera - You can change the camera angle         /
                    by moving the C stick.                  \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #02: INFO ON ASHLEY                                /
    FOUND IN: DEFAULT                                       \
                                                            /
    Info on Ashley                                          \
                                                            /
    Name: Ashley Graham                                     \
    Age: 20                                                 /
    Daughter of the United States President                 \
                                                            /
    She was kidnapped by an unidentified group              \
    while on her way home from her university.              /
                                                            \
    The kidnapper's motives are still unknown.              /
    Although there's reliable information that              \
    the perpetrator is an insider.                          /
                                                            \
    Only a handful of people know about this                /
    kidnapping.  It's been kept under wraps mostly          \
    due to the fact that we can't determine who             /
    the traitor is.                                         \
                                                            /
    The guys in intelligence say they have reliable         \
    information that Ashley's been sighted somewhere        /
    in Europe.  But until we find out who the insider is,   \
    I don't know what to believe.  It could be a ploy.      /
                                                            \
    We have very few leads as to the whereabouts            /
    of Ashley.  But members of the Secret Service           \
    and anyone else related to Ashley are being             /
    questioned by an investigative team.                    \
                                                            /
    Even active agents are being investigated for           \
    any information.  It's just a matter of time            /
    before the kidnapper is exposed.                        \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #03: PLAYING MANUAL 2                              /
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO                                        \
                                                            /
                      PLAYING MANUAL 2                      \
                                                            /
       1. Reloading - Press the B Button while holding      \
           down the R button to reload your firearm.        /
                                                            \
        2. Kicks - Approaching enemies that are either      /
         stunned or on their knees will allow Leon to       \
        perform kicks as prompted by the action button.     /
                                                            \
       3. Changing Inventory Screens - Use the L and R      /
         Buttons to switch back and forth between the       \
      Weapons / Revorery and the Keys / Treasure Screens.   /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #04: ALERT ORDER                                   /
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO                                        \
                                                            /
    ALERT ORDER                                             \
                                                            /
    Recently there has been information that a              \
    United States government agent is here                  /
    investigating the village.                              \
                                                            /
    Do not let this American agent get in contact           \
    with the prisoner.                                      /
                                                            \
    For those of you not yet informed, the prisoner is      /
    being held in an old house beyond the farm.  We will    \
    transfer the prisoner to a more secure location in      /
    the valley when we are ready.  The prisoner is to       \
    stay there until further notice.  Meanwhile, do not     /
    let the American agent near the prisoner.               \
                                                            /
    We do not know how the American government              \
    found out about our village.  But we are                /
    investigating.                                          \
                                                            /
    However, I feel that this intrusion at this             \
    particular time is not just a coincidence.              /
                                                            \
    I sense a third party other than the United States      /
    government involved here.                               \
                                                            /
    My fellow men, stay alert!                              \
                                                            /
                              -Chief, Bitores Mendez        \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #05: ABOUT THE BLUE MEDALLIONS                     /
    FOUND IN: FARM                                          \
                                                            /
    Aout the Blue Medallions                                \
                                                            /
    15 blue medallions                                      \
    7 in the farm...  8 in the cemetery...                  /
                                                            \
    For those of you who destroy more than                  /
    10 medallions you will be awarded...                    \
                                                            /
    (The rest is illegible.)                                \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #06: CHIEF'S NOTE                                  /
    FOUND IN: MENDEZ' BEDROOM                               \
                                                            /
    Chief's Note                                            \
                                                            /
    As instructed by Lord Saddler, I have the agent in      \
    confinement, alive.  Why keep him alive?  I do not      /
    fully understand what the Lord's intentions are.        \
                                                            /
    I would, however, think he'd keep them separate;        \
    not confine them together as has been ordered.          /
                                                            \
    I don't expect Luis would trust a stranger but if       /
    by chance they did cooperate, the situation could       \
    get a bit more complicated.                             /
                                                            \
    If for some reason, an unknown third party is           /
    involved, I don't think they'd let a chance like        \
    this slip by.                                           /
                                                            \
    But maybe it's all Lord Saddler's ploy - leaving        /
    us vulnerable so that this third party will surface,    \
    if they even exist that is...                           /
                                                            \
    It's an unlikely possibility, but if a prowler is       /
    already amongst us, then our plans could be ruined.     \
                                                            /
    I guess the Lord thinks it's worth the risk, if         \
    we're able to stop whatever conspiracy is at work.      /
                                                            \
    At any rate, it's the Lord's call.                      /
    We will trust his judgement as always.                  \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #07: CLOSURE OF THE CHURCH                         /
    FOUND IN: CEMETARY                                      \
                                                            /
    Closure of the Church                                   \
                                                            /
    Regarding the two fugitives, the apprehension of        \
    Luis is our top priority; the American agent a          /
    distant second.                                         \
                                                            /
    What Luis stole from us is far more important           \
    than the girl.                                          /
                                                            \
    Unless we get it back, the girl will become             /
    useless to us.  We must get it back to execute          \
    our plan to the end.                                    /
                                                            \
    If it gets in the wrong hands, the world would          /
    become a totally different place than what Lord         \
    Saddler has envisioned.                                 /
                                                            \
    At all costs, we mustn't let that happen.               /
                                                            \
    Nevertheless, we're not letting go of the girl.         /
    To ensure that the agent does not get to her,           \
    I have locked the church door where the girl is         /
    being held.                                             \
                                                            /
    Anyone who needs access to the church must              \
    first get approval by Lord Saddler.                     /
                                                            \
    There is a key beyond the lake but it should be         /
    safe now that the "Del Lago" has been awakened          \
    by our Lord.  No one will get across the lake alive.    /
                                                            \
    Plus, our same blood courses through the agent's        /
    veins.  It'll be just a matter of time before he        \
    joins us.  Once he does, there will be nobody           /
    else left that will come looking for the girl.          \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #08: ANONYMOUS LETTER                              /
    FOUND IN: CEMETARY                                      \
                                                            /
    Anonymous Letter                                        \
                                                            /
    There's an important item hidden in the falls.          \
    If you are able to get it, you might be able to         /
    get Ashley out of the church.                           \
                                                            /
    But I'll warn you, the route to the church isn't a      \
    walk in the park by any means.  They've deployed        /
    what's called an "El Gigante", so God bless.            \
                                                            /
    About what's been going on in your body...              \
    If I could help you, I would.                           /
    But unfortunately it's beyond my power.                 \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #09: PLAYING MANUAL 3                              /
    FOUND IN: CEMETARY                                      \
                                                            /
                     Playing Manual 3                       \
                                                            /
        1. Commands - Leon can give commands to Ashley      \
         to either "WAIT" or "FOLLOW" by pressing the       / 
                        X Button.                           \
                                                            /
        2. Ashley and the Action Button - Depending on      \
        the situation, Leon and Ashley can cooperate to     /
                 get past various obstacles.                \
                                                            /
        3. Ashley's Health - You can use recovery items     \
           not only on Leon but on Ashley as well.          /
                                                            \
         4. Ashley and Game Over - Leon has failed his      /
         mission if Ashley is either killed or carried      \
                     away by the enemy.                     /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #10: SERA AND THE 3RD PARTY                        /
    FOUND IN: FARM (NIGHT)                                  \
                                                            /
    Sera and the 3rd Party                                  \
                                                            /
    The whereabouts of Sera are still unknown.              \
                                                            /
    Most likely he's using an old secret passage taught     \
    to him by his grandfather who used to hunt in           /
    this region long ago.                                   \
                                                            /
    I'm pretty certain that he's hiding our property        \
    somewhere in the forest.                                /
                                                            \
    But how did he find out about the egg injected          /
    into his body?                                          \
                                                            /
    -- And the fact that he was able to remove it           \
    before it hatched is concerning.                        /
                                                            \
    Another factor that concerns me is that Sera            /
    escaped with our property just before the               \
    American agent arrived.  I don't believe that           /
    was just a coincidence.                                 \
                                                            /
    There has to be another player involved in this.        \
                                                            /
    In order to settle this whole situation, we have to     \
    capture Sera and wait for the effects of the drug       /
    to wear off before we inject him with another egg.      \
                                                            /
    Once this is done, whoever is behind all of this        \
    will surface.  Nobodt shall interfere with our          /
    plans.  Those who do shall suffer severe                \
    consequences.                                           /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #11: TWO ROUTES                                    /
    FOUND IN: CABIN                                         \
                                                            /
    Two Routes                                              \
                                                            /
    Just a while ago, I was informed by Lord Saddler        \
    that our men had shot down a United States              /
    military helicopter.                                    \
                                                            /
    There shouldn't be any more outside interference        \
    for a while now.                                        /
                                                            \
    Unless the United States government determines          /
    who the traitor is, they can only initiate very         \
    small covert operations.                                /
                                                            \
    We muse use this time to our advanage and               /
    recapture the girl.                                     \
                                                            /
    The two Americans can only get out of our               \
    territory by using one of two routes.                   /
    This is where we will stop them.                        \
                                                            /
    We shall make use of our forces to the greatest         \
    degree.                                                 /
                                                            \
    We will deplot a large number of Ganados in one         /
    of the routes to ensure that they do not slip by        \
    us.  For the other route we shall leave the task        /
    to El Gigante.  Whichever route they take, the          \
    agent will never leave here alive.  Not with the        /
    girl at least.                                          \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #12: VILLAGE'S LAST DEFENSE                        /
    FOUND IN: CANYON (UPPER)                                \
                                                            /
    Village's Last Defense                                  \
                                                            /
    I clearly underestimate the American agent's            \
    capability.  He's still alive.                          /
                                                            \
    I thought that we could wait until the egg hatched,     /
    but at this rate, he could destroy the whole village    \
    before it does.  We must take care of this nuisance.    /
                                                            \
    Unless we get it back, the girl will become             /
    useless to us.  We must get it back to execute          \
    our plan to the end.                                    /
                                                            \
    We shall change our priorities - for the time being,    /
    we will cease our hunt for Luis and ambush the          \
    two Americans.                                          /
                                                            \
    There is a building used to enlighten betrayers just    /
    beyond the point where you get off the lift.            \
                                                            /
    It's a perfect place for ambushing them.                \
    If all else fails, they still would need to face        /
    me in order to get past the last gate that leads        \
    out of the village.                                     /
                                                            \
    For only before my sight will the gate open.            /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #13: CAPTURE LUIS SERA                             /
    FOUND IN: CEMETARY                                      \
                                                            /
    Capture Luis Sera                                       \
                                                            /
    I have confirmation that Sera has entered               \
    the castle.                                             /
                                                            \
    Why he would return during his escape                   /
    leaves me to question his motives.  But we              \
    must seize this moment and capture him.                 /
                                                            \
    We will get the other two Americans after               /
    we apprehend Sera.                                      \
                                                            /
    It appears he took some vaccines when he stole          \
    our "sample".  The vaccines we can do without           /
    but we must retrieve the "sample" for it is our         \
    life blood.                                             /
                                                            \
    I feel there is somebody else or some other             /
    group involved in this whole affair.                    \
                                                            /
    If the "sample" were to get into the hands of           \
    the other entity, the world which we seek to            /
    create will not come.  We must apprehend Sera           \
    as quickly as possible.                                 /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #14: TARGET PRACTICE                               /
    FOUND IN: TARGET PRACTICE 1                             \
                                                            /
    Target Practice                                         \
                                                            /
     - Game Rules -                                         \
    1. Receive prizes by scoring above 3000 points.         /
                                                            \
    2. Bonus points will be awarded for headshots.          /
                                                            \
     - Game Rules - (cont'd)                                /
    3. A high-scoring Salazar targer will appear with       \
    5 consecutive hits.                                     /
                                                            \
    4. Shooting an Ashley target will deduct points.        /
                                                            \
     - Prizes -                                             /
    1. Normally 1 bottle cap will be awarded as a prize.    \
                                                            /
    2. Special bottle caps will be awarded by either        \
    shooting all the wooden targets except Ashley           /
    or scoring above 4,000 points.                          \
                                                            /
     - Prizes -  (cont'd)                                   \
    3. There are 24 bottle caps in all  Each time you       /
    enter a new Shooting Range, 6 new bottle caps           \
    will become available.                                  /
                                                            \
     - Special Bonuses -                                    /
    1. Each time you complete a tow on the                  \
    collector's base, you'll earn bonus points!             /
                                                            \
    2. There are a total of 4 rows.                         /
    You have 4 bonus chances!                               \
                                                            /
    Note: Bottle cap collections can be viewed in           \
          the Key / Treasures screen.                       /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #15: LUIS' MEMO                                    /
    FOUND IN: SEWER PRISON                                  \
                                                            /
    Luis' Memo                                              \
                                                            /
    There are some parasites that have the ability to       \
    control their hosts.                                    /
                                                            \
    It's basic knowledge among biologists but not           /
    much is known as to how the parasites do it.            \
                                                            /
    Studying these parasites specifically might             \
    reveal some clues to as to how the powers of            /
    the Las Plagas work.  And perhaps provide more          \
    insight on the victims of the Las Plagas, the           /
    Los Ganados.                                            \
                                                            /
    Here is a list of some parasites that have the          \
    ability to manipulate the behavioral patterns           /
    of their host.                                          \
                                                            /
      Dicrocoelium                                          \
    Once the larvae of this parasite migrates to the        /
    ant's esophagus, it alters the behavior of the ant.     \
    When the temperature drops in the evening,              /
    the infected ant climbs to the top of a plant and       \
    clamps onto a leaf using its mandible.                  /
                                                            \
    It stays there immobile until the next morning,         /
    placing the ant where it's most vulnerable to be        \
    eaten by a browsing herbivore such as sheep.            /
                                                            \
    One could conclude that the parasite is manipulating    /
    the host's behavior to make its way into the body       \
    of its definitive host.                                 /
                                                            \
      Galactosomum                                          /
    The larvae of this parasite makes its home inside       \
    the brain of a fish such as the yellowtail and the      /
    parrot bass.  Once infected, the fish make their        \
    way up to the water's surface where they'll swim        /
    until eaten by seabirds.                                \
                                                            /
    Once again, this peculiar behavior can only             \
    be explained by the parasite's desire to get into       /
    the bodies of the seabirds.                             \
                                                            /
      Leucochloridium                                       \
    This parasite's sporocysts develop in the snail's       /
    tentacles.  The sporocysts are vivid in color and       \
    pulsate continually somewhat like a form.               /
                                                            \
    Surprisingly the infected snail makes its way to        /
    the top of a plant where it is more visible to the      \
    eyes of birds, therefore more likely to be eaten.       /
                                                            \
    Once eaten by a bird, the parasite will complete        /
    its metamorphosis into an adult.                        \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #16: CASTELLAN MEMO                                /
    FOUND IN: GALLERY                                       \
                                                            /
    Castellan Memo                                          \
                                                            /
    For many years the Salazar family has served            \
    as the castellans of this castle.  However, not         /
    everything is bright, for my ancestry has a             \
    dark past.                                              /
                                                            \
    Long ago there once was a religious group that          /
    had deep roots in this region called the                \
    Los Illuminados.  Unjustly however, the first           /
    castellan of the castle took away their rights          \
    and powers.                                             /
                                                            \
    As a follower of this religion and as the               /
    8th Castellan, I felt that it was my duty as well       \
    as my responsibility to atone for that sin.             /
                                                            \
    I knew the best way to atone for the sin was to give    /
    power back to those who we once took it away from,      \
    the Los Illuminados.                                    /
                                                            \
    As expected it took a little time, but we were          /
    able to rejuvinate the once sealed Las Plagas.          \
    With this success I was one step closer to              /
    the revival of the Los Illuminados.                     \
                                                            /
    The reason why I released the Las Plagas from           \
    deep under this castle and gave them to Lord            /
    Saddler was not only to repay for the sins of my        \
    ancestors but I felt certain that the Lord would        /
    make better use of this power to help save the          \
    world.                                                  /
                                                            \
    To save those that have sinned with the power           /
    of the Las Plagas and to cleanse their souls            \
    creating a world without sinners.  The way it was       /
    meant to be.  Once cleansed, they would become          \
    one of the many Ganados where they will find their      /
    reason to live.                                         \
                                                            /
    And after the Lord has succeeded in creating            \
    the world in which he has envisioned, then the          /
    sins of my Salazar family will be atoned for.           \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #17: FEMALE INTRUDER                               /
    FOUND IN: BEDROOM                                       \
                                                            /
    Female Intruder                                         \
                                                            /
    There seems to be a female intruder among us.           \
    We believe she's connected with Sera.                   /
                                                            \
    We also believe that she was the one who                /
    removed the egg injected into Sera before it            \
    hatched.  She may have had him retrieve the             /
    "sample" before the American agent's arrival.           \
                                                            /
    It's obvious that her objective is the "sample".        \
    We must get to her before she is able to                /
    reestablish contact with Sera.                          \
                                                            /
    There's also reason to believe that she's working       \
    for somebody.  We need her alive for interrogation.     /
                                                            \
    The female should be able to answer all our             /
    questions.  After we have captured her, Sera            \
    will no longer be of any concern.                       /
                                                            \
    As long as we retrieve the "sample" you may             /
    dispose of him as you see fit.                          \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #18: BUTLER'S MEMO                                 /
    FOUND IN: ASHLEY'S HALL                                 \
                                                            /
    Butler's Memo                                           \
                                                            /
    Knowing that Sr. Ramon Salazar had no family,           \
    Lord Saddler must have used his strong faith in         /
    the Los Illuminados to his advantage to talk            \
    Sr. Salazar into undoing the seal of the Las            /
    Plagas once done by his ancestor.                       \
                                                            /
    Sr. Salazar would never do such as thing unless         \
    he was in some way being used unknowingly.              /
    I should have sensed the Lord's dirty scheme            \
    sooner.  I feel I'm partly responsible for all of this. /
                                                            \
    I have no idea as to what the Lord is planning,         /
    but Sr. Salazar was just being used.                    \
                                                            /
    It is too late now however, Sr. Salazar has already     \
    taken the Plaga into his body.                          /
                                                            \
    There is no turning back once the Plaga has             /
    turned into an adult in the body.                       \
                                                            /
    The Plaga parasite will not die unless the host         \
    dies.  There's no cure.  Perhaps, Sr. Salazar may       /
    have been vaguely aware fo the Lord's plan all          \
    along.  But it's hard to tell.                          /
                                                            \
    Nevertheless, there's nothing I can do about            /
    it now.                                                 \
                                                            /
    I have served the Salazar family for generations.       \
    I am prepared to continue my services until the         /
    very end.                                               \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #19: SAMPLE RETRIEVED                              /
    FOUND IN: PORTRAIT HALL                                 \
                                                            /
    Sample Retrieved                                        \
                                                            /
    As you may have heard, Luis Sera has been               \
    disposed of by Lord saddler.  The "sample" is           /
    back where it belongs.  I had hoped that the            \
    whole matter could be resolved without troubling        /
    the Lord.  However, as long as the "sample" is          \
    safe we can all rejoice, for our time is nearly         /
    at hand.                                                \
                                                            /
    Now that the "sample" is back in our safe hands,        \
    it'll be a bit more difficult for that troublesome      /
    woman to get it.  In light of all this, it's            \
    unfortunate that Sera had to go.  Like us, he           /
    would have had a bright future if only he had           \
    shown more faith in our beliefs.                        /
                                                            \
    As for the other two Americans, the Lord has            /
    left the matter in our hands.                           \
                                                            /
    We must not disappoint the Lord.  We shall              \
    capture Ashley and take her to the Lord and             /
    dispose of the American agent.                          \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #20: RITUAL PREPARATION                            /
    FOUND IN: CLOCK TOWER                                   \
                                                            /
    Ritual Preparation                                      \
                                                            /
    Thanks to the efforts of the "Novistadors",             \
    we have been able to recapture Ashley.                  /
                                                            \
    We shall prepare for the sacred ritual as               /
    quickly as possible and make Ashley an                  \
    official member of the Los Illuminados.                 /
                                                            \
    While we prepare for the ritual, those of               /
    you who feel inclined can attend to our                 \
    American friend.                                        /
                                                            \
    We should be able to hold off our friend for at         /
    least a little while by jamming the gears in the        \
    clock tower with something.                             /
                                                            \
    I think if we hame the gears in 3 places, it should     /
    give us enough time to prepare everything for           \
    the ritual.                                             /
                                                            \
    Now go and entertain our American tourist.              /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #21: LUIS' MEMO 2                                  /
    FOUND IN: MINE ENTRANCE                                 \
                                                            /
    Luis' Memo 2                                            \
                                                            /
    The first castellan buried the Las Plagas deep          \
    underground below the castle to hide their              /
    very existence.  But when Salazar released the          \
    Las Plagas, no one thought he could bring them          /
    back to life.  Because when Salazar found them          \
    they were all just fossilized remains.                  /
                                                            \
    Everyone knew that the parasitic organisms              /
    could not survive without hosts.  That they             \
    couldn't sustain life on their own.  But when           /
    Salazar and his men excavated the remains, it           \
    almost appeared as if the Las Plagas were just          /
    waiting to be discovered so that they could             \
    resurrect.                                              /
                                                            \
    Several years later, unexplainable convulsions          /
    started occurring among the villagers who               \
    helped with the excavation of the Las Plagas.           /
                                                            \
    Then one day, all of a sudden, these villagers          /
    turned into violent savages.                            \
                                                            /
    They later found out it was caused by the               \
    Las Plagas.  Although they appeared fossilized,         /
    they were able to survive the long years by             \
    lying in a dormant state at the cellular level          /
    remaining in a spore-like form.                         \
                                                            /
    Apparently, during the excavation, the villagers        \
    inhaled the spores and within their bodies the          /
    parasites became active again.  This is how the         \
    Las Plagas were resurrected.                            /
                                                            \
    Even as I'm writing, the excavation of the              /
    Las Plagas continues.                                   \
                                                            /
    God only knows how many of these Plagas                 \
    have been resurrected.  Not to mention the              /
    countless number of Ganados that have been              \
    created.                                                /
                                                            \
    Their inhumane activity must be put to an end.          /
    If they are not stopped, people around the              \
    world could turn into victims of this crazy cult        /
    organization.                                           \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #22: LETTER FROM ADA                               /
    FOUND IN: UPPER RUINS                                   \
                                                            /
    Letter from Ada                                         \
                                                            /
    Once a Plaga egg hatches, it's nearly impossible        \
    to remove it from the body.  But if it's before it      /
    hatches, then it can be neutralized by medication.      \
                                                            /
    If it does hatch you might  be able to get it out by    \
    surgery before it turns to an adult.  But it won't      /
    be easy.  There's a high chance you won't survive       \
    the operation.                                          /
                                                            \
    As far as I know the girl was injected with the         /
    egg before you.  Her time is ticking.                   \
    You should prepare yourself for the worst               /
    case scenario.                                          \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #23: LUIS' MEMO 3                                  /
    FOUND IN: OPERATING ROOM                                \
                                                            /
    Luis' Memo 3                                            \
                                                            /
    The hideous creatures such as the El Gigante            \
    and the Novistadors are merely by-products              /
    of the diabolical and inhuman experiments               \
    conducted on the specimens that were once               /
    human.                                                  \
                                                            /
    But there's one type of creature that clearly           \
    distinguishes itself from the rest.                     /
    These creatures are called Regenerators.                \
                                                            /
    Regeneratoirs have a superior metabolism that           \
    allows them to regenerate their lost body parts at      /
    an incredible speeds.                                   \
                                                            /
    I've never seen anything like it...                     \
                                                            /
    It is this characteristic that makes them almost        \
    invincible to conventional weapons.                     /
                                                            \
    But like any living creature, there's a way to kill it. /
    Apparently there are Plagas that live in its body,      \
    somewhat like leeches.                                  /
                                                            \
    To stop its regeneration process, these leech-like      /
    Plagas must be located and then destroyed.              \
                                                            /
    But they can't be seen with the naked eye,              \
    They can only be located through thermal                /
    imaging.                                                \
                                                            /
    As far as I know, most of the Regenerators host         \
    a number of these leech-like Plagas.                    /
                                                            \
    To kill the Regenerators, each one of these             /
    leech-like Plagas must be killed.                       \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #24: PAPER AIRPLANE                                /
    FOUND IN: HOLDING AREA                                  \
                                                            /
    Paper Airplane                                          \
                                                            /
    Perhaps you have figured out already, but               \
    you might be able to get out of here by using           /
    the waste disposal vent.                                \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #25: OUR PLAN                                      /
    FOUND IN: FACTORY CHAPEL                                \
                                                            /
    Our Plan                                                \
                                                            /
    Because of that agent we lost Chief Mendez              \
    and Ramon.  Nevertheless, everything will               /
    proceed according to plan.                              \
                                                            /
    I must admit however, the loss of my loyal men          \
    is a bit disheartening.  But I will deal with it.       /
                                                            \
    Replacing that loss will not come easy.  I must         /
    choose wisely; for the Plaga reflects the               \
    conscience of their hosts.  If chosen poorly,           /
    they could betray me.                                   \
                                                            /
    I need men who will swear their allegiance to me.       \
                                                            /
    I've learned my lesson when Sera betrayed me.           \
    I will not make the same mistake again.                 /
                                                            \
    In this important hour, I cannot and will not           /
    have anyone stand in my way.                            \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #26: LUIS' MEMO 4                                  /
    FOUND IN: CONTAINER YARD                                \
                                                            /
    Luis' Memo 4                                            \
                                                            /
    I'll report my findings about the Plagas here.          \
    The Plagas have 3 distinct characteristics.             /
                                                            \
    1.                                                      /
    As mentioned previously, the Plagas have the            \
    ability to manipulate the behavioral patterns           /
    of their hosts.                                         \
                                                            /
    2.                                                      \
    The Plagas are social organisms.  By this I mean        /
    that instead of living individually, they live in       \
    perfect social harmony.  It is believed that            /
    they have a collective intelligence.                    \
                                                            /
    3.                                                      \
    The Plagas have exceptional adaptation skills.          /
    They are able to live off many kinds of organisms       \
    by creating a symbiotic enviroment quickly.  This       /
    ability, when combined with their social behaviors,     \
    alows them to interact intelligently between hosts      /
    regardless of the host organism.                        \
                                                            /
    I am ashamed to admit that my pure fascination          \
    with the Plagas, in hindsight, has blinded me           /
    to the true research objectives of the Los              \
    Illuminados.                                            /
                                                            \
    Even with the knowledge that Saddler was going          /
    to abuse the results of these experiments, I could      \
    not pull myself away from my research.  As a            /
    result, I am just as responsible for this whole         \
    mess as he is.  I see now that I was wrong, but         /
    can I stop their evil plans alone...?                   \
                                                            /
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #27: KRAUSER'S NOTE                                /
    FOUND IN: SOUTHERN CAMP                                 \
                                                            /
    Krauser's Note                                          \
                                                            /
    It turns out that old man Saddler wasn't                \
    buying me from the start.                               /
                                                            \
    Even though I succeeded in kidnapping Ashley,           /
    I sort of sensed this when Saddler didn't               \
    completely let me in the loop.                          /
                                                            \
    Under the circumstances, I had no other                 /
    alternative but to call for her assistance.             \
                                                            /
    Perhaps she knew this was the way it was going          \
    to turn out all along...                                /
                                                            \
    My guess is that her ultimate goal might                /
    be different from Wesker's and mine.                    \
    This is just the perfect opportunity to find out.       /
                                                            \
    And after I get rid of Leon and retrieve the            /
    sample, I'll put her in a bodybag along with Leon       \
    and send them both to Wesker.                           /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #28: LUIS' MEMO 5                                  /
    FOUND IN: COMPUTER ROOM (outer area)                    \
                                                            /
    Luis' Memo 5                                            \
                                                            /
    From the initial stages of the research, we             \
    have been searching for a safe and practical            /
    removal procedure of the Plaga.                         \
                                                            /
    Ironically, it turns out that the real objective        \
    of this research was not to find a way to remove        /
    the Plagas from the infected persons, but to            \
    find a way so that the Plaga could not be               /
    removed from the body easily.                           \
                                                            /
    In the end, we were able to find out that the           \
    Plagas could be removed only by exposing them           /
    to a special radiation.                                 \
                                                            /
    The only drawback with this method is that              \
    it is a very painful procedure.  Since the Plaga        /
    attaches itself to the nerves, there is a               \
    possibility that it may impair the                      /
    consciousness of the host.                              \
                                                            /
    Another fact that must be mentioned is                  \
    that once the Plaga grows into an adult,                /
    the removal procedure could kill the host.              \
                                                            /
    But perhaps death isn't so bad when you                 \
    think about the alternative.                            /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                            \
    FILE #29: OUR MISSION                                   /
    FOUND IN: EXIT TUNNEL                                   \
                                                            /
    Our Mission                                             \
                                                            /
    The real power of the United States lies in three       \
    areas.  The Justice Department, the Administative       /
    bodies, and the Military.  In order to take control     \
    of these areas, we must influence the minds of          /
    the people who advise the President.                    \
                                                            /
    After this is done, the rest of the departments         \
    will quickly fall under our sway.                       /
                                                            \
    If by chance the United States were to figure out       /
    our plan, the damage caused should be minimal.          \
                                                            /
    We will still be able to conquer the country as         \
    planned using our backup plan.  Once we control         /
    the country, we will use their international            \
    influence to our advantage.                             /
                                                            \
    The rest of the world will fall swiftly.                /
                                                            \
    As already stated, if our first plan doesn't go as      /
    smoothly as expected, we'll proceed with our            \
    secondary plan.  By sending in our "special"            /
    forces we will infiltrate the country from within.      \
    Fear and chaos will spread through the nation           /
    like a virus.                                           \
                                                            /
    It'll only be a matter of time before the country       \
    loses its stability.  At that time, when they're        /
    most vulnerable, we will strike.                        \
                                                            /
    Rejoice my bretheren; the world shall soon be           \
    cleansed.                                               /
                                                            \
    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    
    ==========================
    =  12: PUZZLE SOLUTIONS  =
    ==========================
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [INSIGNIA GLOBE PUZZLE]                             +
    +                                                     +
    + In front of you will be a globe with a mark shaped  +
    + like a plus sign, flanked by two symbols identical  +
    + to the one on the hex emblem.  Get used to seeing   +
    + it in this game.                                    +
    +                                                     +
    + The goal here is to make the center globe look like +
    + that symbol.  Now if you look very carefully at the +
    + globe, you'll see a little prong at the bottom that +
    + resembles one of the lower "arms" on the symbol.    +
    + Flip it up once to gain access to that.             +
    +                                                     +
    + Now you're looking at a spikey version of the       +
    + symbol that doesn't quite look right.  To change it +
    + to the more familiar form, rotate it either to the  +
    + left or the right.  Either way works.               +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [TWIN SYMBOL PUZZLE]                                +
    +                                                     +
    + If you searched the graves in the yard, you may     +
    + have seen a few of them that had twin symbols on    +
    + them.  If you didn't, at ease, I'll give you the    +
    + solution.                                           +
    +                                                     +
    + What you're trying to do is light up the symbols    +
    + that look like an M, a V, and a Z.  Unfortunately,  +
    + you can only turn the dial in increments of three   +
    + and four.                                           +
    +                                                     +
    + To solve this one, turn it three once, four three   +
    + times, three once again, four three more times, and +
    + three for one final turn.                           +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [KALEIDOSCOPE PUZZLE]                               +
    +                                                     +
    + Well, it's not really a kaleidoscope, but still.    +
    + The goal here is to get each of the individual      +
    + color wheels to match up with the whole image in    +
    + the center.                                         +
    +                                                     +
    + Notice the large red chunks on the ride side of the +
    + central image?  Turn the red twice to make it fit.  +
    + The green is primarily on the left side, so turn it +
    + three times to line up those pieces.  Last, we have +
    + the blue wheel.  It's kind of hard to tell with     +
    + this one, but notice how there's more blue at the   +
    + top and bottom and it's purple in the middle?  Turn +
    + that once to get it in order, then combine them.    +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [GALLERY PUZZLE]                                    +
    +                                                     +
    + On examination, the panel will inform you that "the +
    + sacrifice of six lives shall make way the true      +
    + path", which is crazy person speak for "make sure   +
    + the portraits show six bodies.                      +
    +                                                     +
    + Numbering the portraits from left to right, there   +
    + is one in 1, three in 2, and two each in 3 and 4.   +
    + Of course, by selecting one portrait to flip, you   +
    + also flip the adjacent portraits, so 1 flips 1 and  +
    + 2, 2 flips 1, 2, and 3, and so on.  Each portrait   +
    + has a different image on the opposite side as well, +
    + and there will be two sacrifices on the 1 and 2     +
    + reverse, one on the 3 reverse, and three on the 4   +
    + reverse.                                            +
    +                                                     +
    + To line them up properly, flip 4, 3, 1, and 2 to    +
    + get the six (which is the smallest number possible) +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [SLIDING PUZZLE]                                    +
    +                                                     +
    + Chances are, you've probably seen one of these      +
    + before; the classic sliding puzzle that forms an    +
    + image upon completion.  The difference is that you  +
    + probably aren't familiar with the Salazar insignia  +
    + that it eventually forms.                           +
    +                                                     +
    + To solve the puzzle, flip the pieces in the order   +
    + given: right, top right, top middle, middle, left   +
    + bottom left, bottom middle, bottom right, right,    +
    + middle, top middle, top left, left, bottom left,    +
    + bottom middle, middle, right, bottom right.         +
    +                                                     +
    + There's still one piece missing, so add the STONE   +
    + TABLET to complete the puzzle                       +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    + [ARROW PUZZLE]                                      +
    +                                                     +
    + The object here isn't obvious, but the goal is to   +
    + turn the arrows so that there's a flashing current  +
    + traveling from the upper left corner to the lower   +
    + right.  Each selection of a color will rotate all   +
    + of the arrows of the same color counter clockwise   +
    + once.  You don't even have to light them all up.    +
    +                                                     +
    + Operate the blue arrow once, the green twice, and   +
    + the red three times to unlock the door.             +
    +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
    
    =========================
    =  13: BOSS STRATEGIES  =
    =========================
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #1: DEL LAGO]+                                                  |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Not exactly what you expected, and I don't know that it's involved with the  |
    |the parasites either.  Del Lago will mostly drag you around the lake and     |
    |occasionally into the stumps floating in the water, which you ought to steer |
    |around.  Sometimes it'll make a quick turn and try to knock you off course,  |
    |but again, keep steering around it and you'll be fine.  Keep throwing the    |
    |harpoons at it when things are clear, and don't worry about ammo, as they're |
    |infinite.  It's third attack is to disappear under the water and then        |
    |reappear on one of the far sides of the lake.  You won't be able to tell     |
    |where at first, but some arrows will come up on the screen pointing to it.   |
    |Throwing harpoons at it in this stage seems to deter it from knocking your   |
    |boat over, so there's little risk.  After 20-25 harpoons, it'll die and the  |
    |rope will start dragging you under, so think fast and keep hacking at it.    |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #2: EL GIGANTE]+                                                |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |There's nothing to like about this fight, particularly with how he'll break  |
    |the houses which typically hold goodies.  It doesn't seem to matter where    |
    |you shoot him, but I still try for the head with the RIFLE or SHOTGUN.       |
    |After some time passes, the dog that you saved earlier will come to help you |
    |distract it which makes things easier.  El Gigante will either charge you,   |
    |stomp on you, or grab you for his main attacks.  The grabbing can be solved  |
    |via the knife, but everything else you should be able to dodge easily (you   |
    |can run through his legs).  He has been known to bowl rocks at you, so stay  |
    |alert.  If he walks over and grabs a tree, he'll start swinging that at you, |
    |so get around that by tossing flash grenades, which will cause him to drop   |
    |it.  When you do enough damage to him, he'll fall to his knees and the       |
    |parasite will appear on his back, so hop on and slash at it.  Do this        |
    |routine three times and he'll drop dead.                                     |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #3: BITORES MENDEZ A]+                                          |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: INFANTILE]+                                                    |
    |AKA, the Mendez-pede.  For as large and imposing as he is, this form is      |
    |surprisingly easy to beat.  Mendez lacks the ability to charge and will      |
    |maintain the same approximate pace whenever he walks towards you.  His       |
    |attacks, which consist of swinging his shoulder blades grabbing you and      | 
    |swinging you around, or doing a bear hug on you, which will likely follow an |
    |attack where he smacks you upside the head to stun you (though it does no    |
    |damage at all).  His attacks are rather easy to dodge, and there is more     |
    |than ample space to use on the sides.  So whenever he gets too close to you, |
    |run straight past him (dodging, while you do this, will cause you to dive    |
    |back in front of him, which makes it rather pointless to try, though he      |
    |can't usually attack you in time even if you do mess up).  The weakpoint you |
    |should aim at is the spinal column (head works too), either sniping it with  |
    |the RIFLE or pulling out the RED9 or PUNISHER and blasting it at a much      |
    |faster rate (which I highly recommend).  I wouldn't use the SHOTGUN here, as |
    |it wastes ammo.  There's an explosive barrel you can blow up near the ladder,|
    |and that can take a significant chunk off his life.  Your attacks will stun  |
    |him periodically on their own, either causing his jaw to drop or making him  |
    |lose balance and fall backwards while his legs keep going, but neither seem  |
    |to be dependant on quality shots or how much life you've taken away.  You    |
    |should be able to kill him without taking any damage at all.                 |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #4: BITORES MENDEZ B]+                                          |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Mendez got no legs now and seems pretty pissed about his future inability to |
    |dance.  The appendages on his back are now used to allow him to swing from   |
    |pipe to pipe at the top of the room.  This makes it a bad idea to stay down  |
    |on the floor, so take it to the upper level via one of the ladders.  Get to  |
    |the end of the room and snipe him at a distance, then either TMP or SHOTGUN  |
    |him when close.  Just be warned that if he does get close, he'll try to maul |
    |you with his claws or stab you with his shoulder blade, which ends up doing  |
    |a lot of damage.  Either run to the sides when he gets too close or just     |
    |bear it and pick up any healing items you can find nearby.  An unusually     |
    |solid tactic here is to stay on the short end of the upper level (i.e. near  |
    |the ladder) and run from one side to the other there shooting Mendez as he   |
    |tries to track you at a much slower pace.  Another trick is to toss out      |
    |flash grenades.  When they go off, Mendez will lose his grip and fall down,  |
    |but be warned, he pops up rather quickly and you should plan ahead for that. |
    |There are a few spots on the upper level where you can hide from Mendez      |
    |successfully and avoid attack.  I've done it in the upper left corner        |
    |(relative to the ladder), but I had more success hiding behind the pillar of |
    |the barricade on the left side of the second floor.  It isn't necessary to   |
    |hide (and sometimes difficult to do, so don't bank on it), as this is the    |
    |last boss fight for a while, but it does make things easier.                 |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #5: VERDUGO]+                                                   |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: VERY EASY]+                                                    |
    |After so much dodging, the monster finally shows itself.  Run past it into   |
    |the main part of the room and find the cannister.  Knock it over and the     |
    |liquid nitrogen will freeze the Verdugo.  From here, just shoot it with a    |
    |rocket and it's done for.                                                    |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #6: LOS GIGANTES]+                                              |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: MEDIUM]+                                                       |
    |This is the hardest boss battle in the game, so far as I'm concerned.  You   |
    |may not believe that from the start, but each of these Gigantes has a much   |
    |bigger damage resistance than any of the ones you've fought previously.  In  |
    |spite of your advanced weaponry, these things take very little damage from   |
    |your attacks, and fighting both at once is a guarenteed method for draining  |
    |all of your healing items.  The solution is to climb up the ladder on the    |
    |side of the room and wait until one of them starts shaking the platform.     |
    |Ride the rope swing down to the other sided and operate the lever, which     |
    |will start up a different camera angle.  When one of the Gigantes is over    |
    |the circle in the middle, pull the switch again, which will drop it into the |
    |pit.  That will leave you with one Gigante to fight, but STAY AWAY FROM THE  |
    |PIT!  The Gigante in there has a nasty habit of trying to drag you down with |
    |him.  For the remaining Gigante, use your most powerful weapons, including   |
    |whatever hand grenades you have.  This battle will be a lot more difficult,  |
    |and the Gigante has a new trick which involves kicking you into the air and  |
    |immediately pounding you down again with his fist (rarely works), but you    |
    |should be able to pull through so long as you have a lot of healing items.   |
    |You can keep on using the ladder and swing method if you want to as well.    |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #7: RAMON SALAZAR]+                                             |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Plant 42 eats Salazar and the Verdugo and suddenly this happens.  This fight |
    |is a royal pain because most of the time Salazar is protected, but on the    |
    |whole it's not too hard.  The left and right tentacles will constantly swing |
    |about, but you can dodge them.  If you don't they'll grab you and throw you  |
    |to the ground, where there are a bunch of detached Plagas running about      |
    |(speculation is that the plant is the hive for them).  That leaves the head, |
    |which usually bashes up and down on the platform, but if you hear Salazar    |
    |say something like "payback" or "now it's my turn", the head will open up    |
    |and the mouth will try to get a one hit kill on you.  Run to the side as     |
    |Salazar will be revealed at this time and shoot him with the RIFLE, the      |
    |BROKEN BUTTERFLY, or a shotgun type.  The other way to reveal Salazar is to  |
    |shoot the head in the eye on the right side until it's stunned and drops     |
    |down.  This generally means that you'll be spending a lot of time on the     |
    |right side of the screen, so keep dodging and run to the left when you have  |
    |to.  One thing that I've found works rather nicely is to stand at the very   |
    |front edge of the platform and fire a shotgun from that angle.  This keeps   |
    |the head from turning too much and obstructing your shot, and seems to place |
    |you mostly out of the reach of the tentacles.  It's possible to get through  |
    |the entire battle unscathed from this position, but you may want to switch   |
    |to another weapon when Salazar is revealed.  After enough shots to him, the  |
    |whole thing will die.                                                        |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #8: U3]+                                                        |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |After so much fanfare, it's time to actually fight Saddler's eponymous "It"! |
    |Well, not quite, as going after it in an open area is not the brightest idea |
    |in the world.  Immediately turn around and grab the nearby GREEN HERB and    |
    |SHOTGUN SHELLS (10).  Continue running until you get to a gate.  Open it up, |
    |run in, and close it again.  Wait for the U3 to come around then pull out a  |
    |handgun type and blow up the explosive barrel behind it.  Now back up a bit, |
    |because the U3 is going to want to tear its way through the gate and will    |
    |attack you through it if you get too close.  Pull out the BROKEN BUTTERFLY   |
    |or the SHOTGUN and begin firing at it, aiming for the parasitic head.  Once  |
    |you get a few shots off, the gate should break and it will start chasing you |
    |through the passage.  You'll pass another explosive barrel along the way,    |
    |and some HANDGUN BULLETS (10) before that, but keep running until you've     |
    |successfully gotten through the gate.  From there, steady your aim on either |
    |the U3's head again or the explosive behind it and fire.  A few more shots   |
    |coupled with the explosion should do it in, BUT more often than not, the U3  |
    |will mutate a little more and take another method of attack, that being      |
    |digging underneath the ground and trying to rise up and kill you that way.   |
    |If it does do this, keep moving around and dodge when the buttons appear on  |
    |screen.  It will eventually surface again, at which point you should keep    |
    |taking shots at its head.                                                    |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #9: JACK KRAUSER]+                                              |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Throw those old strategies you were using out the window because Krauser's   |
    |new arm is bulletproof.  He's also lost any and all interest in knives, hand |
    |grenades, and his sub-machine gun, so keep those fingers close to the dodge  |
    |buttons at all times.  Krauser's modus operandi is to try to get you with    |
    |his mega-claw, which is a dodge move, but on occasion he'll jump back and    |
    |try to impale you with an overhead attack.  You can dodge this, but if you   |
    |happen to be standing too close to the edge at the time, you'll get knocked  |
    |off, and Krauser will grind his foot into your hand, but some button mashing |
    |will get your knife into his leg.  Speaking of which, Krauser absolutely     |
    |HATES getting stabbed, so pull that knife out at every opportunity.  Most of |
    |the time, Krauser will be using his arm as a shield, but there is a little   |
    |open space near the feet.  That should be where you fire at with a shotgun   |
    |type (or TMP if you aren't following my advice).  Since there's enough space |
    |on the field, use it to your full advantage and run back and forth to get    |
    |some space, just be warned that Krauser's pretty fast.  After enough shots   |
    |to the knees, Krauser will drop, at which point you should switch to your    |
    |magnum and plug him in the head as often as you can.  Another nifty method   |
    |is to shoot him with your best weapon while he's doing his roundhouse kick,  |
    |as he's completely open at that point.  He'll recover quickly, though, and   |
    |return to the flipping and skewering pattern, but you should have more than  |
    |enough healing goodies and cunning to get out of this one under the three    |
    |minute limit, but if you're down to thirty seconds left, and still haven't   |
    |killed him, you won't make it.                                               |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[BOSS FIGHT #10: OSMUND SADDLER]+                                           |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |Ordinarily, this might be a pretty difficult battle, but you should have     |
    |enough healing items to survive it relatively unscathed.  As you could       |
    |probably gather from the mutation scene, the weak point is the eye in his    |
    |head, but unfortunately, it's floating up in the air most of the time.  You  |
    |have to do sufficient damage to the legs to knock it out, but don't worry    |
    |about that yet because you can get two cheap shots off right away.  First,   |
    |charge forward until you're on the other side of the explosive barrel, then  |
    |wait until Saddler gets close and blow it up.  Run up to Saddler's body and  |
    |hit A to jam the knife in his eye.  One cheap shot down.  Next run down the  |
    |narrower part of the path until you get to a platform with some controls.    |
    |When Saddler gets close, operate them and it will slam a bunch of metal rods |
    |into his head.  Dismount and jab the knife in his eye again using the same   |
    |methods.  Those are your two cheap shots.  The rest of the battle is a bit   |
    |of a pain because you have to attack his legs, which are invincible unless   |
    |one of the eyes is showing.  If it is, shoot it with a shotgun type and      |
    |he'll react.  Keep repeating the process with the other legs and eventually  |
    |he'll fall down.  This sounds a lot easier than it is considering there are  |
    |tentacles swinging around cutting at you and the occasional leg to stomp on  |
    |or charge at you, but patience is really all it takes.  Hand grenades also   |
    |work amazingly well, flooring him in a single toss.  If you run out of       |
    |supplies, there's a SHOTGUN SHELLS (5) near the barrel, a GREEN HERB at the  |
    |controls, and a HANDGUN BULLETS (10) on the walkway to the controls.         |
    |There's another HAND GRENADE and a MAGNUM ROUNDS (3) on the bridge side of   |
    |the helipad as well, just know that the bridges drop of for no reason and    |
    |you may have to wait.  If you get over there before Saddler feels like       |
    |joining you, he may throw girders at you from the other side.  Either way,   |
    |once he joins you, there's another explosive barrel and another set of       |
    |controls on the other side, so that means two more cheap shots.  After five  |
    |to nine knife jabs, Ada will reappear with the ROCKET LAUNCHER (SPECIAL),    |
    |which takes up a 2 X 8 space you'll have to clear.  After that, knock        |
    |Saddler down again and fire the rocket.                                      |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    |+[ADA'S BOSS FIGHT: JACK KRAUSER]+                                           |
    |+[DIFFICULTY: EASY]+                                                         |
    |The first thing you'll want to do is to run to the far side by the lift and  |
    |stand ground there, seeing if you can snipe Krauser from there.  This battle |
    |will be a lot like Leon's, in that involves a lot of dodging, but Krauser    |
    |will also shield himself a lot more often, which means you either have to    |
    |shoot his legs out or toss grenades, which can be invaluable.  When he slips |
    |and leaves himself open for attacks, open up on him with either the TMP or   |
    |some carefully aimed rifle shots (his claw clips in a weird way).  Keep      |
    |dodging and run back and forth as need be, but if you get a little tight on  |
    |ammo, you can pick up TMP AMMO (100), HANDGUN BULLETS (30), and a FIRST-AID  |
    |SPRAY from the barrels.  The best route here is to shoot him when he pauses  |
    |after an attack, particularly if he's attacking from above.                  |
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ===================
    =  14: ITEM LIST  =
    ===================
    
    The items listed below are found in this format...
    
    (ITEM NAME)
    (DISK), (PART OF GAME, AS DEFINED IN FAQ)
    (LOCATION, OR HOW TO ACQUIRE IT)
    [SLOTS TAKEN UP, AND MAXIMUM, IF ANY]
    [VALUE, IF ANY]
    (DESCRIPTION UPON EXAMINATION)
    [DESCRIPTION AFTER UPGRADE]
    
    Any mistakes are transcribed as such.  Also note that this isn't the exact
    total of items you can receive in any given game, as enemies drop random items
    as do certain boxes.
    
    WEAPONS / AMMO / ADD-ONS
    If it kills or is a component of something you'll be using to kill later, you
    can find it here.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HAND GRENADE
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except 1-2, 2-2, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 4-4)
    FOUND IN: PATH TO PUEBLO, PUEBLO, PATH TO SHANTY, SWAMP, UPPER WATERFALL,
    LEFT PATH, TORTURE CABIN, GREAT HALL, CASTLE CHAPEL, ENTRANCE HALL (second
    time), CLOCK TOWER, MINE ENTRANCE, MINING COMPLEX, UNDERGROUND RUINS, KITCHEN,
    WASTE DISPOSAL, MEETING ROOM, CONTAINER YARD, SOUTHERN CAMP, NORTHERN CAMP
    (x 2), CONSTRUCTION DOCK
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    2000 PSTAS
    A handy explosive that will detonate several seconds after throwing it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    INCENDIARY GRENADE
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except 1-2, 3-4, 4-3)
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO, FARM, MENDEZ' RESIDENCE (FRONT), SWAMP, VILLAGE CHAPEL,
    CABIN, RIGHT PATH, TORTURE CABIN, EXTERIOR GATES, GREAT HALL, SEWER PRISON,
    GARDEN BALCONY, BEDROOM, BLUE HALL, BELL HALL, SPIKE TRAP, SMELTING ROOM,
    RITUAL TOWER, RITUAL ROOM, KITCHEN, MEDICAL FACILITY, CONTROL TOWER, SHUTTER
    HALLWAY, CONTAINER YARD, PRISON YARD, FACTORY EXTERIOR
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    1000 PSTAS
    A powerful explosive that blasts attackers with flames.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    FLASH GRENADE
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except 3-1, 5-2, Final)
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO, VALLEY FORTRESS, VALLEY REFINERY, MINING FORTRESS, LAKE
    (EAST), VILLAGE CHAPEL, CABIN, LEFT PATH, LOWER CANYON, SEWER ENTRANCE, DINING
    HALL, BLUE HALL, INTEROGATION ROOM, PORTRAIT HALL, SMELTING ROOM, NOVISTADOR
    CAVES, UPPER RUINS, RITUAL ROOM, OUTER TOWER, X-RAY ROOM, CONTROL TOWER,
    BOILER ROOM, ISLAND RUINS, NORTHERN CAMP, ISLAND PRISON, PRISON YARD, 
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    500 PSTAS
    Use it to blind offenders momentarily.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HANDGUN
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1
    FOUND IN: DEFAULT
    2 X 3 SLOTS
    103750 PSTAS
    A standard 9mm handgun.
    No longer your average 9mm handgun, it's chance of critical headshots is
    increased by 5x.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PUNISHER
    DISK 1,
    FOUND IN: (Merchant, either after shooting all the medallions or later)
    2 X 3 SLOTS
    148900 PSTAS
    This 9mm handgun will blast a hole through two enemies!
    Now this 9 mm handgun will blast a hole through 5 enemies.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RED9
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-2
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 4 SLOTS
    166200 PSTAS
    A powerful 9 mm handgun.
    (w/stock) A powerful 9mm handgun with stock.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    STOCK (RED9)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-2
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    1 X 3 SLOTS
    2000 PSTAS
    A stock for the 9mm Red9 handgun.  Absorbs and spreads out 80% of the recoil
    forces for increased shooting stability and comfort.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BLACKTAIL
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 3 SLOTS
    182000 PSTAS
    A 9mm handgun with superior handling.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HANDGUN BULLETS
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except Final)
    FOUND IN: DEFAULT (20), PATH TO PUEBLO (3 x 10), PUEBLO (4 x 10), FARM (2 x
    10), PATH TO SHANTY (2 x 10), VALLEY STORAGE (10), VALLEY FORTRESS (10), VALLEY
    REFINERY (2 x 10), MENDEZ' RESIDENCE (REAR) (10), VILLAGE TUNNEL (10), CEMETARY
    (2 x 10), MINING FORTRESS (2 x 10), RIVER SHOP, SWAMP (2 x 10), LAKE (WEST)
    (10), LAKE (EAST) (10), LAKE SHOP (10), LAKE (WEST) (night) (10), LOWER
    WATERFALL (10), MINING FORTRESS (night) (2 x 10), VILLAGE CHAPEL (10), CHURCH
    STORAGE (10), CEMETARY (night) (2 x 10), PUEBLO (night) (2 x 10), FARM (night)
    (2 x 10), CABIN (10), LEFT PATH (4 x 10), RIGHT PATH (3 x 10), UPPER CANYON (3
    x 10), LOWER CANYON (10), TORTURE CABIN (2 x 10), PATH TO CASTLE (2 x 10),
    SWORD ROOM (10), INTERIOR GATES (10), OBSERVATION ROOM (1 x 15, 1 x 20), GREAT
    HALL (20), CASTLE CHAPEL (20), SEWER ENTRANCE (1 x 20, 1 x 15), SEWER PRISON
    (20), GALLERY (2 x 20), GARDEN BALCONY (10), MAZE (10), BEDROOM (20), DINING
    HALL (20), BLUE HALL (10), INTEROGATION ROOM (20), ASHLEY'S HALL (15), EAST
    TERMINUS (10), NORTH TERMINUS (20), PORTRAIT HALL (20), KNIGHT'S HALL (2 x 20),
    NORTHERN STORAGE (2 x 10), BALLROOM (20), PATH TO CLOCK TOWER (10), CLOCK TOWER
    (20), NITROGEN HALLWAY (25), MINE ENTRANCE (20), MINING COMPLEX (20),
    NOVISTADOR CAVES (20), UPPER RUINS (20), UNDERGROUND RUINS (10), STATUE TOWER
    (1 X 15, 1 X 10), RITUAL TOWER (1 x 20, 1 x 30), RITUAL ROOM (2 x 20), OUTER
    TOWER (15), LOWER CLIFFS (10), MESS HALL (10), HOLDING AREA (10), CONTROL TOWER
    (10), DEMOLITION ROOM (10), BULLDOZER NORTH TERMINUS (10), CONTAINER YARD (10),
    SOUTHERN CAMP (2 x 10), ISLAND RUINS (1 x 10, 1 x 20), NORTHERN CAMP (10),
    NOTHERN RUINS (10), PRISON YARD (2 x 10), CONSTRUCTION DOCK (10) 
    1 X 2 SLOTS, 50 MAX
    50 PSTAS per bullet
    A box of 9mm rounds.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SHOTGUN
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO
    2 X 8 SLOTS
    167440 PSTAS
    A 12-gauge pump-action shotgun.
    Don't leave home without it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RIOT GUN
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 8 SLOTS
    208700 PSTAS
    A light-weight pump-action shotgun.
    Its superior handling enables quicker aiming.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    STRIKER
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 5 SLOTS
    205720 PSTAS
    Equipped with the advantages of wide-shot, it enables faster firing than the
    standard shotgun.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SHOTGUN SHELLS
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except 3-4)
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO (3 x 5, 1 x 10), VALLEY FORTRESS (5), SWAMP (10), MINING
    FORTRESS (night) (10), CABIN (10), LEFT PATH (10), LOWER CANYON (10), TORTURE
    CABIN (10), DRAWBRIDGE (10), CASTLE PRISON (10), GREAT HALL (2 x 10), CASTLE
    CHAPEL (15), SEWER PRISON (1 x 10, 1 x 15), GALLERY (2 x 10), MAZE (10), DINING
    HALL (10), BLUE HALL (5), WESTERN STORAGE (10), WEST TERMINUS (10), KNIGHT'S
    HALL (1 x 10, 1 x 15), BALLROOM (15), BELL HALL (10), NITROGEN HALLWAY (15),
    MINING COMPLEX (10), SMELTING ROOM (2 x 15), NOVISTADOR CAVES (15), MINE CART
    TUNNEL (10), STATUE TOWER (10), RITUAL TOWER (1 x 10, 1 x 15), RITUAL ROOM (1 x
    15, 1 x 10), OUTER TOWER (10), LOWER CLIFFS (2 x 5), UPPER CLIFFS (2 x 5),
    KITCHEN (10), FILING ROOM (2 x 5), WASTE DISPOSAL (10), X-RAY ROOM (5),
    EXPERIMENT ROOM (5), CONTROL TOWER (5), HOLDING AREA (second time) (10),
    DEMOLITION ROOM (10), SHUTTER HALLWAY (10), BULLDOZER SOUTH TERMINUS (2 x 5),
    BULLDOZER (MID-POINT) (10), MEETING ROOM (10), BOILER ROOM (2 X 5), WAREHOUSE
    (10), CONTAINER YARD (2 X 10), SOUTHERN CAMP (2 X 10), ISLAND RUINS (2 X 10),
    NOTHERN CAMP (3 X 10), ISLAND PRISON (10), PRISON YARD (2 X 10), COMPUTER ROOM
    (10), EXIT TUNNEL (10), CONSTRUCTION DOCK (5).
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    120 PSTAS per shell, 15 MAX
    12-gauge shells.
    Use them with any shotgun.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RIFLE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    1 X 9 SLOTS
    146450 PSTAS
    A .223 caliber bolt action rifle.
    (w/scope) A .223 caliber bolt action rifle equipped with an all-steal, heavy
    duty high performance scope.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SCOPE (RIFLE)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    1 X 3 SLOTS
    3500 PSTAS
    A custom scope for the bolt action .223 caliber rifle.  Mount it to see your
    enemies closer.  A must for long-range shooting.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RIFLE (SEMI-AUTO)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 7 SLOTS
    177600 PSTAS
    A .223 caliber rifle capable of firing faster than the standard rifle.
    (w/scope) A semi-auto .223 caliber rifle equpped with an infrared
    scope.
    (w/Infrared scope) A semi-auto .223 caliber rifle equpped with an infrared
    scope.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SCOPE (SEMI-AUTO RIFLE)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    1 X 3 SLOTS
    5000 PSTAS
    A custom scope for the bolt action .223 caliber rifle.  Mount it to see your
    enemies closer.  A must for long-rang shooting.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    INFRARED SCOPE
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: CRYO STORAGE
    1 X 3 SLOTS
    10000 PSTAS
    Mounts on to any .223 caliber rifle.
    Enables you to see hidden parasites in the enemy's body.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RIFLE SHOTS
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except 1-1, 2-2, 3-2, Final)
    FOUND IN: VALLEY STORAGE (5), VALLEY FORTRESS (10), CEMETARY (10), LAKE SHOP
    (10), UPPER CANYON (10), EXTERIOR GATES (5), GREAT HALL (10), BLUE HALL (2 X
    5), INTEROGATION ROOM (2 X 5), NORTHERN STORAGE (5), PATH TO CLOCK TOWER (5),
    MINE ENTRANCE (5), UPPER RUINS (5), RITUAL TOWER (5), RITUAL ROOM (10), OUTER
    TOWER (5), UPPER CLIFFS (5), FILING ROOM (5), CRYO STORAGE (5), MEDICAL
    FACILITY (5), X-RAY ROOM (5), EXPERIMENT ROOM (3 X 5), DUMP (2 X 5), SHUTTER
    HALLWAY (5), BULLDOZER SOUTH TERMINUS (5), NORTHERN CAMP (5), ISLAND PRISON
    (5), PRISON YARD (5)
    1 X 2 SLOTS, 10 MAX
    150 PSTAS per shot
    Ammo to be used with any .223 caliber rifle.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    TMP
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 3 SLOTS
    171900 PSTAS
    A fully-automatic machine pistol.
    Fires custom 9mm's.
    (w/stock) A fully-automatic machine pistol equipped with a stock.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    STOCK (TMP)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-3
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 2 SLOTS
    2000 PSTAS
    A stock for the 9mm fully-auto TMP.  Absorbs and spreads out 80% of the recoil
    forces for increased shooting stability and comfort.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    TMP AMMO
    BOTH DISKS, CHAPTER 1-3, ALL OF CHAPTER 2, CHAPTER 3-2, ALL OF CHAPTER 4
    (except 4-3)
    FOUND IN: MENDEZ'RESIDENCE (FRONT) (50), VILLAGE TUNNEL (50), SWAMP (50),
    MINING FORTRESS (night) (50), PUEBLO (night) (50), CABIN (50), RIGHT PATH (50),
    LOWER CANYON (50), SEWER ENTRANCE (50), MAZE (50), SPIKE TRAP (50), NITROGEN
    HALLWAY (50), NOVISTADOR CAVES (50), RITUAL TOWER (2 X 50), RITUAL ROOM (100),
    LOWER CLIFFS (50), UPPER CLIFFS (2 X 25), FILING ROOM (50), OPERATING ROOM
    (50), WASTE DISPOSAL (2 X 25), EXPERIMENT ROOM (25), BULLDOZER (MID-POINT) (1 X
    25, 1 X 50), CONTAINER YARD (50), SOUTHERN CAMP (2 X 50), ISLAND RUINS (3 X
    50), NORTHERN CAMP (2 x 50), PRISON YARD (50), COMPUTER ROOM (50), FACTORY
    EXTERIOR (50)
    1 X 2 SLOTS, 100 MAX
    20 PSTAS per ammo
    Custom 9mm ammunition.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BROKEN BUTTERFLY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1, 4-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant), FOUNTAIN BALCONY
    2 X 4 SLOTS
    249500 PSTAS
    A very powerful .45 magnum revolver.
    This will make anyone's day.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    KILLER7
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 4 SLOTS
    172350 PSTAS
    A very stable yet powerful .45 magnum.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    MAGNUM ROUNDS
    BOTH DISKS, CHAPTER 3-3, ALL OF CHAPTER 4 (except 4-3), ALL OF CHAPTER 5
    except 5-2), FINAL CHAPTER
    FOUND IN: DINING HALL (3), SPIKE TRAP (5), MINING COMPLEX (5), RITUAL TOWER
    (5), LOWER CLIFFS (3), MEDICAL FACILITY (3), x-RAY ROOM (5), CONTAINER YARD
    (5), ISLAND RUINS (1 x 5, 1 x 3), NORTHERN CAMP (2 x 5), ISLAND PRISON (3),
    COMPUTER ROOM (5), CONSTRUCTION DOCK (3)
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    500 PSTAS per round, 10 MAX
    Ammo to be used with any .45 caliber magnum.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    MINE THROWER
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 5 SLOTS
    105500 PSTAS
    This weapon fires custom "mines" that attach to objects and detonate after a
    period of time.
    (w/scope) A mine shooting firearm equipped with a custom scope.
    (w/Exclusive) This weapon now fires "Homing-mines" that attach to objects and
    detonate after a period of time.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SCOPE (MINE THROWER)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 2 SLOTS
    4000 PSTAS
    A custom scope for the Mine Thrower.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    MINE-DARTS
    EITHER DISK, ANY CHAPTER
    FOUND IN: (dropped by enemies)
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    500 PSTAS per dart
    Custom mines for the Mine Thrower
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ROCKET LAUNCHER
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2, CHAPTER 3-3
    FOUND IN: (Merchant), BLUE HALL
    2 X 8 SLOTS
    15000 PSTAS
    Do major damage to any target.  (Single fire)
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ROCKET LAUNCHER (SPECIAL)
    DISK 2, FINAL CHAPTER
    FOUND IN: CONSTRUCTION DOCK
    2 X 8 SLOTS
    A rocket launcher that fires a special rocket.
    A perfect weapon to exterminate the boss.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    
    
    HEALING ITEMS
    Seek these out when your health gets low enough to be a cause for alarm.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    FIRST-AID SPRAY
    BOTH DISKS, CHAPTER 1-1, CHAPTER 3-1, CHAPTER 3-2, ALL OF CHAPTER 4 (except
    4-3), ALL OF CHAPTER 5 (except 5-1)
    FOUND IN: DEFAULT, GREAT HALL, MAZE, BELL HALL, NITROGEN HALLWAY, SMELTING
    ROOM, RITUAL TOWER, RITUAL ROOM, BULLDOZER SOUTH TERMINUS, ISLAND RUINS,
    NORTHERN CAMP (x 2)
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    5000 PSTAS
    Completely restores health.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GREEN HERB
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER
    FOUND IN: PATH TO PUEBLO (X 2), PUEBLO, PATH TO SHANTY, VALLEY STORAGE, MENDEZ'
    RESIDENCE (FRONT), LAKE (WEST), LOWER WATERFALL, MINING FORTRESS (night) (X 2),
    VILLAGE CHAPEL, FARM (night), CABIN, LEFT PATH, TORTURE CABIN (X 2),
    DRAWBRIDGE, INTERIOR GATES, CASTLE PRISON, GREAT HALL, CASTLE CHAPEL, SEWER
    PRISON, GALLERY (X 2), MAZE, DINING HALL, ASHLEY'S HALL, DUSTY ROOM, WESTERN
    STORAGE, KNIGHT'S HALL (X 2), CLOCK TOWER, BELL HALL, GREEN HERB, MINE
    ENTRANCE, NOVISTADOR CAVES (X 3), UPPER RUINS, MINE CART TUNNEL, RITUAL TOWER,
    RITUAL ROOM (X 2), OUTER TOWER, LOWER CLIFFS (X 2), UPPER CLIFFS, KITCHEN,
    MEDICAL FACILITY, CRYO STORAGE, WASTE DISPOSAL, X-RAY ROOM, EXPERIMENT ROOM,
    CONTROL TOWER, DUMP, DEMOLITION ROOM, SHUTTER HALLWAY, BULLDOZER (MID-POINT),
    BOILER ROOM, CONTAINER YARD (X 5), ISLAND RUINS (X 5), NORTHERN CAMP (X 5),
    PRISON YARD (X 2), COMPUTER ROOM, FACTORY EXTERIOR, CONSTRUCTION DOCK
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    500 PSTAS
    Restores partial health.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RED HERB
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except 1-2, 3-3, Final)
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO, MENDEZ' RESIDENCE (FRONT), MINING FORTRESS, CHURCH STORAGE,
    CABIN, LEFT PATH, TORTURE CABIN, SWORD ROOM, GALLERY, ASHLEY'S HALL, GARDEN
    BALCONY (second time), BALLROOM, SPIKE TRAP, NOVISTADOR CAVES, UNDERGROUND
    RUINS, RITUAL TOWER, UPPER CLIFFS, FILING ROOM, EXPERIMENT ROOM, DEMOLITION
    ROOM, MERCHANT STORAGE, CONTAINER YARD, ISLAND RUINS, ISLAND PRISON, PRISON
    YARD, COMPUTER ROOM 
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    1000 PSTAS
    Mixing it ith a Green Herb will completely restore health.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    YELLOW HERB
    BOTH DISKS, EVERY CHAPTER (except 3-3, 4-2)
    FOUND IN: PUEBLO, VALLEY FORTRESS, LAKE (WEST), MINING FORTRESS (night), CABIN,
    TORTURE CABIN, EXTERIOR GATES, OBSERVATION ROOM, SEWER PRISON, GALLERY, MAZE,
    ASHLEY'S HALL, PORTRAIT HALL, SPIKE TRAP, UNDERGROUND RUINS, RITUAL TOWER, MESS
    HALL, WASTE DISPOSAL, CONTROL ROOM, SHUTTER HALLWAY, CONTAINER YARD, SOUTHERN
    CAMP, ISLAND RUINS, NORTHERN CAMP, ISLAND PRISON, PRISON YARD, EXIT TUNNEL
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    3000 PSTAS
    Mixing it with a Green Herb will increase your maximum health.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    CHICKEN EGG
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1 through CHAPTER 1-4
    FOUND IN: Chickens drop these at random in the PUEBLO and FARM areas, as do
    SNAKES if you kill them
    1 X 1 SLOT
    300 PSTAS
    Restores partial health.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BROWN CHICKEN EGG
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1 through CHAPTER 1-4
    FOUND IN: Chickens drop these at random in the PUEBLO and FARM areas, as do
    SNAKES if you kill them
    1 X 1 SLOT
    600 PSTAS
    Restores partial health.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GOLD CHICKEN EGG
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1 through CHAPTER 1-4
    FOUND IN: Chickens drop these at random in the PUEBLO and FARM areas, as do
    SNAKES if you kill them
    1 X 1 SLOT
    3000 PSTAS
    Completely restores health
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BLACK BASS 
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2, CHAPTER 2-1
    FOUND IN: VALLEY REFINERY, LAKE
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    750 PSTAS
    Resotres health partially.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BLACK BASS (L)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2, CHAPTER 2-1
    FOUND IN: VALLEY REFINERY, LAKE
    2 X 6 SLOTS
    2300 PSTAS
    Restores health completely.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    
    
    KEY ITEMS
    Not only key in terms of being crucial to your progress, but key in the more
    literal sense as well.  Most of these are involved in the opening of doors.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    EMBLEM (LEFT HALF)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: VALLEY
    The left half of an emblem with an engraving.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    EMBLEM (RIGHT HALF)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: VALLEY
    The right half of an emblem with an engraving.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HEXAGONAL EMBLEM
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: Combine EMBLEM (LEFT HALF) with EMBLEM (RIGHT HALF)
    A hexagonal object with a unique insignia engraved in it.  It opens the gate
    in the valley.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    INSIGNIA KEY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: MENDEZ' BEDROOM
    A key with a unique symbol on the end.
    It opens the door of the house in the village.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ROUND INSIGNIA
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-1
    FOUND IN: WATERFALL
    A round object with a strange symbol.
    It fits inside the door of the church.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    CAMP KEY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-3
    FOUND IN: LEFT PATH
    It opens the door at the center of the camp.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    OLD KEY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-3
    FOUND IN: RIGHT PATH
    It opens the gate at the end of the back route from the cabin.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    FALSE EYE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-3
    FOUND IN: TORTURE CABIN
    There is a code-like pattern etched inside the iris.  It opens the gate to get
    out of the village.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GOLDEN SWORD
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: SWORD ROOM
    A decorative sword made from gold.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PLATINUM SWORD
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: SWORD ROOM
    A decorative sword made from platinum.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    CASTLE GATE KEY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: INTERIOR GATES
    A key designed with a goat motif.
    This key opens the main gate into the castle.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PRISON KEY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1
    FOUND IN: OBSERVATION ROOM
    A key that opens the door to the underground prison.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GALLERY KEY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: GALLERY (first part)
    A key with the insignia of the Salazar family.
    This key opens the door to the gallery room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GOAT ORNAMENT
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: GALLERY (second part)
    An ornament piece for the wall relief in the grand hall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SERPENT ORNAMENT
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-4
    FOUND IN: DUSTY ROOM (basement)
    An ornament piece for the wall relief in the grand hall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    LION ORNAMENT
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: DRAGON ROOM
    An ornament piece for the wall relief in the grand hall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    MOONSTONE (LEFT HALF)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: MAZE
    Only the left half of a stone object.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    MOONSTONE (RIGHT HALF)
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: MAZE
    Only the right half of a stone object.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BLUE MOONSTONE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: (combine MOONSTONE (LEFT HALF) with MOONSTONE (RIGHT HALF))
    A blue stone with a crescent engraving.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    STONE TABLET
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-4
    FOUND IN: DUSTY ROOM
    A tablet with part of a picture etched upon its surface.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SALAZAR FAMILY INSIGNIA
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-4
    FOUND IN: DUSTY ROOM (basement)
    A family heirloom that has been passed down for generations in the Salazar
    family.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    KING'S GRAIL
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: KNIGHT'S HALL
    A grail with a decoration of a king.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    QUEEN'S GRAIL
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: NORTHERN STORAGE
    A grail with a decoration of a queen.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    DYNAMITE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-2
    FOUND IN: MINING COMPLEX
    A very destructive explosive used in mining.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    KEY TO THE MINE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-3
    FOUND IN: UNDERGROUND RUINS
    A key that opens the locked door in the underground ruins.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    STONE OF SACRIFICE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-3
    FOUND IN: MINE CART TUNNEL
    A stone object with an engraving of an animal for sacrifice.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    FREEZER CARD KEY
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: OPERATING ROOM
    A card key with a red logo of the Los Illuminados.
    Use it to open the door of the freezer.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    WASTE DISPOSAL CARD KEY
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: CRYO STORAGE (use key rewriter)
    A card key with a yellow logo of the Los Illuminados.
    Use it to open the door to the Waste Disposal Area.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    STORAGE ROOM CARD KEY
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: EXPERIMENT ROOM
    A card key with a orange logo of the Los Illuminados.
    Use it to open the door where Ashley is trapped.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PIECE OF THE HOLY BEAST, PANTHER
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-3
    FOUND IN: ISLAND RUINS
    A piece of the object to be used at the wall relief.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PIECE OF THE HOLY BEAST, EAGLE
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-3
    FOUND IN: ISLAND RUINS
    A piece of the object to be used at the wall relief.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PIECE OF THE HOLY BEAST, SERPENT
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-3
    FOUND IN: ISLAND RUINS
    A piece of the object to be used at the wall relief.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    EMERGENCY LOCK CARD KEY
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-4
    FOUND IN: PRISON YARD
    A card key with a white logo of the Los Illuminados.
    Insert it in the card reader of the emergency locking device.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    JET-SKI KEY
    DISK 2, CONSTRUCTION DOCK
    FOUND IN: (Ada tosses it to you after you kill Saddler)
    A jet-ski key.  I guess you could call it a "present" from Ada.  Well, sorta...
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    
    
    TREASURE ITEMS
    Ordinarily semi-useless trinkets, these can be sold to the merchant for scratch
    to be spent on other more important goodies.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SPINEL
    DISK 1, ALL OF CHAPTERS 1, 2, 3, and 4
    FOUND IN: PATH TO PUEBLO, PUEBLO, FARM (x 2), PATH TO SHANTY (x 3), VALLEY
    REFINERY, MENDEZ' RESIDENCE (FRONT), VILLAGE TUNNEL (x 3), MINING FORTRESS (x
    2), SWAMP, LAKE SHOP, LOWER WATERFALL, MINING FORTRESS (x 2, night), VILLAGE
    TUNNEL (night), PUEBLO (night), RIGHT PATH, TORTURE CABIN, DRAWBRIDGE, EXTERIOR
    GATES (x 2), SWORD ROOM, INTERIOR GATES, CASTLE CHAPEL, SEWER EXIT, CHASTLE
    CHAPEL (x 10 possible, second visit), GALLERY (second part), GARDEN BALCONY (x
    2), MAZE, BEDROOM (x 2), BLUE HALL, INTEROGATION ROOM, ASHLEY'S HALL (x 2),
    DUSTY ROOM (x 2), WESTERN STORAGE, WEST TERMINUS, PORTRAIT HALL (x 3), NORTHERN
    STORAGE, PATH TO CLOCK TOWER, BELL HALL (x 2), SPIKE TRAP, MINE ENTRANCE, UPPER
    RUINS, STATUE TOWER, OUTER TOWER
    2000 PSTAS
    Although small in size, it appears to have some value.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RUBY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1, CHAPTER 1-3, CHAPTER 2-3
    FOUND IN: Kill the Chainsaw Maniac near the village exit and/or near Mendez'
    house, the orange Bella Sister in the left path
    10000 PSTAS
    A large precious stone.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PEARL PENDANT
    BOTH DISKS, CHAPTER 1-1, CHAPTER 5-4
    FOUND IN: FARM (shoot the post holding up the well lid first), NORTHERN RUINS
    10000 PSTAS
    It's in pretty good condition.
    Looks valuable.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    DIRTY PEARL PENDANT
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1
    FOUND IN: FARM (shoot pendant without shooting post first)
    1000 PSTAS
    A very dirty accessory.
    It doesn't seem to have much value.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BEERSTEIN
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1
    FOUND IN: FARM
    20000 PSTAS
    There are 3 recessions on the side.  I wonder that they're for.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RED CATSEYE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-1
    FOUND IN: PATH TO SHANTY
    3000 PSTAS
    The marking on the stone indicates that it once was set in something, but what?
    Nevertheless, a rare gem.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GREEN CATSEYE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-3
    FOUND IN: CEMETARY
    3000 PSTAS
    The marking on the stone indicates that it once was set in something, but what?
    Nevertheless, a rare gem.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    YELLOW CATSEYE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-3
    FOUND IN: LOWER CANYON
    3000 PSTAS
    The marking on the stone indicates that it once was set in something, but what?
    Nevertheless, a rare gem.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ELEGANT MASK [W/G, R, AND/OR P]
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2, 3-2
    FOUND IN: VALLEY REFINERY, CASTLE CHAPEL (second visit)
    20000 PSTAS
    A mask with 3 divots like something might fit inside.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GREEN GEM
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-1, 3-1
    FOUND IN: LAKE SHOP, ENTRANCE HALL
    3000 PSTAS
    The markings on the piece indicate that it was once set in something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RED GEM
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-3, 3-2
    FOUND IN: LEFT PATH, MAZE
    3000 PSTAS
    The markings on the piece indicate that it was once set in something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PURPLE GEM
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-3, 4-1
    FOUND IN: RIGHT PATH, PORTRAIT HALL
    3000 PSTAS
    The markings on the piece indicate that it was once set in something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BRASS POCKET WATCH
    BOTH DISKS, CHAPTER 1-2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: MENDEZ' RESIDENCE (REAR) (shoot the post holding up the well lid
    first), MEDICAL FACILITY
    10000 PSTAS
    There are signs of use, but this brass watch may still be worth something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    DIRTY BRASS POCKET WATCH
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-2
    FOUND IN: PATH TO MENDEZ' HOUSE (shoot watch without shooting post first)
    1000 PSTAS
    A very dirty timepiece.
    It doesn't seem to have much value.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ELEGANT HEADDRESS
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-3, CHAPTER 5-3
    FOUND IN: VILLAGE TUNNEL (after shooting lamp), THRONE ROOM
    10000 PSTAS
    The rare stone set in this headdress has made it one of a kind.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ANTIQUE PIPE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-3
    FOUND IN: SWAMP (shoot the nest)
    10000 PSTAS
    There's a detailed engraving on this pipe.  Let's hope it's worth something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GOLD BANGLE w/ PEARLS
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 1-3
    FOUND IN: LAKE (wEST) (shoot the nest)
    10000 PSTAS
    The fantastic workmanship of this accessory makes this a valuable item.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    AMBER RING
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-1
    FOUND IN: WATERFALL
    10000 PSTAS
    An old ring.  I can almost feel the history behind this jewelry.  I just hope
    there's some value to it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    VELVET BLUE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 2-4, ALL OF CHAPTER 3, ALL OF CHAPTER 4 
    FOUND IN: PATH TO CASTLE, EXTERIOR GATES (x 2), INTERIOR GATES, ENTRANCE HALL,
    GREAT HALL, SEWER ENTRANCE, SEWER PRISON, AXE ROOM, CASTLE CHAPEL (second
    visit), GALLERY (x 2), GARDEN BALCONY (x 2), MAZE, BLUE HALL, DUSTY ROOM,
    ASHLEY'S HALL, EAST TERMINUS, NORTH TERMINUS, NORTHERN STORAGE, PORTRAIT HALL,
    BALLROOM, PATH TO CLOCK TOWER, SPIKE TRAP (x 2), MINING COMPLEX (x 2), UPPER
    RUINS, UNDERGROUND RUINS (x 4), STATUE TOWER (x 2) 
    3000 PSTAS
    Although small in size, it appears to have some value.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GOLD BANGLE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-1, CHAPTER 3-4, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: EXTERIOR GATES, DUSTY ROOM, PATH FROM CLOCK TOWER
    8500 PSTAS
    A handcrafted gold bangle with a beautiful decoration carved around it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BUTTERFLY LAMP
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: SEWER PRISON
    32000 PSTAS (complete)
    An exquisite lamp designed with butterfly motifs.
    There are 3 indentations like something might fit inside.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GREEN EYE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: (Novistadors drop these), BALLROOM (after destroying hive)
    1000 PSTAS
    The markings on sides of the stone indicate that it was once set in something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RED EYE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: (Novistadors drop these), BALLROOM (after destroying hive)
    1500 PSTAS
    The markings on sides of the stone indicate that it was once set in something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BLUE EYE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: (Novistadors drop these), BALLROOM (after destroying hive)
    3000 PSTAS
    The markings on sides of the stone indicate that it was once set in something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ILLUMINADOS PENDANT
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: CASTLE CHAPEL (second visit), DRAGON ROOM
    12000 PSTAS
    A pendant designed with the Los Illuminados motif.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    MIRROR W/ PEARLS & RUBIES
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-2
    FOUND IN: BEDROOM
    12000 PSTAS
    A gorgeous mirror lined with many pearls and rubies.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HOURGLASS W/ GOLD DECOR
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 3-3
    FOUND IN: DINING HALL
    12000 PSTAS
    A marvelously crafted hourglass.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ELEGANT PERFUME BOTTLE
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: GARDEN BALCONY
    10000 PSTAS
    A luxurious looking perfume bottle with an intricate decoration.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ELEGANT CHESSBOARD
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: NORTHERN STORAGE
    13000 PSTAS
    A finely crafted chessboard with a rare design.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    CROWN
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: SPIKE TRAP
    9000 PSTAS (25000 PSTAS w/ JEWELS, 27000 PSTAS w/ AN INSIGNIA)
    A crown with 2 divots like something might fit inside.
    (w/ JEWELS)
    A crown with 2 jewels set in it.
    (w/ AN INSIGNIA)
    A crown with the royal insignia set in it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    CROWN JEWEL
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-1
    FOUND IN: Kill the Verdugo
    11000 PSTAS
    The markings on the backside of this piece indicate that it was once set in
    something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ROYAL INSIGNIA
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-2
    FOUND IN: NOVISTADOR CAVES
    13000 PSTAS
    The markings on the backside of this piece indicate that it was once set in
    something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SALAZAR FAMILY CROWN
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-2
    FOUND IN: Combine CROWN with CROWN JEWELS and ROYAL INSIGNIA
    48000 PSTAS
    A complete crown with all the jewels and insignia set in it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    STAFF OF ROYALTY
    DISK 1, CHAPTER 4-2
    FOUND IN: UNDERGROUND RUINS
    20000 PSTAS
    A staff with a beautiful decoration.
    It seems to have substantial value.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    EMERALD
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1, CHAPTER 5-3, CHAPTER 5-4
    FOUND IN: LOWER CLIFFS, UPPER CLIFFS, FILING ROOM, OPERATING ROOM, MEDICAL
    FACILITY, WASTE DISPOSAL, EXPERIMENT ROOM, BOILER ROOM, THRONE ROOM, CONTAINER
    YARD, SOUTHERN CAMP, NORTHERN CAMP (x 2)
    3000 PSTAS
    Although small in size, a precious gem.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GOLDEN LYNX
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: UPPER CLIFFS
    35000 PSTAS (complete)
    A golden statue with 3 holes.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    RED STONE OF FAITH
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-1
    FOUND IN: MESS HALL
    3500 PSTAS
    The markings on the side of the stone indicate that it was once set in
    something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    GREEN STONE OF JUDGEMENT
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-2
    FOUND IN: MEETING ROOM
    3500 PSTAS
    The markings on the side of the stone indicate that it was once set in
    something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    BLUE STONE OF TREASON
    DISK 2, CHAPTER 5-3
    FOUND IN: SOUTHERN CAMP
    3500 PSTAS
    The markings on the side of the stone indicate that it was once set in
    something.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    
    
    MINIGAME ITEMS
    The use of these items is confined purely to the minigames that exist outside
    the regular game.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    PLAGA SAMPLE
    ASSIGNMENT ADA
    FOUND IN: OPERATING ROOM, CRYO STORAGE, HOLDING AREA, EXPERIMENT ROOM, CONTROL
    TOWER.
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    A powerful parasitic specimen, powerful enough to change the fate of the world.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    KRAUSER'S BOW
    MERCENARIES
    FOUND IN: KRAUSER (DEFAULT)
    3 X 7 SLOTS
    A bow that Krauser enjoys using in combat.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ARROWS
    MERCENARIES
    FOUND IN: KRAUSER (DEFAULT) (30), (dropped by enemies in Mercenaries)
    1 X 3 SLOTS
    Arrows to be used with Krauser's bow.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    CUSTOM TMP
    MERCENARIES
    FOUND IN: HUNK (DEFAULT)
    2 X 4 SLOTS
    A compact tactical machine pistol that fires 9mm rounds.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HANDGUN W/SILENCER
    MERCENARIES
    FOUND IN: WESKER (DEFAULT)
    2 X 3 SLOTS (+ 1 X 2 SLOTS)
    A silenced version of the standard 9mm handgun.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    SILENCER (HANDGUN)
    MERCENARIES
    FOUND IN: WESKER (DEFAULT)
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    A silencer compatible with the 9mm handgun.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    
    SPECIAL ITEMS
    
    These items are unlocked after you've complete the game, and various minigame
    tasks.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    MATILDA
    ANY DISK, NEW GAME
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 5 SLOTS
    155750 PSTAS
    A 9mm handgun with Burst-Fire capability.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    INFINITE LAUNCHER
    ANY DISK, NEW GAME
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 8 SLOTS
    500000 PSTAS
    The ultimate rocket launcher!
    Fire away!
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    CHICAGO TYPEWRITER
    ANY DISK, NEW GAME (Assignment Ada completed)
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    3 X 7 SLOTS
    500000 PSTAS
    A powerful .45 caliber machinegun that fires infinite bullets!  Fire away
    Chicago-style.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HANDCANNON
    ANY DISK, NEW GAME (5-star rating, every character, every level in Mercenaries)
    FOUND IN: (Merchant)
    2 X 4 SLOTS
    0 PSTAS
    This is a .50 magnum.
    Need we say more?
    This .50 magnum now fires infinite bullets.
    Gotta love it!
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    HANDCANNON ROUNDS
    ANY DISK, NEW GAME (5-star rating, every character, every level in Mercenaries)
    FOUND IN: (only dropped by enemies, random items)
    1 X 2 SLOTS
    600 PSTAS per round
    Custom made .50 caliber ammo.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ==============================================
    =  15: UNANSWERED QUESTIONS / PARTING SHOTS  =
    ==============================================
    
    * GETTING USED TO THE CONTROLS
    
    The first time I played through this, I failed utterly in the village,
    repeatedly knocking down the ladder from the barricaded house until I finally
    jumped out into the mob and had a shotgun frenzy.  I was amazed that I
    survived.
    
    * FUN WITH CONTINUITY, pt. 1
    
    Why would Saddler go to all the trouble of injecting him with a Plagas egg if
    he was just going to put him back in the village without telling anyone?  We
    might as well guess that either Saddler is not directly controlling the Ganados
    or can't, seeing as how that's supposedly Mendez' job.  Other than that, the
    only logical conclusion is that either a) the whole blasted thing was one big
    test (which doesn't make sense considering how many of Saddler's army Leon was
    allowed to kill) or b) they took an "if he escapes, kill him" approach, since
    Ganados don't get the concept of "capture".  After that, Leon seemed to have
    made himself too much of a liability, as Mendez said.  Still bugs me though.
    
    * PARASITE SIDE EFFECTS
    
    It's hard to tell what purpose the humans serve to the parasites, beyond
    propegation and whatnot.  It doesn't appear that the parasites even need the
    humans, and are ready to escape once they reach maturity (third form).
    
    But one of the things I've noticed is the curious behavior of the Red Zealots.
    
    Red Zealots, one can probably assume, have been infected much longer than their
    compatriots, which would explain the various battle scars and general
    toughness.  But another thing I noticed is that either they're blind or have
    extremely limited eyesight.  Focus in on some of their faces and you can see
    nothing but cataracts.  This may be the effect of the parasite consuming
    whatever it can, or just negligence.  Take your pick.
    
    * FUN WITH CONTINUITY, pt. 2
    
    The Broken Butterfly.  Clearly a six round revolver, but when you increase the
    capacity, the appearance of the gun never changes.  This always gets a giggle
    out of me.
    
    * SEPARATED AT BIRTH?
    
    Jack Krauser and Final Fight / Street Fighter Alpha's Rolento.  C'mon, don't
    tell me you goons weren't thinking it too.  Just replace the knife with a
    baton and...
    
    * FUN WITH NOVISTADORS
    
    On pro mode, I got caught fighting a swarm of novistadors in the caves after
    triggering one of the mechanisms.  Thing is, in pro, Novistadors run on the
    ground a lot more, and they kept on running up to me.  But since I had my
    thumb stuck on A (strike out), I kicked them away every time and got out
    without a scratch.
    
    * FUN WITH CONTINUITY, pt. 3
    
    re: Novistador caves: If the parasites are so incredibly sensitive to light,
    why would they create a trap door that requires an immense ammount of light to
    destroy?
    
    * RANDOMNESS
    
    Why do I always want to play the Andy Asteroids theme from Earthworm Jim
    whenever I'm riding the mine cart?
    
    * FUN WITH CONTINUITY, pt. 3
    
    Ashley, the president's daughter, is almost incapable of defending herself and
    is entirely useless for most purposes, except... she can drive a bulldozer.
    Buhhhhhhh.
    
    * PARASITES, AGAIN
    
    Seriously, what is up with Saddler's staff?
    
    * FUN WITH CONTINUITY, pt. 4
    
    The only reason Krauser ever has to attack Leon is delusion.  Leon is never
    after the sample, doesn't even know what it is really, and doesn't directly
    hinder Krauser's objectives.  If you're trying to rationalize it, you could say
    that killing Leon might score him brownie points with Wesker (as stated in the
    note... by the way, who the hell was he writing it to?), but as far as the
    series is concerned, Leon and Wesker have never even met, and would be a target
    as part of Chris' entourage, at best.
    
    * FUN WITH CONTINUITY, pt. 5
    
    This was advertised as the rebirth of the series; a complete makeover from this
    point onward with a completely different storyline.  But, the endings of the
    game imply that Umbrella as a concept still exists and Wesker is still the
    biggest badass in town.  Will Saddler and crew have any more relevance to the
    series, or was this just a fun little sidestory?
    
    * BLOOPERS 
    
      1. Leon has the same pose in two different pictures in the Alert Order.
      2. Check out the torture cabin again after leaving the area.  It's not
         burning anymore.
      2. Not really a blooper, but the lever for the elevator in the verdugo room
         says Collector something.
      3. Pretty glaring one, but Salazar's hand is fine when you see him after
         throwing the knife.  Since it comes off anyway, I guess he replaced it
         with a fresh one.
      4. The guy who flips the switch in the waste disposal room literally comes
         out of nowhere.  He's spawned when you walk to a certain point in the
         room.
      5. Saddler's first radio transmission post-Krauser directly contradicts the
         "Our Plan" file.
    
    * THE GAME OVERALL
    
    Up until the factory area, I felt like I had played this game before.  It was
    called Castlevania 64, and its horrors were attributed to magic rather than
    viruses and parasites.  That isn't bad, mind you, Castlevania is one of my
    favorite series and while the 3D thing didn't work out too well, it didn't
    disappoint either.  Don't misread me, I like RE4 quite a bit, as it rocks in
    a way that few modern games have been able to muster (particularly 3D ones),
    but the scenery was just a little stock for me.  It just failed to define
    itself.
    
    The dialogue wasn't too bad, not classic RE bad, at least.  It had some clever
    moments ("your right hand comes off?"), but other times it just sucked ("'cuz
    boredom KILLS me", "insects' life doesn't compare to human life!").
    
    Another issue I took with the game, which I doubt was a complaint for anyone
    else, was that the inventory wasn't real time, so odds were that even if I was
    zooming in with my rifle and a hammer commando was about to get all up in my
    grill, I'd still be able to pull out the shotgun and blast him away before he
    was able to hit me.  That seemed a little silly to me, and this is coming from
    a guy who would reload in the inventory screen in the old PS1 games.
    
    Of course, the most important aspect is gameplay, and despite being... well,
    entirely linear, it never really got tedious or exhausting.  What you were
    doing and the cicrumstances you dealt with in combat were always changing, and
    thus the game remained relatively fresh throughout.  The AI wasn't as good as
    advertised (at least in normal), but there were always new reactions you could
    get out of it and new ways to approach dealing with it.  There was enough to
    discover in the surroundings as well to keep the game from losing value on the
    replay.
    
    I had a few [minor] gripes with the setup, not that I wanted the whole "bust
    up Umbrella and zombies" game, but the play redeemed it and made it one of the
    most entertaining games I've played in the modern era of gaming.  Well done,
    Capcom.
    
    ====================================
    =  16: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS  =
    ====================================
    
    Q: Muchitsujo?
    
    A: ... It means chaos and disorder in Japanese.  I'm not Japanese myself,
    but I can never think of screen names for anything.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Why did you write this?
    
    A: Because I love each and every one of you.  Nah, just kidding.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Why did it take you so @%*$# long?
    
    A: I started working two jobs as opposed to my regular one.  That was the
    biggest reason.  The other being that I try to keep these things as thorough
    and fresh as I can, so I took a break or two here and there to keep from
    getting careless.  This is no knock on the game itself, but normal mode just
    bores me to tears most of the time and I think I'm going to make the jump to
    professional soon.  Also the fact that while regular runs through RE games
    might take an hour and a half to three hours, this one took nearly ten.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Will you update this and re-release it for the PS2 port?
    
    A: I don't actually own a PS2, just an old PS1 that's on its last legs, but I
    am planning on buying a PS3, which will grant me backwards compatibility and
    perhaps keep the processors from driving me too insane while running the game.
    This might also lead to me snatching up series like Silent Hill, Devil May Cry,
    and Onimusha and writing a bunch of retro-FAQs for them.  And yes, for those
    curious, I have the beginnings of a RE2 and RE3 FAQs, but I don't know when
    those will get done.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Why do you have a range of enemies instead of an exact number in some
    locations?
    
    or
    
    Q: Why am I seeing fewer enemies than the ones you listed?
    
    A: As reported by various sources, the difficulty of the game [in normal mode]
    does adapt to the player, but instead of making enemies more difficult in
    proportion to how much ass you're kicking, the game knocks down the difficulty
    level a few notches every time you die, and the game continues as such for a
    length of time.  Overall, in my normal and pro runs, I didn't die at all, which
    was a bit unusual for me, as I'm typically run down by a boulder at least once.
    That meant I saw more enemies than I was accustomed to seeing and thus the
    walkthrough reflects the maximum (usually) number of enemies that one might see
    going through this.  Dying will cause the overall numbers to drop considerably,
    like, you may not even see the Garrador in the Dining Hall.
    
    It's also worth nothing that on Professional Mode, what you see here is likely
    what you'll get as the difficulty does not change when you die, or so I've
    heard.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Does the "Retry from Continue Point" count against how many times you've
    been killed or change the difficulty at all?
    
    A: Not that I know of.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: What happened to all the children and old folks?
    
    A: The blue part of the ending video implies that all of them were killed by
    those infected by Las Plagas, seeing as how they'd probably be inferior hosts
    and would require more assistance/supervision.  Them's the breaks.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Who took the photos of Leon in the file you pick up in the village?
    
    A: Since Ganados are rather conspicuous and have trouble with instructions, I'm
    guessing it was Krauser.  Occam's Razor and all.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Why am I not getting the prices you quoted when I sell my gun?
    
    A: The game takes into account how much ammo is left in the clip.  I'm pretty
    sure I sold my guns when they were at full capacity.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Is it worth it to buy the scope/stock for every weapon that has one?
    
    A: Generally, I'd say yeah.  That's not to say that NOT using the scope is
    going to 
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: What is the Del Lago?
    
    A: The Lake, is what it translates to, but the actual creature is harder to
    peg.  Most people insist that it's a variety of salamander, hepped up on drugs,
    parasites, viruses, whatever.  Since it does resemble a few cave-dwelling
    amphibians I've seen, I'll go with that.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: What IS on the other side of the lake after the Del Lago?
    
    A: About four Colmillos.  It's not fun (unless you have incendiaries, then it
    might be).
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Does the cabin where you fight Mendez ever burn down?
    
    A: No worries, fighting Mendez is difficult enough for most people.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: When does Leon learn the suplex?
    
    A: Technically, he doesn't "learn" it, but he can only use it against
    illuminado and commando models.  The ganados you encounter mid chapter 4 are
    still strictly low kick.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Can you run from the Garrador in the first encounter?
    
    A: Nope.  You can sneak into the cell and flip the switch in the tight quarters
    if you try, but if you attempt to leave the area before killing the Garrador,
    the door will close.  They wanted you to figure it out so you could kill more
    of them later when you had to.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Can I really just shoot all the targets to get the rare prize?
    
    A: Yep, the only condition is that you don't shoot Ashley.  I tried it once and
    got the bare minimum of points you can get in that scenario (1250), missed a
    few times, and ignored all the Salazar targets.  Not shooting Ashley is the
    only condition.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: I'm trying to get the Broken Butterfly, but I think the other route is
    faster.  Is it?
    
    A: I'd say they're about equal.  The route I use provides more goodies though.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: At the shooting range, I just shot the dynamite and I'm pretty sure that was
    enough to trigger a Salazar, but nothing happened.  What's going on?
    
    A: Nothing.  It's a bug in the game where it has trouble tallying.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: HELP!  I ALREADY USED THE ROCKET LAUNCHER AND NOW I'M STUCK FIGHTING THE
    VERDUGO!  HOW DO I BEAT IT?
    
    A: By buying another rocket launcher from the merchant in the basement.  I'm
    not planning on writing up an alternate strategy for beating up on the Verdugo
    because I've fought it a few times, and even with the handcannon, it takes more
    shots to kill than I'd really care to think about.  Trying to kill it any other
    way is just a terrible waste of ammo.  You're given the launcher for reason.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Can I use the smelting pit trap to kill both Gigantes?
    
    A: No.  The game is programmed to only let one fall in, and after that, the
    mechanism locks up and you can't use it anymore.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Is there any difference between the S & M Gigante and the Masked Gigante?
    
    A: None at all.  The chains are just for show, along with all the other
    features.  I've never seen them use the chains on Leon or anything, but that
    might've been cool, instead of just bumping up their damage resistance to
    ungodly levels.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Ritual?  It doesn't even seem like anything's happened.
    
    A: Well, either he's bluffing, he just managed to speed up the process slightly
    (she is more easily controlled than Leon), the ritual is just some stupid thing
    the old illuminados came up with that wasn't based on anything, or you have a
    new conspiracy theory to work on until 5 comes out.  I'm hoping you go with one
    of the first three as opposed to the last one.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Why was that one guy in the oven?
    
    A: Same thing I want to know.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Any record times in killing Krauser?
    
    A: One time he was totally failing to defend himself and I wailed on him with
    the butterfly.  Under thirty seconds.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: What about that tube they had Ashley in?
    
    A: No idea, hoping that the PS2 version elaborates a bit.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Do you have to use the special rocket to kill Saddler?
    
    A: Nope, but it's more fun that way, I guess.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Do you think Hunnigan was Ada in disguise?
    
    A: Most of the time when I get this question, the argument is that Hunnigan has
    no glasses at the end.  Let me put it this way, if Ada was resourceful enough
    to get a wig, disguise her voice, and put on the appearance of another person
    completely at random, she'd be resourceful enough to find a pair of glasses
    before calling Leon.  There's just no reason for it.  The characters have
    nothing to do with each other.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Will you be adding target times to each section like in previous RE FAQs?
    
    A: I don't expect to.  The game is longer than any previous RE game, by a
    considerable margin, but time has been rendered all but irrelevant, so there's
    no sense in me trying to do a speed run to my own guide.  I will tell you that
    while I was writing this, it took me about nine and a half hours to get
    through, and one and a half times that is a decent traget time for early runs.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: I'm really not understanding the whole Las Plagas thing.  Care to explain?
    
    A: You aren't the only one; I've yet to find anyone who does.
    
    What we know is this:  Las Plagas have been lurking underground in this area of
    Spain since times long-forgotten (stranger things have happened).  The Los
    Illuminados sect controlled them, but on the whole since the world wasn't taken
    over or anything weird like that, we can guess that they were either pretty
    low-key or they were only dug out of the ground a few centuries prior for
    whatever reason.  The Salazar family originally took control of the mines and
    shut down the Illuminados cult, thereby protecting the countryside from
    whatever wacky mischievious influences they had.
    
    Fast forward to the modern days and the Salazar family has fallen considerably
    in stature (pun intended).  The latest descendant, Ramon, appears to have grown
    up mostly on his own and has gained a strange fascination for his family's
    history along the way, eventually coming to the conclusion that the Illuminados
    were okay guys after all, and somehow coming into contact with Osmund Saddler,
    who we are to assume is the last heir of the knowledge of the Illuminados,
    or the leader of the cult of Illuminados, which could still exist in some way.
    Saddler and band of merry megalomaniacs were given free reign over the village
    and sent workers in to excavate the mines under threat of death.  They found
    nothing but skeletons and fossils of the Plagas inside, leaving them seemingly
    without what they came in for.  Except Plagas can apparently go into a dormant
    state and give off spores which will eventually turn into full-grown Plagas in
    whoever is exposed directly to them.  This manifested a few months later when
    a few of the villagers went nuts and started lashing out against those around
    them.
    
    Here's where things get really screwy.  Apparently, sometime around now things
    took a serious turn for the weird and the bottom line is we don't know how or
    what happened because no one bothered to explain this.  Among these events, we
    have Saddler contracting the queen parasite (either by hanging around the queen
    parasite fossil too long or by unknown means), which could have contributed to
    the villagers going nuts, and passing it along to Ramon Salazar and executive
    henchman Bitores Mendez, and Saddler discovering some way to produce fresh
    Plagas eggs, which means either the parasites generate them on their own or the
    freaky monster Salazar attached himself to was doing it (also totally
    unexplained what it is or how they revived it).  Either way, this eventually
    leads to free Plagas for all, with some possible resistance in the village,
    which was undoubtedly quelled rather quickly.
    
    Sometime around now, the research on Las Plagas started to get serious, leading
    to a bunch of weird experiments resulting in Gigantes, Compillos, Garradors,
    Novistadors, Verdugos, Regenerators, Iron Maidens, and any number of other
    things that probably didn't work out quite as well.  Eventually, they hit some
    major breakthroughs with the research and come across something quite powerful,
    except local boy Luis Sera gets over the intellectual orgasm of researching
    something revolutionary and realizes that just about everyone else is going
    batshit.  He starts planning his escape, but around this time Krauser shows up
    with the president's daughter and he realizes that there has to be some serious
    bad stuff going down.
    
    While the infection was delayed a few years, it seems like it would only make
    sense that it spread quickly seeing as how no one really noticed until it was
    too late and the Plaga only seems to take about a day to fully mature, subject
    to change depending on various plot points.  The total infection of the local
    populace probably took a few weeks, and since then they've been constructing
    various guard posts while those on the island are researching things.  While
    you could consider the breakthroughs to be substantial, most of them appear to
    be significantly flawed and near accidental in their discovery (Regenerators,
    for example, are basically an attempt to cram as many parasites as they could
    into a single body).  I would venture to guess that, as a whole, they probably
    haven't been infected much longer than a few months.
    
    That's the story in a nutshell, but unfortunately it leaves us with a few
    pressing questions...
    
    * How long has Los Illuminados been around?  The cave paintings indicate it's
      much longer than we'd like to believe, but they could have easily decimated
      armies with their power if this had been hundreds of years ago.
    * For that matter, did Los Illuminados always exist in this form or did Saddler
      use it specifically for his own gains?  It is an idealistic cult, after all.
    * Was the cult of Illuminados just a glorfied secret society in recent years?
    * How does the Las Plagas parasite affect the human brain?  The common
      assumption is violent xenophobia, but we don't know how much of it is that
      and how much of it is Saddler being the wacky villan he is.  It seems kind of
      silly that a parasite would want world domination.
    * Follow up on that last point: how did anyone with a standing army the size
      of Saddler's go relatively ignored?
    * How did Saddler get all this money and his huge following to begin with?  The
      mining operation is clearly funding it at this point, but there's nothing to
      say how it all started.
    * Salazar was reported to be a pretty decent guy before the Plagas invasion,
      but how exactly did he and Saddler hook up?  And why is Salazar all on his
      own at a relatively young age?
    * How the #%^@ does a freaking parasite lead to Gigantes, Novistadors, U3, and
      Verdugos?
    * How the bloody hell can parasites sustain themselves inside a suit of armor?
    
    Another would be the question of the rotting food and how exactly the parasites
    sustain themselves, but the third form, the parasites in the underground ruins,
    and the parasites running around on the floor in the Salazar fight lead me to
    believe that sustaining a host isn't exactly a goal, and that they're only
    keeping the host around until they're mature enough to erupt from the body and
    do whatever it is that parasites on their own.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Is Jack Krauser really Hunk without the mask?
    
    A: I got this question before I even started this or bought the game, actually.
    The Mercs mini-game leads me to believe that Jack and Hunk are two different
    guys since they appear as two different playables with different abilities.
    To carry that a little further, Jack is introduced as a former agent with the
    U.S. gov't, and if that's true, then it has to be mutually exclusive to being
    in Umbrella's covert ops.  I see very little reason why they'd hire a guy like
    Hunk to work for them, which is why he's still a mercenary (cha-ching!).
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Is Krauser leading the commandos?
    
    A: I don't know why this keeps on coming up, other than it kind of makes sense
    that military guy would be leading military outfit.  I'm not saying no here,
    but the answer is probably not as the commandos are a Spanish speaking lot,
    implying that Krauser didn't bring them here on his own, and if he was
    controlling them, he would need to have a queen parasite in him and he
    clearly doesn't (see below).
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: So what IS the deal with Krauser?
    
    A: Eugh... Krauser and Leon apparently belonged to the same agency.  That much
    we do know.  It also appears that something serious happened to him in 2002.
    Substitute in whatever you'd like there, be it he fakes his own death, gets
    crossed up with the agency, or whatever you'd like.  Whatever it is, it seems
    to have left him rather unhappy as Leon refers to him as a "good guy" when he
    examines the corpse and in general, he seems like the type with an axe to
    grind.  Sometime later, or even prior (in 2002, or whenever) Krauser meets up
    with Wesker, who has been tinkering around with viruses and has obviously
    given him some sort of nasty refined one (note that his powers CANNOT be from
    Las Plagas, because if they were Saddler would be able to control him more
    easily).  Wesker catches wind of the existence of Las Plagas sometime prior to
    the game and sends Krauser to investigate.  Krauser use his knowledge of the
    government services to kidnap Ashley and get an in with Saddler, but can't
    pull it off, so he or Wesker calls in Ada.  That's about where the story begins
    for us.  He's presumed dead, seeing as how it looks like his heart exploded,
    but Resident Evil characters have come back from worse things and there is no
    way to go back and check if the body's still there (the path is blocked if you
    try).
    
    Of course, there are a few questions about all this, like why Krauser cares
    about how Leon wants to rescue the president's daughter or why Krauser doesn't
    pull out the wonder claw and just skewer Saddler for kicks.  The only
    conceivable explanation for these is that a) Krauser thinks Leon and Ada are
    really in cahoots and that Leon will block him from his ultimate goals and b)
    if he kills Saddler he may never find out where that elusive "sample" is.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Does Assignment Ada fit into the plot of RE4 as a whole?
    
    A: If it did, then we'd have to figure that it happens between Leon's meetings
    with Krauser because prior to that, Krauser had no reason to attack Ada, and
    after that, Krauser is believed to be dead.  Except, when the chopper takes Ada
    away (and she's still in her alternate costume), she closes a case that has not
    only the regular Plagas sample, but the unique one, which would imply that this
    all happens after the regular game.  That doesn't particularly make sense,
    seeing as how a) if this is after the island blew up, the landscape would be
    a lot different, b) Saddler would not have been an issue at the beginning of
    the mission (unless he's somehow alive) c) Krauser is still alive after being
    blown up and shot at by Leon.  The easiest explanation here is to say that
    all of this happens between Leon's meetings with Krauser, but the helicopter
    scene is placed quite a bit of time afterwards, shortly after Ada tosses the
    key to Leon.  It doesn't make any sense if you're assuming the costumes are
    particularly significant, but Ada would have no reason to claim Krauser is dead
    to Wesker otherwise (aside from a dislike for him).
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Why doesn't Luis Sera appear in the Mercenaries game?
    
    A: Because of all the characters in the game that would have any sort of
    incentive to be in Mercenaris, we're most certain of Luis' death.  Would've
    been nice to have him though, give him a Red9 and some other goodies, but it
    would have led to some painful conspiracy theories.  I'd like to personally
    thank Capcom for sparing me that trouble.
    
    To expand on that a little, all the files you read from Luis seem to be written
    before he makes any kind of stand.  That places their creation at pretty much
    any time before the game officially starts, so, while it may seem like Luis has
    run back to the island while you were passed out at the lake, he hasn't (and
    besides, he got to the parasite using the drugs, or so it seems).
    
    The PS2 version might reveal a little more, but that's the jist.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: Are there any significant differences from Professional Mode to Normal Mode
    or do the things mentioned in this FAQ still apply?
    
    A: While Professional mode is not nearly as difficult as one would think (in
    fact, I would argue that it's a lot easier than a number of the hard modes in
    previous RE games), there are a few differences in the style of gameplay.
    
    * ENEMIES MOVE FASTER:  As in, they actually run at you, and commandos seem to
    do nothing but run.  This helps your aiming with bigger targets, but watch out
    if they catch up.
    * ENEMIES AIM BETTER:  Gone are the days of watching bow darts whizz past you.
    I've been hit by the axes of enemies that are around the corner.
    * ENEMIES HIT HARDER:  Or, I should say, the damage done actually makes sense.
    Having your throat slashed by a parasite will actually do a serious chunk of
    damage.
    * ENEMIES ARE SMARTER:  You may be looking at a pack of guys in front of you
    so that one or two stragglers can stab you in the back.  They will also run
    into your camera's blindspot as often as they can.
    * DROPPED ITEMS AREN'T AS GOOD:  You need to work a bit harder to get the goods
    in this.  At some point, you'll be a in a fierce battle and get a lot of stuff
    at once, but otherwise, you're on your own.
    * BOSS BATTLES DON'T HAVE "TRICKS":  Don't get me wrong, the same general
    stategies apply, but all bosses appear to have increased range and the
    techniques are no longer unstoppable.  You should still be able to beat Salazar
    by getting all up in his face without any serious damage, unless your frontal
    lobes are seriously misfiring.
    * TACTICAL VEST DOESN'T DO JACK:  This is something I've heard about, but
    didn't decide to test.  Truth is, if you can make if far enough into the game
    to get the tactical vest, then you probably didn't need it to begin with?
    Spend that money on a better gun.
    * BUTTON-TRIGGERS ARE MORE UNFORGIVING:  A lot of people claim that they have
    to hit the buttons faster, but this seems to be inaccurate.  The truth is, the
    game won't allow you to mess up, hit the wrong buttons, then get away with
    hitting the right buttons immediately after.  And why should it?  Dodging into
    fire is different from dodging away from it.  Just be patient and make sure you
    hit the right buttons in each instance, and don't start early.  (and don't
    sweat the laser corridor, that's always L + R)
    * DIIFUCLTY DOESN'T CHANGE:  Get killed if you want to, but you'll still fight
    the same number of enemies if you retry.
    * MIKE SUCKS:  Mike doesn't help you out nearly as much in Pro Mode.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Q: How the hell did you pull off 144 consecutive kills with Wesker in the
    Castle?
    
    A: Dumb luck.  Perhaps the dumbest ever.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ========================
    =  17: FUTURE UPDATES  =
    ========================
    
    Some things I may add/fix in the future are...
    
    *More on backround effects in the shooting range (considering it)
    *Special item listings for Assignment Ada (is there really a need for it?)
    *ASCII art (oh, the pain... help)
    *Changes in location names based around the principle of eliminating confusion
    and keeping up with what the game says it is
    *Damage chart for the enemies
    
    ======================
    =  18: CONTACT INFO  =
    ======================
    
    Logically, there are going to be a few guidelines for contacting me.
    
    First and foremost, I can only hope you've done a search function on the FAQ or
    read through the entire thing for the answer to your question BEFORE you decide
    to e-mail.  I may just not answer the question and redirect you where to find
    the answer otherwise.  If your question is good, it may make it in here.
    
    Second of all, I prefer my e-mails in English.  I can understand a little bit
    of Japanese, but I really prefer my mail in English.  No 1337, no ebonics, it
    doesn't even have to be the Queen's English, just common speaking English.  If
    I cannot understand you or am too frustrated with your means of phrasing, I
    don't need to respond.  Simple as that.
    
    Third, I'm not interested in fan fiction.  Let's get that clear right now.
    I have fun with this, I do NOT live vicariously through it.  No photos, no
    "inside" information, no BS.  There is no guarentee (actually, theres closer
    to a guarentee I won't) that I will take anything of that nature seriously.
    
    Fourth, I'm sorry if I'm not hardcore enough for your gaming tastes.  I don't
    play through these games with only the knife and I might do so only if I were
    horribly bored.  I can't pull off some neverending combo in a fighting game
    that would send you to your doom.  The most I've ever done is get a ninja
    before the end of the first act of FF:Tactics.  That's good enough for me.
    
    You don't like it, you write a better FAQ.  Same reason as the rest of us.
    
    Fifth, and most importantly, by e-mailing me any sort of conspiracy theory
    or otherwise wacked-out analysis of the events in the game, you're pretty much
    giving me the right to make mention of it and possibly debase the idea in here
    in whatever manner I deem to be appropriate at the time (anonymously, of
    course.  Even if it is mostly a flame, it will not be referred to by name).
    Legitimate questions will be answered, interesting theories will be added, but
    everything else has a very slim chance to get in.  No guarentees, approval
    always pending.
    
    Don't harass me either.  Multiple e-mails won't get your mail read any faster,
    but it may get you blocked.  Same theory applies to flaming.  Like all things
    on the internet, maybe one of these days we'll connect, but you're running
    on your time and I'm running on my time.  Just the way it is.
    
    That said, my e-mail is fearfaq(at)hotmail.com (replace the at with an @, I do
    this to mess with the spambots.  Try to be good and give me some idea of what
    you're talking about in the e-mail title.
    
    
    =====================
    =  19: FINAL NOTES  =
    =====================
    
    As all good FAQ / Walkthroughs come to an end, so must come the shout outs.
    
    Props to:
    
    -- Capcom, for catering to my apocolyptic / B-horror movie needs.
       The name Resident Evil and characters in it are their trademark.  The
       introduction is primarily taken from the game itself.
    
    -- Gamesages, because I snatched the copy of the ending bonuses from them.
       It would be an even bigger pain to figure that out on my own.
    
    -- CJayC, for being an all around good chap and putting up the gamefaqs
       site you are likely using.  Along with the disclaimer in the beginning.
       Posting this as well, cheers.
    
    -- TWilde, for writing the plot analysis I've been a long-time reader of.
       Your attention to detail is incredible, your wit is excellent.
    
    -- Stephen Ng, and the people over at the FAQs section of IGN.  Like CJayC
       and the GameFAQs crew, they also work exceptionally hard to bring you
       the best.
    
    -- Leo Chan, and all the others over at Neoseeker, for all the reasons
       given for the other FAQ sites and more.
    
    -- The people who run RE sites, because sometimes I need to refresh my
       memory, or at least access information on upcoming games and release
       dates.  They also sometimes have information on special features like
       Wesker's Report and for cheapskates like me who don't like to pre-order,
       thanks a lot.
    
    -- People who write FAQs, thanks for keeping me from being the designated
       tech support for my friends.  And vice versa.
    
    -- Robert Johnson.  Hot tamales and they're red hot, yeah, she got em for sale.
    
    No props to:
    
    -- Those who would infringe on the copy rights.  I don't make money off
       of any of this, but seriously, that shit ain't cool yo, and it doens't
       take that much to get permission.
    
    
    
    ---- Copyright 2005 Muchitsujo